Home

Service Manual

Contents

1. O ICM MUM V UGUALI aj lel ICA NN NNI Figure 4 7 EDO and SDRAM memory modules C7085 90921 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 99 Non volatile memory NVRAM The printer uses NVRAM to store I O and information on the print environment s configuration The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is deactivated or disconnected There is one NVRAM on the formatter and one on the DC controller 100 Printer maintenance C7085 90921 Theory of operation Chapter contents IMEOdUCION m PPP 102 Elo Fco A 103 Image formation 4 eae km die ne don A ed Roco e deg hore es ee 104 EUIS CIP OG esc ara 9 929920 90 9 9 VP ae a des Jor Cg RR eR Boe ee arr Eat EU Ga d 105 Laser CX DOS Ue uoces d dotes wes aci sc emi d aan duos dar aches AREE cura Roa ede nie ees 106 BS NON SM 106 lcu POP aae ee gee Sg Reap Ae wi ew oad we Re ee Re a oS Bee de Gee eared 107 Waste toner cleaning 0 cc eee ee ee ee eee eens 109 PIS acter gree arte eas A o gee ned BY arta a ar ee awe eaten or ae 110 Toner aon Le IO a case a e arc a ear OT TOTO TRO DETTO 111 Mechanical system 0 0 ce ee ee ee eens 112 Photosensitive drum Cartridge 0 ee ee eee ees 112 Intermed
2. 92 Printer maintenance C7085 90921 Rotate the two blue latches upward 90 degrees Grasp the finger holds on the fuser and pull the used fuser out of the printer 7 Remove the new fuser from the bag using the finger holds Holding the new fuser by the finger holds slide the fuser into the printer CAUTION The blue latches will lock only if the fuser is installed Lana TTD d 8 Lock the fuser in place by rotating the two blue latches down Reconnect the support straps to the upper rear door C7085 90921 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 93 94 Printer maintenance Replacing the paper rollers Remove Tray 2 from the front of the printer On Tra
3. Ld a a a Se laws El um CE ir 62 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Using PowerSave PowerSave reduces power consumption when the printer is not in use The factory default setting for PowerSave is and the time setting is one hour The instructions below explain how to change the time setting 1 On the control panel press MENU until COHE TGURRTTONM MEHU appears on the control panel display Press ITEM until POBERZQUEZiI HE appears on the HP Color LaserJet 4500 or JE 8 MIH appears on the HP Color LaserJet 4550 Press VALUE or VALUE to display other time setting choices between 1 minute and 8 hours for the HP Color LaserJet 4500 or turning PowerSave off Time choices are between 1 minute and 4 hours for the HP Color LaserJet 4550 see the Resets Menu to turn PowerSave off your saved choice Press Go The control panel displays READ Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 63 Connecting to a network LocalTalk DIN 8 connection 64 Install
4. Serial number Cyan registration Transfer maint Magenta count registration Fuser maint Yellow count registration Color page Top margin count Total page Tray 1 count left margin Cold reset Trays 2 and 3 paper left margin Clear event Print registr tn log page tray Service mode menu map Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 293 Printing the menu map in service mode Printing the menu map while in service mode provides access to the Service Menu as well as other control panel menus and their settings UJ Se Ale OV sin bonnie 4500 Menu Map TOTAL PAGE COUNT 0000000 YE REGISTRATION 07 TRAYS 2 AND 5 LEFT MARGIN 07 Figure 7 18 HP Color LaserJet 4500 series Service menu map service Menu Information Menu Paper Handling Menu Configuration Menu Printing Menu I O Menu Calibration Menu Oo OG FP CQ N 294 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Figure 7 19 Note C7085 90921 FP Cu aet CA HEIDE A 1 INFORMATION MENU ARBENG OF To LPZ ELL EK h L E g Menu Continued yo MENU CALIERATION MENU rT EE 5 n4 een EH TA Pri A s TELLS HP Color LaserJet 4550 series Service menu map Information menu Paper Handling Menu Printing Menu Configuration Menu I O Menu Calibration Menu Resets menu OO JO Oo FPF CQ N Some menus only appear when the hard disk is installed
5. Figure 6 59 Left side fan removal and replacement 1 of 3 C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 197 3 Figure 6 60 Left side fan removal and replacement 2 of 3 Figure 6 61 Left side fan removal and replacement 3 of 3 198 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Figure 6 62 C7085 90921 Face down assembly To remove the face down assembly 1 a Bb W N N O Remove the top cover Remove the left side cover Remove the rear door Remove the left side fan Disconnect the bin full sensor shown in callout 1 Figure 6 62 and free the cable from the cable stay Remove the three screws from the face down assembly shown in callouts 2 and 3 Figure 6 62 With your right hand lift up slightly on the assembly to release the tab Then pull the assembly out with your right hand while pushing the assembly to your right to release the plastic tab on your left Replacement tip Note the position of the black shoulder screw and metal bracket shown in callout 3 Figure 6 62 Rear paper path assembly removal and replacement Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 199 Internal assemblies Cartridge carousel assembly To remove the cartridge carousel assembly 1 Remove the intermediate transfer belt and imaging drum cartridge Protect the drum cartridge from light CAUTION Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum Oo OG FP ND 9 Remove th
6. CAUTION Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 339 C7085 90921 Internal components 3 of 3 Figure 8 8 C7085 90921 340 Parts and diagrams Table 8 8 Internal components 3 of 3 Description Parts for 4500 Parts for 4500 Parts for 4550 series xxG and series xxH and series below above Guide upper drum drawer RB2 1457 000CN included in 14B included in 14B cable Sensor waste toner RG5 3292 000CN RG5 3292 000CN RG5 3292 000CN PS13 DC controller PCB RG5 3809 000CN RG5 5254 000CN RG5 5254 000CN Cable fan RG5 4650 000CN RG5 4650 000CN RG5 4650 000CN Cover cable RB2 1180 000CN RB2 1180 000CN RB2 1180 000CN Cable laser RG5 3782 000CN RG5 3782 000CN RG5 3782 000CN Cable laser flat RH2 5400 000CN RH2 5400 000CN RH2 5400 000CN Carousel brake assembly RG5 5163 000CN Guide cable lower RB2 1456 000CN RB2 1456 000CN RB2 1456 000CN Door switch assembly RG5 5170 000CN RG5 5170 000CN RG5 5170 000CN CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 341 Developing carousel assembly Figure 8 9 C7085
7. Figure 5 25 Paper jam sensors shown with the optional 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex unit installed Registration paper sensor PS2 Duplex paper pick sensor PS3104 Duplex unit pick up paper sensor PS3103 Reversed paper sensor PS3101 Delivery paper sensor PS7 O Ff Q N 122 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Figure 5 26 C7085 90921 Tray 2 cassette The cassette paper sensor PS8 senses paper in the cassette Three paper size detection switches SW801 SW802 and SW803 detect both the paper size and the presence of a cassette The timing of the paper pick up and feeding is based on the home position of the ITB The pick up motor M2 provides the drive force for the front of the paper path Once the paper size detection switch receives the ITB home position detection signal the cassette feed solenoid SL2 is activated and transmits the rotational force of the pick up motor to the cassette feeding pick up roller The roller picks up the paper from the paper cassette A separation roller prevents multiple sheets from being fed while paper is fed into the printer s paper path The cassette feed roller and another feed roller feeds the paper into the printer The paper passes the registration paper sensor PS2 and reaches the registration roller Because the registration roller is not currently rotating the paper temporarily stops The paper s leading edge is then curled and any skew is corrected The DC contro
8. Gea iST HS601400000N RS6 0140 000CN_ RSG 0140 0000N 819 fe Gear 18T NO NO RF5 2161 000CN RF5 2161 000CN RF5 2161 000CN 8 13 RS6 0141 000CN RS6 0141 000CN RS6 0141 000CN 7 RS6 0138 000CN RS6 0138 000CN RS6 0138 000CN 8 13 RS6 0163 000CN RS6 0163 000CN RS6 0163 000CN 8 13 16 356 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 NO NI I O Oj oo JA A Go O1 N NO 4 O O O C O O O O oOo o D e a ais Parts for 4500 Parts for 4500 Parts for HP Reference series xxG and series xxH and Color LaserJet below above 4550 printer ii Description Gear 2677787 G O O O D O O O O O D CD Q vuv oj ojo D D s a ap os s n oO MINI N NI PO N N m O O N Oj O 4 A N N O N NO N Gear 2917171 Gear S TIT8T Gear S4T T8T Gear 377 ASS 0143 0000N_ RSS 0143 0000N RSS 0143 0000N 8 13 25 Gear SSTISTT AL E RB2 1277 000CN Guide cable lower RB2 1456 000CN RB2 1456 000CN RB2 1456 000CN 8 10 13 A N A Guide upper drum drawer RB2 1457 000CN N 8 10 1 cable Handle ITB drawer RB2 1361 000CN RB2 1361 000CN RB2 1361 000CN High voltage power supply RG5 3285 000CN RG5 5165 000CN RG5 5165 000CN 8 8 ICL cam assembly RG5 3242 000CN RG5 3242 000CN RG5 3242 000CN 5 indicator paper level RET S00S 000CN RBT 90090000N ABT 9009 0000N 817 5 interconnect PCB ROS 3808 0000N ROS 380
9. E Figure 7 21 Location of the engine test button 306 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 NVRAM initialization NVRAM initialization should always be executed immediately after replacing the firmware or the formatter board This procedure aligns the firmware with the formatter Not performing NVRAM initialization could result in deterioration of print quality Before initializing NVRAM be sure to gather and write down the information listed below if possible e Total page count and color page count Print a configuration page to obtain both page counts and the serial number e Percentage of life remaining for both the transfer kit and the fuser kit a From SERUICE MODE on the printer display panel press MENU b Go to BERNICE MENL and press ITEM c Use the VALUE keys to go to TRANSFER FEBIMT COUNT AREAEAS and write down the exact numbers shown d Goto FUSER POINT COUNTS HAAAEES and write down the exact numbers shown e Serial number To initialize NVRAM 1 Turn on the printer while holding down both the CANCEL Jos and SELEcT keys until all the LED lights are on then release the keys 2 Press CANCEL JOB 3 Press SELECT After replacing the firmware or the formatter board the following settings are changed or lost If you do not wish to accept the new values use Service Mode to enter the previous settings that you wrote down before initializing e Total page count and total color page count the counte
10. Selecting the display language To change the display language on the printer control panel do the following 1 Press and hold SeLecT on the printer control panel while pressing the standby button power switch Continue holding SELECT until ie EON ved a EEEET LI in English and then release the SELECT key 2 When the control panel displays LAMGUAGESEMGLISH press VALUE repeatedly until your innate ge choices appears 3 Press SELECT to save your language choice An asterisk appears next to the selected language Then press Go 4 After the printer warms up the control panel displays HERE in the selected language See Table 7 2 on page 217 if an error message appears Note If the control panel does not display the message in the language you selected press the printer standby button and repeat the instructions for changing the display language Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 61 Testing the printer operation Print a configuration page to ensure that the printer is working properly 1 Onthe control panel press MENU until TMFGRMATION MEHU appears on the display 2 Press ITem until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears Press SELECT to print a configuration page After about 30 seconds the configuration page prints If it does not print see the Troubleshooting flowchart on page 213
11. 6 65 Cartridge carousel replacement carousel brake 3 of 6 10 0 eee 6 66 Cartridge carousel replacement face down delivery rod 4 of 6 o o o o o o 6 67 Cartridge carousel replacement right side carousel mounting plate 5 of 6 6 68 Cartridge carousel replacement lift out the cartridge carousel 6 of 6 6 69 Paper transport assembly removal and replacement 0 0 0 eee 6 70 Paper pick rollers removal and replacement ee eee ee 6 71 Star wheel assembly removal and replacement llli 6 72 Transfer roller removal and replacement llle 6 73 Cam shaft removal and replacement 0 00 eee ees 7 1 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 Of 2 o ooo ooocoooornno e 7 2 Troubleshooting flowchart 2 of 2 emma o dehet erro eels oe y v id E Ar EIER RT A 7 3 Jam sensors shown with the optional 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex unit installed 7 4 Jam locations shown with the optional 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex unit installed 7 5 Jam locations by error message lee ees rers 7 6 MAGGS TOMADA o te us elaine dieci a eh ae Dort n dip eee Re E UP a b i o 7 7 Color balance calibration page o ooooooorr eee eee es 7 CsAeCDCUIVE CEIECUIUNG cnt vated toga et a de A te eee ees 7 9 Imaging drum exposed to light proportions not to scale 0 ce es TAO AREO Conga page ases irate DA
12. hp color LaserJet 4550 4500 series service manual HP Color LaserJet 4550 4550N 4550DN 4550HDN Printer and HP Color LaserJet 4500 4500 N 4500 DN Printer Service Manual Copyright 2000 Hewlett Packard Company All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws Part number C7085 90921 First Edition October 2000 Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 U S A Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with respect to this information HEWLETT PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for any direct indirect incidental consequential or other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information refi Trademark Credits Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions Arial is a U S registered trademark of the Monotype Corporation CompuServe is a U S trademark of CompuServe Inc ENERGY STAR is a U S registered service mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency Microsoft is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation PANTONE Pantone Inc s check standard t
13. C7085 90921 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 133 Drum motor M4 The drum motor is a two phase stepping motor The drum motor operates the intermediate transfer belt ITB and the photosensitive drum cartridge and its related components Toner cartridge motor M5 The toner cartridge motor is a two phase stepping motor The toner cartridge motor operates the developer sleeve in the toner cartridge and performs the toner contact separation function Fan motor The fan motor is a DC brushless motor containing a hall element and the motor driver circuit The printer has two exhaust fans FM1 and FM2 and one inducting fan FMS 134 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Formatter system CAUTION The formatter PCB is responsible for the following e receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces e monitoring control panel inputs and relaying printer status information through the control panel and the bidirectional I O developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine storing font information communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional interface controlling the PowerSave mode The formatter PCB receives a print job from the bidirectional interface and separates it into image information and instructions that control the printing process The DC controller PCB synchronizes the image formation system with the paper input and output systems and then signals the formatte
14. Gray streaks The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly The printer operating environment does not meet specifications The toner density is set incorrectly The toner cartridge is defective There is excess toner inside the printer Clean the printer The printer is printing on envelope seams Move the text to an area away from seams The imaging drum is defective or at the end of its life Replace the drum kit 258 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Irregular raised spots or stray toner ABCDEFGHIJKL 9AB COE FGH IJ KLM 89A ABCDEFGHIJK 789ABCDEFGHIJK 23456789ABCDE 123456789ABCD Toner collected on the transfer belt can cause smudging on the back of the page Smudges commonly appear on the edges of pages after the media size is changed The belt is self cleaning and the smudging will normally clear within a few pages Toner on the edge of the media is usually caused by toner collecting on the paper guides Inspect the paper guides and clean with a lint free cloth if necessary Do not refeed paper that has already been through the printer Re feeding paper that has already passed through the printer can contaminate the fuser causing stray toner defects Paper might print with blobs after warm up Print a few pages to resolve the anomaly Verify that all media is cleared from the paper path The fuser roller is damaged Replace the fuser kit If one toner color is streaking that toner cartrid
15. PRINT Prints a duplexed simplex if no duplexer LASERJET DEMO 2 present demo page on the size shown in default size 48 MB required for simplex 64 MB for duplex PRINT ACCESSORIES Prints a page giving the accessory and supplies part numbers in English French German and Spanish PRINT COLOR GUIDE Prints a how to use color guide A4 LTR SHOW EVENT LOG Prints a historical list of printer events REMAINING LIFE Displays the projected remaining life for the transfer belt fuser and imaging drum Table 7 12 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Information Menu Description PRINT MENU MAP PRINT CONFIGURATION Prints the control panel menu map Prints the printer configuration page PRINT Prints the available PCL and PS emulated PostScript font FONT LIST samples PRINT Prints the name and directory of files stored in the printer on FILE DIRECTORY an optional hard disk or RAM memory module PRINT Prints a historical list of printer events EVENT LOG SHOW Displays a historical list of printer events on the control EVENT LOG panel PRINT PAPER PATH Prints a test of the paper path for the printer to make sure TESI there are no media jams PRINT USAGE PAGE Prints a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer Also lists whether they were simplex duplex monochrome or color PRINT SUPPLIES Prints the estimated remaining life for the toner cartridges STATUS PAGE transfer belt fu
16. RB2 0981 000CN CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 343 Y O N Paper pick up assembly 1 of 3 Figure 8 10 C7085 90921 344 Parts and diagrams Table 8 10 Paper pick up assembly 1 of 3 Description Cable ITB switch Parts for 4500 series xxG and below RG5 4651 000CN Parts for 4500 series xxH and above RG5 4651 000CN Parts for 4550 series RG5 4651 000CN Microswitch ITB WC2 5330 000CN WC2 5330 000CN WC2 5330 000CN Sensor PS7 delivery paper FH7 7313 000CN FH7 7313 000CN FH7 7313 000CN Sensor PS6 fusing unit pressure release WG8 5309 000CN WG8 5309 000CN WG8 5309 000CN Feeder assembly RG5 3226 000CN RG5 5117 000CN RG5 5117 000CN ITB drawer connector VS1 6174 014CN VS1 6174 014CN VS1 6174 014CN ITB cable C7085 90921 RG5 3786 000CN RG5 3786 000CN Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 345 RG5 3786 000CN Figure 8 11 Table 8 11 h Description Gear 17T Paper pick up assembly 2 of 3 Paper pick up assembly 2 of 3 Parts for
17. The printer creates colors by printing patterns of dots overlaying and varying their spacing to produce various colors Varying the shade or color of your paper will affect the shades of your printed colors Chapter 1 Printer description 31 CAUTION CAUTION Note Heavy paper Use Tray 1 for paper that is 105 157 g m 28 42 Ib bond For optimum results when printing on heavy paper select the heavy print setting in the printer driver You can also use the printer control panel to set the media type to HEF for the input tray you are using Because this setting affects all print jobs it is important to return the printer to its original settings once your job has printed Do not use paper that is heavier than the recommended specification for this printer Doing so can cause misfeeds jams inferior print quality and excessive mechanical wear See Table 1 8 for supported paper types and sizes Envelopes Envelopes can only be printed from Tray 1 For information about loading envelopes see the section in the online user guide about loading envelopes into Tray 1 Adhering to the following guidelines will help ensure proper printing of envelopes and help prevent printer jams e Do not load more than 10 envelopes into Tray 1 The weight rating of envelopes should not exceed 90 g m 24 lb Envelopes should be flat Envelopes must not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged Envelopes with peel off adhesive strips must us
18. C7085 90921 2 Press the VALUE key to set the number 3 Press SELECT to save 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the other numbers if required Total page count Total page count tracks the total number of pages printed As with the color page count the number is not critical but can be useful for customers Setting total page count 1 Press the rev key until TOTAL PRE COUNT appears 2 Press the VALUE key to set the number 3 Press SELECT to save 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the other numbers if required Clear event log Clear event log event log empty does exactly what it says There can be times when it is necessary to clear the event log to allow the tracking of an issue To clear the event log press the SELECT key Once the event log is cleared it will read event log empty The next items in the list deal with color plane registration along with top and left margin settings for the different trays Please refer to the registration page section for an explanation of these settings and how to set them Paper tray size functional test Use the status test feature of the service mode to check the function of the paper tray size switches See the status test address table in this chapter for information about this test Registration page You must set the registration values if both the formatter and DC controller are replaced at the same time or if the formatter had been previously installed in an
19. Check for poor contact between the drum cartridge contact for primary charging bias and the primary charging bias contact To improve the contact clean the contacts If the problem persists after cleaning or the contacts are deformed or damaged replace them If the contacts have slipped off adjust them correctly Check the drum cartridge primary charging roller If defective replace the drum cartridge Check for poor contacts in the connectors Reconnect the DC controller PCB connector and the high voltage PCB 2 connector correctly Check for a defective high voltage PCB primary charging bias output shortage If defective replace the high voltage PCB 2 Check for a defective DC controller PCB If defective replace the DC controller PCB If ITB clutch was removed check for proper timing The black toner cartridge is empty Make sure clutch CL2 is connected plugged into the paper PCA This defect can be caused by improper timing on the ITB clutch gears Make sure that the cams are in sync The two white gears on the left side of the printer see Figure 6 47 should have two timing marks pointing toward each other e Cams with a single line should be off one tooth clockwise on the right gear e Cams with a double line should be aligned Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 255 Blank or white pages Your software application is sending an extra page eject command e Check the software s printing configuration information There i
20. E ES gt 4 aN i mm A z Ac nS c Figure 6 49 Paper path motor removal and replacement C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 187 Paper pick solenoid SL2 To remove the paper pick solenoid 1 2 3 Remove the top cover Remove the left side cover Disconnect the solenoid connector J106 from the paper feed PCB and free the cable from the cable stays Note the cable path when removing the cable Remove the screw callout 1 and e clip callout 2 that hold the solenoid assembly in place and then remove the solenoid assembly For HP Color LaserJet 4500 printers with serial numbers xxH or higher and HP Color LaserJet 4550 printers also remove the screw shown in callout 3 to remove the solenoid assembly Replacement tip CAUTION When reinstalling the solenoid assembly make sure that the flat parts of the Tray 2 pickup rollers are down and that the plastic spring loaded gear is fully engaged ESO e 43 DY AUS dad on 01 y 40300 RATA O Figure 6 50 Paper pick solenoid removal and replacement 188 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Figure 6 51 CAUTION C7085 90921 ITB cleaning roller clutch CL3 To remove the ITB cleaning roller clutch Remove the top cover Remove the left side cover Remove the screw securing the metal CL3 cover plate shown in callout 1 and remove the plate Unplug the connector from the cleaning roller clutch Using needle n
21. Note Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer Remove the top cover Remove the left side cover Remove the rear door Remove the fusing assembly oa fF c N Disconnect the small fan connector shown in callout 1 Figure 6 44 Paper feed PCB removal and replacement 1 of 3 6 Remove the three screws from the left rear sheet metal fan shield shown in Figure 6 44 and Figure 6 45 callout 2 and remove the shield Figure 6 45 Paper feed PCB removal and replacement 2 of 3 C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 183 Remove the screw in the black plastic cover shown in callout 3 Figure 6 44 Remove the black plastic cover Remove the eight cables from their connectors on the paper feed PCB shown in Figure 6 46 10 Remove the screw from the rear of the paper feed PCB callout 4 Figure 6 46 11 Carefully remove the paper feed PCB by sliding the board backwards then tilt the top of the board forward to clear the top of the board from the metal tab along the top of the PCB Paper feed PCB replacement tip Carefully insert the paper feed PCB into the chassis ensuring that the two paper feed PCB metal tabs sit in the open tab holders in the chassis Figure 6 46 Paper feed PCB removal and replacement 3 of 3 184 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Fusing motor M1 To remove the fusing motor Note Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer 1 Remove t
22. Press SELECT to save the setting Q1 fF N Press Go to return the printer to the FERED state in step 3 above If jam recovery is disabled the pages involved in a jam will not be reprinted 242 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Image formation troubleshooting The image formation system Figure 7 6 consists of the following imaging units e photosensitive drum cartridge carousel laser scanner toner cartridges intermediate transfer belt ITB unit secondary transfer roller Laser beam Electro Developing ten formation Toner A SL OY ee cartridge PYV NA gt Ae NA T Figure 7 6 Image formation Before beginning image formation troubleshooting check that the media meets the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide Print density test and color checks Use the configuration page to check the print density of the black primary and process color levels Solid black and color filled areas on the configuration page demonstrate the ability to print at full density To print a configuration page see page 287 In addition to the items listed above the configuration page provides the following information e thelps isolate the problem to the software or the printer e It shows that all colors print The following media related items are responsible for many image formation and print quality defects rough paper eo heavy paper e transparencies out of t
23. RB2 1456 000CN Guide cable lower RB2 1457 000CN Guide upper drum drawer cable RB2 1556 000CN Strap cover support RB2 5185 000CN Bushing ITB left RF5 1885 000CN Roller separation RF5 1885 000CN Roller separation RF5 2076 000CN Cover toner access RF5 2092 000CN Roller RF5 2112 000CN Roller transfer RF5 2138 000CN Plate support RF5 2152 000CN Connector RF5 2161 000CN Gear 18T 52T RF5 3137 000CN Cover toner access RG5 3170 000CN Drum drive assembly RG5 3226 000CN Feeder assembly RG5 3227 000CN Motor M1 fusing assembly RG5 3228 000CN Gear assembly RG5 3234 000CN Sensor paper size RG5 3235 000CN Transfer assembly secondary RG5 3240 000CN Transfer cam assembly RG5 3241 000CN ITB cam assembly RG5 3242 000CN ICL cam assembly RG5 3245 000CN Solenoid Tray 2 feed SL2 RG5 3281 000CN Sensor PS14 density RG5 3285 000CN 360 Parts and diagrams High voltage power supply C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Table 8 19 Numerical parts list Petrum oesrpion are trons RG5 3292 000CN Sensor PS13 waste toner RG5 3296 030CN Drawer switch assembly RG5 3300 000CN Cover top RG5 3309 000CN Carousel brake assembly RG5 3310 000CN Cover right front RG5 3313 000CN Cover left side RG5 3319 000CN
24. connector to the printer and the male B connector to the computer HP recommends that the parallel cable length be no longer than 10 meters 30 ft in length The cable HP part number C2946A is included with the HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer and the 4550 printer It must be purchased separately for the HP Color LaserJet 4500N 4500DN 4550N 4550DN and 4550HDN printers Parallel cable with a C connector Parallel interface When used to describe a parallel interface the term bidirectional indicates that the printer is able to both receive data from the computer and send data to the computer through the parallel port To use the enhanced capabilities of the bidirectional parallel interface such as bidirectional communication between the computer and printer faster transfer of data and automatic configuration of printer drivers your software application must support these capabilities When you are using multiple ports you can adjust automatic I O switching to maximize performance by using the timeout feature If data from other ports appears in the middle of your print job increase the I O timeout value 58 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 Connecting a parallel cable 1 Press the printer standby button power switch to place the printer in standby mode Turn off the computer 2 Plug the parallel cable into the printer s parallel port until it snaps into place 3
25. where you can order printer supplies Order Supplies is only available from the Device page set e Language page Determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server information e Device Identification page Name the printer and assign an asset number to it Input the name and email address of the primary point of contact for information about the printer This page also shows the printer s network names addresses and printer model information 286 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 WWW Note Figure 7 13 C7085 90921 Networking page set This set of pages allows the network administrator to configure the HP JetDirect card for the printer Refer to the online Help and to the HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator s Guide for more information To download the HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator s Guide go to http www hp com support 114550 When you connect select Manuals Printer configuration page Printing a printer configuration page can help you verify that the printer is configured properly This can be useful in troubleshooting printer problems To print a printer configuration page 1 On the printer control panel press Menu until HFOEMATION MEHL appears 2 Press ITEM until FRIHT COHPFIGURHTIUOM appears 3 Press SELECT to print the configuration page The printer will return to the EEBE state If the printer is configured with ElO cards for example an HP JetDirect Print Server an additional
26. 1 2 Remove Tray 2 Open the drum drawer top drawer until it stops and remove the imaging drum protecting it from light Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 3 4 5 6 7 Open the ITB drawer middle drawer Remove the control panel Remove the three screws as shown in callout 1 Figure 6 12 Using a small flat blade screwdriver release the two plastic tabs callout 2 Figure 6 12 Remove the cover Front right cover removal and replacement Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 155 Radio Frequency Interference RFI shield To remove the RFI shield Note Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer Remove the top cover Remove the left side cover Remove the 13 screws shown in Figure 6 13 bb c N Lift up on the RFI shield and remove e d I gt r Figure 6 13 RFI shield removal and replacement 156 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Laser scanner assembly To remove the laser scanner assembly Note Turnthe printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the left side cover 3 Remove the RFI shield 4 Disconnect the cable from the laser scanner to the DC controller J1006 on the DC controller See callout 1 Figure 7 37 on page 317 Free the cable harness from the two cable stays shown below in callout 1 Disconnect the flat ribbon cable and the other cable from the laser s
27. 252 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Image defects C7085 90921 Unless otherwise specified all references in this section to horizontal or vertical directions of print quality problems refer to problems found on A 4 and Letter sized media For more information ona specific image defect see the page numbers below each image in the following table Table 7 7 Image defect table Background scatter2 Banding and horizontal lines2 Black lines Black or partially black pages see page 254 see page 254 see page 255 see page 255 No image available s Character voids Distorted image see page 257 AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbcc No AaBbCc AaabCc Image AaBbCc AaBbCc available AaBbCc AaB gt aCc AaBbCc Faded print random faded Full page ghosting areas see page 258 see page 258 ABCDEFGHIJKLM RSCDEFCHTRE AoBbCc 89ABCDEFGHIJK No 78 9ABCDEFGH JK Anspc Image ALS available AaBbCc 23456789ABCDE AaBbcc 123456789ABCD Light black or no black print Loose toner see page 259 see page 260 No ae tl No No image image image available ton available available Mottled or marbled output i Single color missing see page 260 No image available Sunburn Vertical lines or streaks Wavy characters see page 260 see page 262 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 253 CAUTION Additional defect information is found in the following sections e Overhead transparency defects see page 263 e Repetitiv
28. 9000 4 8 12 16 20 24 Pages job 4 color simplex Letter 4 color duplex Letter Monocolor simplex Letter Monocolor duplex Letter 4 color simplex Legal 4 color duplex Legal Monocolor simplex Legal Monocolor duplex legal C7085 90921 CAUTION C7085 90921 Replacement intervals for consumables You can identify consumable items by their labeling and their blue plastic handles For instructions on installing consumables see the installation guides supplied with each consumable item The following table lists the replacement intervals and part numbers for printer consumable items and the control panel messages that prompt you when it is time to replace each item Table 4 2 Approximate replacement interval for consumable items Consumable Printer message Page count Approximate Part number time period Black K toner 9 000 pages 4 5 months R94 4005 410CN o TOME ER E Dur see Table 8 1 Cyan C toner TOMER LO 6 000 pages 3 months R94 4004 410CN cartridge TOMER OUT see Table 8 1 Magenta M TOMER M LOH 6 000 pages 3 months R94 4003 410CN toner cartridge TONER Pb GUT see Table 8 1 Yellow Y toner TEHER v LHe 6 000 pages 2 3 months R94 4002 410CN cartridge TOMER Y OLIT see Table 8 1 Drum kit Pilih KIT CHT 25 000 black 12 5 months for R94 4001 410CN Pup deer pena eer hand wnile black and white see Table 8 1 only pages or only page
29. Drum bushing assembly RG5 3320 000CN Cover ITB drawer RG5 3325 040CN Door rear access RG5 3345 000CN Control panel assembly RG5 3355 000CN Sensor PS12 toner assembly RG5 3400 210CN Cassette 250 sheet RG5 3781 000CN Cable main RG5 3782 000CN Cable laser RG5 3783 000CN Cable developer RG5 3785 000CN Cable paper feed RG5 3786 000CN Cable ITB RG5 3787 000CN Cable fusing option RG5 3795 000CN Cable rotary RG5 3802 000CN Cable control panel RG5 3808 000CN Interconnect PCB RG5 3808 000CN Interconnect PCB RG5 3809 000CN DC controller PCB RG5 3810 000CN Paper feed PCB RG5 3810 000CN Paper feed PCB assembly RG5 3811 000CN Developing PCB RG5 3811 000CN Developing PCB RG5 3816 000CN Paper size sensor PCB RG5 3886 000CN Cable fusing connector RG5 3887 000CN Cable fan RG5 3900 000CN 500 sheet paper cassette RG5 4055 000CN Duplexing feeder assembly RG5 4650 000CN Cable fan RG5 4651 000CN Cable ITB switch RG5 4696 000CN Rowel swing assembly RG5 5115 000CN Transfer assembly secondary RG5 5117 000CN Feeder assembly RG5 5118 000CN Transfer cam assembly RG5 5119 000CN Solenoid Tray 2 feed SL2 RG5 5120 100CN ITB drawer assembly Chapter 8 Parts anddiagrams 361 Table 8 19 N
30. Media requirements Selecting print media You can use many types of paper and other print media with this printer This section provides guidelines and specifications for selecting and using different print media Before purchasing any media or specialized forms in quantity verify that your paper supplier obtains and understands the print media requirements specified in the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide The guide is available through HP Direct See the online user guide for ordering information lt is possible that media could meet all of the guidelines in this chapter and still not print satisfactorily This may be a result of abnormal characteristics of the printing environment or to other variables over which Hewlett Packard has no control for example extremes in temperature and humidity Hewlett Packard recommends testing any media before buying it in large quantities CAUTION Using media that does not conform to the specifications listed here and in the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide can cause problems that require service This service is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements Media specifications For optimum results use conventional 75 g m 20 Ib xerographic paper Verify that the paper is of good quality and is free of cuts nicks tears spots loose particles dust wrinkles curls or bent edges Avoid fanning the print media before loading it into the paper trays 28 Printer d
31. PRESS SELECT TO CHANGE TONER Description The toner cartridge specified is low on toner me nos 9e iy This message appears when TOWER LOW 224 Troubleshooting Action Press Select to enter the toner replacement mode Press Go to resume printing without changing the cartridge Action Press Select to enter the toner replacement menu C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error messages continued TONER POSITION COLOR STATE Description Indicates the current state of a particular toner cartridge This message appears when Select is pressed while a TOMER LAU message appears TRANSFER KIT LOW REPLACE KIT 4500 Of TRANSFER KIT LOW ORDER KIT 4550 Description The transfer kit is near the end of its expected life Action If necessary replace the specified toner cartridge Action Continue printing and order Transfer kit The transfer kit will need to be replaced when the message Transfer Kit Out is displayed TRANSFER KIT OUT REPLACE KIT Description The transfer kit has reached the end of its expected life TRAY X EMPTY TYPE SIZE Description The specified tray is empty but the current job does not require this tray to complete the job Action Replace the transfer kit Action No action required However loading the proper media type and size into the tray will avoid this message in the future TRAY X LOAD TYPE SIZE Descriptio
32. The printer driver which is installed with your printer software enables your software applications to use the features of the printer It also gives you customized control of color text graphics and photos The method of using your printer driver depends on your computer s operating system For specific instructions about using printer drivers see the printer driver s Readme file which is included on the printing system CD ROM The following color control features are available only through your HP printer driver See the printer driver s online Help for details about color settings and their effect on printed output 244 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Halftone options Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output You can select halftone settings for text graphics and photos independently The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail The Smooth option provides better results for large solid filled print areas It also enhances photos by smoothing out fine color gradations The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors such as images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 245 HP ColorSmart II Note HP ColorSmart Il is a set of technologies that enables optimal color output automatically for diverse types of documents HP ColorSmart II utilizes object tagging and Standard RGB sRGB color
33. Toner density Mechanical system Paper path DC controller subsystem Motors and fans Formatter system Power supplies Toner level sensing system 102 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Basic operation Figure 5 1 C7085 90921 HP LaserJet 4500 series and 4550 series printer functions are divided into three systems the image formation system paper pick up feed system and engine control system These systems are thoroughly described in this chapter To external device host computer etc through the video controller PCB ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM e Primary IMAGE charging roller FORMATION O O D D A O 2 Developing unit Intermediate ITB cleaning transfer belt roller Face up Fixing tra unit E ee S 7 Duplexing unit option De d C tt Cassette paper assole pick up unit j Pemerfeeder opio PICK UP FEED SYSTEM n n D D AAA eee eee i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i ee ee ee ee eS eS Basic system operation Chapter 5 Theory of operation 103 Image formation The image formation system is the central hub of the printer During image formation the color image is created The image formation system consists of the following imaging units e photosensitive drum cartridge e carousel laser scanner e toner cartridges e TB unit e secondary trans
34. 1 Press the ITem key to scroll through the service menu until top margin appears 2 Press the Menu key until the number to be entered appears 3 Press the SELEcT key to enter the number Print another registration page and the number just entered will align with the arrow and be printed in bold The left side margin setting is tray dependent Tray 1 has its own number while trays 2 and 3 are combined The procedure is the same as the top margin with one exception The page must be printed from the tray that will be adjusted Printing from tray 1 1 Press the Item key until PRINT REGISTRATION POGE TER 1 default appears 2 Press the SELECT key 3 Measure from the left side of the paper to the lines and find the line which is 13 mm 0 5 inches from the edge If the number for the line is different than the current number 1 Press the ITem key until TERY i LEFT MARGIN appears 2 Press the VALUE key to change the number to the number required 3 Press the SELECT key Printing from tray 2 and 3 1 Press the Irev key until PRIHT REGISTRATION PAGE TES or appears 2 Press the SELECT key 3 Measure from the left side of the paper to the lines and find the line which is 13mm 0 5 inches from the edge If the number for the line is different than the current number 1 Press the ITem key until TERY Z AMD 3 LEFT MARGIN appears 2 Press the VALUE key to change the number to the number required 3 P
35. CFCs are not used in manufacturing of the packing This HP LaserJet printer design reduces e Energy Consumption Energy usage drops significantly from printing mode to PowerSave mode As an ENERGY STAR partner Hewlett Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR A Guidelines for energy efficiency e Paper Use The printer s optional duplex printing accessory provides two sided printing reducing paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources The design of this HP LaserJet printer facilitates the recycling of e Plastics Major plastic parts have markings that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the printer s life e HP Toner Cartridges Photoconductive Drum In many countries this product s toner cartridge drum can be returned to HP at the end of its useful life A prepaid shipping label and instructions on how to return the toner cartridge drum are included with the replacement toner cartridge drum If your country is not listed in the replacement s brochure call your local HP Sales and Service Office for further instructions HP recycling program information This HP LaserJet printer also contributes to protecting the environment in the following ways e HP LaserJet printing supplies ln many countries this product s printing supplies e g toner cartridge drum fuser can be returned to HP through the HP Planet Partners Printing Supplies Env
36. Chapter 5 Theory of operation 107 Intermediate transfer belt Secondary transfer roller Figure 5 7 Secondary transfer Separation As the media passes the secondary transfer roller it passes over the charge eliminator The charge eliminator removes any positive charge on the media that came from the secondary transfer roller The elimination of positive charges decreases adhesion of the paper to the belt and allows for better separation ITB cleaning roller contact separation cam Charged residual toner Intermediate transfer belt ITB cleaning roller Residual toner Figure 5 8 Separation 108 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Waste toner cleaning The waste toner cleaning process begins when residual toner from the ITB is transferred to the photosensitive drum The toner is then transferred to the waste toner reservoir Waste toner cleaning operation Although most of the toner is transferred from the ITB some residual toner remains The ITB cleaning roller moves into position and places a positive charge on the residual toner When the residual toner reaches the drum it is transferred to the drum s surface by the drum s negative charge The residual toner is then transferred from the ITB to the drum This waste toner is then removed from the drum s surface by a cleaning blade collected by the sweeper strip and placed in the waste toner reservoir by the waste toner transfer plates Intermediate transf
37. Quick Copy Jobs menu only shown if a hard disk or RAM disk is installed Private Stored Jobs menu only shown if a hard disk or RAM disk is installed Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 295 Description of Service Menu items The following menu items should be used by trained service personnel only These items are used to ensure the printer functions properly Serial number The serial number displayed on the front panel should match the serial number tag located on the rear of the printer as this is the serial number printed on the configuration page Setting the serial number 1 Press the ITem key until SERIL HUMEER number appears 2 Press the VALUE key to change the character with the cursor under it 3 Press SELECT to save the character and move the cursor to the next slot 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the characters match the label on the back of the printer Transfer maintenance count There are two methods to track the life of the intermediate transfer belt ITB e The life lever on the ITB actually indicates when the ITB has reached its end of life e The transfer maintenance count printed on the configuration page shows the percent of life used This number is not critical to printer operation but it provides a way for customers to monitor consumable life The transfer maintenance count is set to zero when the life message for the ITB is reset If you replace the ITB before the end of life message appears yo
38. SELECT to save the value An asterisk appears next to the selected setting Step 3 Adjust the magenta M density setting Examine the magenta density bar M If the center oval matches the background pattern more than the other ovals the magenta density does not need to be adjusted and you should continue with the next step If not use the following steps to adjust the density 1 Press ITEM until MAGENTA DEHSIT appears 2 Press the right side of the VALUE key to increase the value or press the left side to decrease it until the number corresponding to the oval that most closely matches the background pattern appears Step 4 Adjust the yellow Y density setting Examine the yellow density bar Y If the center oval matches the background pattern more than the other ovals the yellow density does not need to be adjusted and you should continue with the next step If not use the following steps to adjust the density 1 Press ITEM until ELLE DEHZITY appears Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 251 Note 2 Press the right side of the VALUE key to increase the value or press the left side to decrease it until the number corresponding to the oval that most closely matches the background pattern appears 3 Press SELECT to save the value An asterisk appears next to the selected setting Step 5 Adjust the black K density setting Examine the black density bar K If the center oval matches the background pattern mor
39. Slide the trough toward the rear of the printer until it is free Disconnect J204 on the developing PCB and free it from its cable stay Remove the eight black screws from the drum drive assembly shown in Figures 6 35 and 6 36 Gently slide the drum drive assembly straight out from the printer assembly taking care not to damage the cable 176 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 O A as J mido e Ll e NEC e DD zm a z el i 1 Figure 6 36 Drum drive assembly removal and replacement 3 of 3 C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 177 Large fan housing To remove the large fan housing Note Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer 1 Remove the formatter pan assembly Remove the four screws shown in Figures 6 37 and 6 38 callout 1 from the large fan housing Remove the large fan housing ASS A 800 o MM a LL A MER A A M Figure 6 37 Large fan removal and replacement 1 of 2 4 Disconnect connector J209 on the developing PCB and free the cable from its cable stays 5 Unweave the cable from the cable trough to remove it 6 Remove the screw from the right rear fan housing shown in callout 2 E uox E EA M p i 5 A EA c AE S A AA J a A TAE A EN ZH LA Su ERN t Figure 6 38 Large fan removal and replacement 2 of 2 178 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Note Figure 6 39 Note C7085 90921 Carousel driv
40. TEA 2 TRE SETA TIA PLI me FATIT THAT Tree EL BS AT dL v ES AA IHT EF FL L TRA Tr e ES BSL ORI RFT h uir ee E Lb BS P gt HT PITS H dem CALIERATIOM MEHI CEH dr Pri E Ti A ITI TELLA EEHSrITUT Wr LITE CENTS EEE CEN Sr vob LU EE HELE gt TM aT Se CA as Menu Esntiinu d E 5 Hei i i n WT RT EE E IEA HS AEE Oe T gt Le PP His ed EA DESOM E ES Fr E E AO PA MN ART ET eS EE P SEE 4550 series menu map Information menu Paper handling menu Printing menu Configuration menu I O menu Calibration menu Resets menu Quick Copy Jobs menu only shown if a hard disk is installed O ON Oo OFF FP C N m Some menus only appear when the hard disk is installed 272 Troubleshooting Private Stored Jobs menu only shown if a hard disk is installed C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Information Menu The Information Menu selections are used for changing and printing specific printer information Table 7 11 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Information Menu Menu item Description PRINT MENU MAP Prints the control panel menu map PRINT Prints the printer configuration page CONFIGURATION PRINT CONFIG Continuously prints the configuration page CONTINUOUS until Cancel Job is pressed PRINT Prints the available PCL and PS emulated FONT LIST PostScript font samples PRINT Prints a demonstration page containing LASERJET DEMO five images A4 LTR
41. Testing the printer operation 1 2 RI IR tr 62 USIMO TPOWOISSVG scenic a dee oder Redi otl dixo ar dod C god de e ian dl serae ur 63 Connecting to a network o o o oooooor eee 64 Connecting to a LocalTalk network J3111A only 0 0 0 0 0 cee nee 64 Connecting to a 10Base2 network J3111A only 2 2 ee ee 65 Connecting to a 10Base T or 10 100Base TX network 0 0 cc eee es 66 Enhanced I O EIO configuration 0 0 RR ene 67 HP JetDirect print ServerS 0 ee mnn 67 Ec O AA teas Sonat aeons basa ance 4 eee eae eee we 68 CPU vee end PP beeae Geese pero e peat EE E sas 68 Punler QUVEIS nano e as pacta go a pto ea es 69 Network configuration 23 m Rede ate cie de oe ee Xia 70 Configuring the printer for the network 2 0 0 0 cc eee eee 70 Configuring Novell NetWare frame type parameters 0 00 eee ee eee 70 Seele sa s eaga sapos dare bapa dk po were ey Wee ee ddan edna ed 71 NetWare 3 x and 4 x based products 0 0 0 ccc teens 71 Windows 3 1 Windows 95 and Windows NT 3 51 and 4 0 networks 71 IBM OS 2 LAN Server and Warp Server networkS llle 72 Locallalk TIG WOLPK 23 3 42 0 92 4 8 994 Se ee 21726 rd ed 8 ed wee Seo ae a S 72 UNIX DeDWOFKS x acku sae sone dee SE d dod X eR emo or OES rco ew RR Rd ER a 72 Setting network security on the printer lille 73 Locking the control panel aana cc ee rr 74 Using an ASCII PUL escape se
42. These parts require exchange CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series 338 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 Internal components 2 of 3 Figure 8 7 Internal components 2 of 3 Table 8 7 Ref Parts for 4550 series 5335 000CN RG5 3808 000CN RH2 RB2 1277 000CN RG5 5186 000CN RF5 2112 000CN RG5 5142 050CN RG5 5206 000CN Parts for 4500 series XXH and 5335 000CN 3808 000CN RH2 RG5 000CN 1277 HB2 000CN 2112 000CN RG5 5186 RFS RG5 5142 050CN RG5 5206 000CN LO T im O a o m i A x c O gt x Y um O 0 RH2 5335 000CN 000CN RB2 1277 000CN RG5 3781 000CN RG5 3808 RF5 2112 000CN 5230 000CN RG5 OOOCN RG5 5206 Qty Description Cable video interface Interconnect PCB Guide cable Cable main Roller transfer Drum drawer assembly Drum drive assembly will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series
43. affect on drum life 81 settings 278 short 80 print media guide 28 printer drivers color output 244 ordering 43 settings 69 Printer Job Language PJL commands 269 Technical Reference Manual 75 printer language support 17 printer status page 286 C7085 90921 printing configuration page 287 event log 292 menu map 271 294 supplies status page 290 usage page 291 Printing Menu 278 prism mirror 120 Private Stored Jobs Menu 284 processor 68 production number 18 Publisher Microsoft 249 punched paper 30 Q quality troubleshooting 253 Quark Xpress 249 Quick Copy Jobs Menu 283 quick reference guides ordering 43 R Radio Frequency Interference RFI shield removing 156 raised spots troubleshooting 259 raster images 249 rear assemblies removing 195 rear door interlock switch defeat 316 locating 26 removing 147 switch 135 rear output bin capacity 17 locating 26 recovery jam 242 recycled paper 33 registration adjustment 130 registration clutch CL1 123 registration page 297 registration paper sensor PS2 122 123 131 registration roller cleaning 78 operations 123 regulatory information power rating 19 release button dark gray 51 top cover 25 remanufactured assemblies 42 removing packing tape 49 parts important notices 139 sealing tape 52 repair notices 139 repetitive defects causes 265 ruler 266 transparencies 263 replacement intervals consumables 83 imaging drum 80 ITB 114 296 kits 142 photo
44. configuration page will print that provides interface configuration information Interpreting the printer configuration page The following sample illustrates a printer configuration page 4500 series left and 4550 series right printer configuration page 1 Printer information Lists the printer serial number PCL Emulated PostScript firmware revision total number of pages printed during the life of the printer and total number of color pages printed during the life of the printer 2 Eventlog Lists the last five printer events including printer jams service errors and other printer conditions 3 Installed personalities and options Lists installed options such as EIO cards DIMMs duplex printing accessory and 500 sheet paper feeder 4 1 0 menu Color LaserJet 4500 series only Lists the current settings of the I O menu items Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 287 10 11 12 13 Configuration menu Color LaserJet 4500 series only Lists the current settings of the configuration menu items Printing menu Color LaserJet 4500 series only Lists the current settings of the printing menu items Memory Shows the total memory installed and the total memory available in the printer Also lists the memory allocation settings Security Shows whether the printer control panel is locked or unlocked Also shows whether the printer control panel password is enabled or disabled Paper trays List
45. e Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage e Before you load preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off of preprinted paper Recycled paper This printer supports the use of recycled paper Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as standard paper refer to the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide available through HP Direct See the online user guide for ordering information Hewlett Packard recommends that recycled paper contain no more than 5 percent groundwood C7085 90921 Chapter 1 Printer description 33 Environmental Product Stewardship Program Protecting the environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner This HP LaserJet printer has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment This HP LaserJet printer design eliminates e Ozone Emissions This product has been designed to minimize ozone emissions and avoid the need for an ozone filter e CFC Usage Class U S Clean Air Act stratospheric ozone depleting chemicals chlorofluorocarbons CFCs for example have been eliminated from the manufacturing sites that produce this printer This practice coincides with the 1987 Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer and its subsequent amendments
46. ooooocoooooo rn 161 Drum drawer top drawer assembly n n annann ee eee ees 163 Densitometer assembly 0 00 ccc eee hh 166 Right side assemblies nannan naaa ee ee eee eee rr 168 A III 168 oi 640556555 52 rE deb eoe eee gee bane 169 Formatter pan assembly 2 0 0 ee eee eee eee ene ees 170 FOwWer SUDD cannon te ean dae wane e dee een AE EE een de eS 173 High voltage power supply 0 0 cc eee ee eens 174 Drum drive assembly 53 2 a son ee e 8070 06 9238 a2 ad a6 e R8 RC ye a 176 latae fan BOLHSITIO waren ap b ors e e lO oq fo RP db ie e ee as Eco bet pou x a Prodi edd 178 Carousel drive assembly 2 eee 179 Paper siZe SwItcH POB second ence sea x EIU P S Rob scd d ia dea aces e 181 Left side assemblies 1 0 cee errans 182 Drawer switch assembly 2 0 0 0c eee has 182 Paper teed POB M 183 aimed i dint rat eae ee ee oe ee ee ee 185 Paper path pick up motor M2 2 0 0 cc RR n 187 Paper pick solenoid SL2 o oooocoooooo eee rn 188 ITB cleaning roller clutch CL3 0 0 0 0 lille 189 ITB cl tei oE2 assembly 3 ero eee bande aude 4 boue Sot ios dat 190 Transfer roller cam clutch CL4 lille 192 OM SIGC CCAS P 193 C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 137 Hear assemblies a a a 195 EargeqigHEside tal sua ete dvo iua dao Re lues 2 d ER ot o see d dec e 195 PSST SIGS Teal A A
47. regarding print media checks troubleshooting jams and the differences between jams caused by media and those caused by the printer are discussed Image formation troubleshooting provides print samples to help identify print defects and suggests methods for solving the problems Interface troubleshooting provides techniques for isolating communication problems to the printer hardware printer configuration network configuration or software application Control panel troubleshooting provides procedures for printing a menu map from the printer control panel and describes the control panel menus the items within each menu and the possible values for the menu items Troubleshooting tools help isolate the cause of printer failures This section includes explanations of the printer configuration page and the event log The service mode section provides procedures for entering service mode and performing service oriented tasks These tasks include counts for entering the serial number transfer maintenance fuser maintenance color page total page clearing the event log and various printer tests The diagnostics mode section provides instructions on how to access and use the diagnostic tools incorporated into the printer Diagrams provides graphical locations and tables for the printer s internal assemblies and sensors Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 211 Troubleshooting process The troubleshooting process requires both a mental and ha
48. storing 33 weights 29 memory access location 26 adding 98 configuration report 288 duplex unit 15 localized font DIMMs 325 non volatile NVRAM 100 NVRAM initialization 307 ordering 326 resetting 282 standard 16 supported 16 menu map printing 271 294 menus Calibration 281 Configuration 276 EIO 280 hard disk dependent 283 I O 280 Information 273 locking 73 Paper Handling 274 Printing 278 Private Stored Jobs 284 Quick Copy Jobs 283 Resets 282 Service 296 messages error alphabetical list 217 clearing 217 282 jams 239 numerical list 226 Micrografx Designer 249 Microsoft Internet Explorer 285 Microsoft Office 247 249 Microsoft Publisher 249 middle drawer cover removing 151 C7085 90921 middle drawer removing 152 mirrors 120 misfeeds 241 missing colors 260 model numbers 18 models drum drawers 335 HP LaserJet 4500 14 140 modes diagnostics 300 service 293 monitors affect on color 244 247 monochrome print speed 17 motors diagrams 310 fan 134 locations 133 M1 fusing operations 114 127 133 M1 fusing removing 185 M2 pick up operations 122 126 133 M2 pick up removing 187 M3 carousel 118 133 M3101 duplex feed 129 M3102 reversing 129 M3103 side registration 129 130 M4 drum 134 M5 toner cartridge 118 134 removing 185 187 mottled output troubleshooting 260 moving printer 49 MS DOS commands 269 MSDS Material Data Safety Sheet 37 multifeeds 241
49. streaks troubleshooting faded 258 transparencies 264 vertical 261 subassemblies 40 sunburn troubleshooting 260 SunOS 72 supplies ordering 325 status page printing 290 Support Assistant HP 42 surface resistivity electrical 31 C7085 90921 swatches SRGB 249 sweeper strip 109 switch assembly removing 161 switch boxes 268 switches diagrams 313 314 drawer assembly removing 182 front door 135 paper size PCB removing 181 rear door 135 rear door interlock defeat 316 SW3001 3002 3003 paper feeder paper size detection 126 SW6 power 25 136 SW801 802 803 paper size detection 123 127 313 SWOP Standard Web Offset Press 248 system requirements Fast InfraRed Receiver FIR 68 T T connectors 65 tape removing packing 49 sealing 52 TCP IP 71 technical reference guides 43 temperature ink requirements 30 maximum change rate 23 site requirements 20 22 storing consumables 23 testing developer 303 diagnostics mode entering 300 door sensors 304 drum 303 engine 306 paper path 302 paper path sensors 303 printer operation 62 text troubleshooting 257 262 theory of operations clutches 114 duplex unit 128 fusing 110 image formation system 104 ITB 113 laser scanner 120 paper path 122 secondary transfer roller 115 toner carousel 118 waste toner cleaning 109 113 ThinLan cables 65 TIFF files 249 toner cleaning spilled 78 development process 106 fusing operations 110 smeared 261 stray troubleshooting 259
50. 0593 000CN CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 347 Figure 8 12 Paper pick up assembly 3 of 3 Table 8 12 Paper pick up assembly 3 of 3 h Description Cable fusing option Parts for 4500 series xxG and below RG5 3787 000CN Parts for 4500 series xxH and above RG5 3787 000CN Parts for 4550 series RG5 3787 000CN Lever sensor RB2 0576 000CN RB2 0576 000CN RB2 0576 000CN Clutch one way RB2 0572 000CN RB2 0572 000CN RB2 0572 000CN Gear 18T RS6 0139 000CN RS6 0139 000CN RS6 0139 000CN Roller paper pick RB1 8865 000CN RB1 8865 000CN RB1 8865 000CN Shaft paper pick RB2 0545 000CN RB2 0545 000CN RB2 0545 000CN Transfer cam assembly RG5 3240 000CN RG5 5118 000CN RG5 5118 000CN Gear 26T 18T RS6 0137 000CN RS6 0137 000CN RS6 0137 000CN 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Gear assembly RG5 3228 000CN RG5 3228 000CN RG5 3228 000CN Gear 53T RS6 0155 000CN RS6 0155 000CN RS6 0155 000CN Gear 39T 31T RS6 0154 000CN RS6 0154 000CN RS6 0154 000CN Gear 49T RS6 0153 000CN RS6
51. 3 RH7 1343 000CN Motor M2 pick up 14 RH7 1346 000CN Fan large 1 RH7 1407 000CN Fan small 10 RH7 1435 000CN Fan large 1 RH7 5176 000CN Clutch CL2 electromagnetic 31 RH7 5178 000CN Clutch CL3 electromagnetic 16 RH7 5180 000CN Clutch CL4 electromagnetic 14 362 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Table 8 19 Numerical parts list Partnumber _ owsenpton ur etree RS5 1293 000CN Bushing RS5 1341 000CN Cone RS5 2739 000CN Spring toner flap RS5 2754 000CN Spring tension RS5 2794 000CN Spring Tray 2 pickup tension RS5 2799 000CN Spring tension RS5 2800 000CN Spring tension RS5 6210 000CN Spacer RS6 0132 000CN Gear 35T RS6 0133 000CN Gear 37T 14T RS6 0134 000CN Gear 30T 16T RS6 0135 000CN Gear 27T RS6 0135 000CN Gear 27T RS6 0136 000CN Gear 31T RS6 0137 000CN Gear 26T 18T RS6 0138 000CN Gear 20T RS6 0139 000CN Gear 18T RS6 0139 000CN Gear 18T RS6 0140 000CN Gear 18T RS6 0141 000CN Gear 19T RS6 0143 000CN Gear 37T RS6 0144 000CN Gear 34T 15T RS6 0145 000CN Gear 29T 17T RS6 0146 000CN Gear 52T RS6 0147 000CN Gear 47T RS6 0149 000CN Gear 26T RS6 0150 000CN Gear 29T RS6 0150 000CN Gear 29T RS6 0151 000CN Gear 16T RS6 0152 000CN Gear 29T RS6 0153 000
52. 3886 000CN RG5 3886 000CN Cable control panel RG5 3802 0000N ROS 5195 0000N_ RGS 5195 0000N_ 86 4 FS 5T87 0000N ROS5187 0000N 88 2 Caen ROS 38870000N_ NANA 88 RG5 3787 0000N Cable T8 RG5 3785000N RG5 9786 000 N RGS 3786 000CN 8 1 RG5 4651 0000N m A er ree 5 10 Cal paser eea RGE 3785 000CN ROS 785 000N JRGETE5ODOGN 5 9 08 HG53795000 N RGSS7OS000CN E31 8 Cable toner Tevel senso enu Cable video nece RHZSGSSUU0CN RHE SGSEOOOCN RHESTSOUON 88 M Contmerfep RBZOSGOMION WA NA C S Carousel assembly RG5 5249 000CN RG5 5249 000CN RG5 5249 000CN 8 41 Wt Carousel brake assembly RG5 3309 000CN RG5 5163 000CN RG5 5163 000CN 8 10 12 Carousel drive assembly RG5 5209 000CN RG5 5209 000CN RG5 5209 000CN TI Cassette 250 sheet RG5 3400 210CN RG5 3400 210CN RG5 3400 210CN Er Clutch CL2 RH7 5176 000CN RH7 5176 000CN RH7 5176 000CN LANE electromagnetic Clutch CL3 RH7 5178 000CN RH7 5178 000CN RH7 5178 000CN electromagnetic M Clutch CL4 RH7 5180 000CN RH7 5180 000CN RH7 5180 000CN electromagnetic Clutch one way RB2 0572 000CN RB2 0572 000CN RB2 0572 000CN 8 14 14 Clutch one way RB2 0561 000CN RB2 0561 000CN RB2 0561 000CN a AM Clutch one way RB2 0561 000CN RB2 0561 000CN RB2 0561 000CN Cone JRS9 1341 000CN RS5 1341 OOOCN RS5 1341 OOQOCN AL HEN EA beeen Continuous toner level N A RG5 5247 000CN sensor
53. 92 status report printing 290 fuses 317 fusing operations 110 temperature specifications 31 fusing assembly diagram 317 fusing delivery rollers 127 fusing motor M1 operations 114 127 133 removing 185 fusing unit pressure release sensor PS6 127 312 G gears diagrams 346 removing 193 ghosting full page 258 glossy paper duplexing avoiding 30 HP Soft Gloss 326 printing 31 supported sizes 29 gray background troubleshooting 258 gray balance 252 grayscale option 246 guides ordering 43 H halftone options 245 hard disk dependent menus 283 Hard disk file directory page 292 hard drives included 14 heavy paper printing 32 supported weights 29 height printer 23 high voltage power supply operations 136 removing 174 home page set 286 home position detection sensor PS5 114 223 home position sensor side registration PS3105 130 horizontal lines troubleshooting 254 housing removing carousel 200 large fan 178 HP Color LaserJet 4500 family printer models 14 HP Color LaserJet Soft Gloss Paper 326 HP Color LaserJet Transparencies 326 HP ColorSmart Il 246 HP Distribution Center 43 HP JetAdmin software 67 70 C7085 90921 HP JetDirect print servers connecting 10 100Base TX 66 connecting 10Base2 65 connecting 10Base T 66 installing 67 ports 64 supported configurations 71 HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide 28 HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh 70 HP LocalTalk Cable Kit 72 HP PCL 17 HP Support As
54. CLJ 4500 4 Delete the print job from Windows spooler or print server 5 Power the printer off have customer remove plug 6 Have the customer pull the formatter cage out 1 Cancel the print job from the CLJ 4500 2 Delete the print job from the Windows spooler or print server 3 Power cycle the printer off A Power off the printer B Pull the power cord for a minimum of 15 seconds Close Call Did it print If possible obtain a copy of the customer file for Technical Marketing Lab testing and escalate the issue using your Normal process Close Call EH EH m m OD 09 C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 229 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages continued 49 ADAC or AFAC Description Action Indicates that the printer is printing a PostScript file No action required using Windows 3 1 or 9x 49 FF01 to FF05 Description Action An NEC firmware ROM error has occurred Replace the firmware 49 FF02 Description Action Unsupported EDO memory has been installed Remove unsupported memory 49 04CC Description Indicates a media timing issue This occurs when printing multiple copies of transparencies or heavy or glossy media with either the PCL or PostScript drivers Or it could indicate a timing mismatch between the engine and formatter 49 04E7 Description Occurs during decompression of the strip buffers when the end of the strip marker is missing This is triggered by o
55. Determines whether the printer STOP continues or stops printing when a TONER LOW condition is detected JAM RECOVERY OFF Printer attempts to recover from ON jams and reprints affected pages PRINT PS ERRORS OFF Prints out an error page when ON emulated PostScript errors occur Denotes default setting 276 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Table 7 16 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Configuration settings Mena tem Jus Jesen POWERSAVE OFF The length of time before the printer goes into power saving 1 MIN used for mode troubleshooting 15 MIN 30 MIN 1 HR 2 HRS 4 HRS CLEARABLE JOB If ON message appears until Go is pressed If JOB WARNINGS ON message appears until end of print job AUTO CONTINUE ON Determines whether the printer continues printing when OFF certain errors occur If ON printer returns to the READY state If OFF printer remains offline until Go is pressed JAM RECOVERY OFF Printer attempts to recover from jams and reprints affected ON pages PRINT PS ERRORS OFF Prints out an error page when emulated PostScript errors ON Occur RAM DISK OFF Determines if a RAM disk is installed and whether or not it is ON activated RAM DISK SIZE Displays the size in MG or GB of the activated RAM disk i installed QUICK COPY JOBS Displays the number of Quick copy jobs saved in printer memory HELD JOB TIMEOUT OFF Sets the length of time the printer will save a held job in ON memory prior to deletin
56. EAE kawns bend aa 168 Leit side assembli6S 4 2 minare dod ae Yo ded we Qe dr a Oe ew oiu we ew OE ibd Ra 182 is RICETTE RET TCT TTC TTRETORRTRCERPCCRPPP 195 Internal assemblies x a cuna ed RC tw in an rude t aic iE act dae ac rU cnt mall e ede SCR Dd rm CUR Pent o 200 7 Troubleshooting MOOC m CT r P n mrrTT 211 Troubleshooting process hh hrs 212 Printer error troubleshooting 2 hn 217 Paper path troubleshooting 0 cc hrs 237 Image formation troubleshooting 0 0c eee eee teens 243 AP GOES Maru mer 246 Matching COONS sacar ede ias ic a ENTREE hie eed Oe ee ee 247 Four color printing CMYK occ 248 Made JEC aaka T rIr rc rrr 253 Overhead transparency defects nnana anaua 263 Repetitive defects troubleshooting 2 2 ce ee rn 265 Interface troubleshooting 0 6 ee Rh 268 Control panel troubleshooting 0 Rss 271 TFOUDIESNOOUNG TOOS muro paroles oder pas are is ss Bees ead oc bitch a 285 Service MOdS secano rosadas pes ada ts ia do paa ases os 293 Dia dnosuics Made s m ees cue qe ros ara tie og eed da di a a de ae cm ates e 300 DIAdralls 2 1 es extasis e 1 07207 o os ado laica da paar cada 308 8 Parts and diagrams NO UCION caras rosas rd ts e a oa ea ee ee eee eee ad tera 324 Ordering parts 325 Illustrations and parts lists reso Soe eae rieron eat gate Seabee eee a eae is ect 329 Alphabetical parts list 0 eee
57. Figure 6 4 Right side cover removal and replacement liliis 146 Figure 6 5 Rear door removal and replacement 0 cc eee eee 147 Figure 6 6 Right rear cover removal and replacement 0 0 0 cece eee 148 Figure 6 7 Drum drawer top drawer cover removal and replacement eee eee 149 Figure 6 8 Drum drawer top drawer cover tabs and levers 00 eee eee 150 Figure 6 9 ITB drawer middle drawer cover removal and replacement 0000 eee eee 151 Figure 6 10 ITB drawer middle drawer removal and replacement 0 000 c eee eee eee 152 Figure 6 11 Control panel removal and replacement 0 0 eee eee 153 Figure 6 12 Front right cover removal and replacement 0 0 cee eee 155 Figure 6 13 RFI shield removal and replacement 0 0 00 ccc eee 156 Figure 6 14 Laser scanner assembly removal and replacement 0 00 e eee eens 157 Figure 6 15 DC controller removal and replacement 0 0000 cece eee eee eens 158 Figure 6 16 Developing PCB removal and replacement 1 of 2 0 cee eee 159 Figure 6 17 Developing PCB removal and replacement 2 of 2 0 eee 160 Figure 6 18 Top cover switch assembly removal and replacement 0000 c eee eee eee 162 Figure 6 19 Top cover switch assembly removal and replacement 00000 eee eee eee 162 Figure 6 20 Drum drawer top drawer switch 0 0 00 eee 163 F
58. PCB Control panel assembly RG5 3345 000CN RG5 3345 000CN RG5 3345 000CN 86 5 RB2 1180 000CN RB2 1180 000CN RB2 1180 000CN 8 10 5 RB2 1224 000CN RB2 1224 000CN RB2 1224 000CN 8 6 2 C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 355 Parts for 4500 Parts for 4500 Parts for HP series xxG and series xxH and Color LaserJet below above 4550 printer RB2 0916 000CN RB2 0916 000CN RB2 0916 000CN 8 RG5 3315 000CN RG5 5152 000CN RG5 5152 000CN i RG5 3320 000CN RG5 3320 000CN RG5 3320 000CN Reference O s D amp o O O E 2 D a o ag J O lt D o c 3 Q D D J O O OJO lt lt D D olx ac p amp D RG5 3313 000CN RG5 5151 000CN RG5 5151 000CN 8 O D Cover Tower rear Coverghtiont RG5 3310000CN_ RG53310 000CN_ RG5 3310000CN 86 S Cover right side RB21203 0000N_ RB2 1203 000CN_ RB2 1203 0000N 86 P A se n Drum drawer assembly RGS 5230 0000N__ RGS 5142 0000N__ RG5 5142 0000N_ 89 Drum drive assembly RG amp 3170 0000N HGS 3170000N RGS31700000N 89 assembly air large i 2 NJ Oi NMI N N O oO RG5 3325 040CN RG5 3325 0400CN RG5 3325 040CN 1 assembly Fan large Filter air Fier air small C4084 69002 C4084 69002 C4084 69002 C4084 69003 C4084 69003 C4084 69003 Gear assembly RG5 328 0000N_ RG5 3228 000CN_ RG5 328 0000N_ 914 9
59. Putting the printer in Lossy mode might affect performance and print quality 49 FFFF Description Action Issue reported by life test when replacing the fuser Replace the formatter This error might also occur during the boot cycle 49FFOX Description Action This error message allows you to scroll through the No action required printer control panel to obtain all of the error information 49 OBOA Description Action A request is not understood This error message is Check the command being sent the I O card might generated when the I O card does not support a not support a particular feature command that was sent to it 49 OB22 Description Action This error message is generated when the I O card Verify the action being sent receives a control panel menu action that it does not recognize 50 x Fuser Error Description Action The fusing assembly contains two heating bulbs two thermo switches and two thermistors AC power is Note To visually check if the fusing provided to the fusing assembly via the DC power assembly is functional you can supply which is controlled by the DC controller PCB defeat the rear door interlock The thermistors monitor the temperature of the switch see Figure 7 33 Press fusing assembly and provide feedback to the DC in on the white plastic above the left rear corner of the fan then controller PCB to regulate the fusing temperature turn on the printer If the fusin
60. Web pages for collecting information about the printer and for changing configuration options These sets are eo Home pages e Device pages e Networking pages When the embedded Web server is active each set of pages is listed on the browser screen Click on the set that you want to view and the selection expands to display a list of frequently accessed Web links Each page in the embedded Web server connects to online Help For more information regarding a particular page click the Help button Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 285 Home page set The home pages of the embedded Web server are the informational pages for the printer These include e Printer Status page This page displays printer capabilities control panel messages and status lights that currently appear on the printer control panel From here you can set the frequency at which the embedded Web server will check the printer status This page also displays consumable life levels and the input tray configurations e Configuration page This page displays the printer configuration page For more information about interpreting and printing the configuration page see page 287 e Supplies status page This page displays the levels of the consumables for the printer For more information about interpreting and printing the supplies status page see page 290 e Usage page This page displays the amount of each media type that has been used by the printer For more information ab
61. Windows application and supports native Novell Directory Services NDS For peer to peer Windows 95 networks HP JetAdmin software works as a Windows application and connects HP printers to an IPX SPX compatible printer network using an HP JetDirect print server For Windows NT 3 51 and 4 0 networks HP JetAdmin software supports the TCP IP or IPX SPX environments Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 71 IBM OS 2 LAN Server and Warp Server networks For IBM OS 2 LAN Server and Warp Server Networks HP JetAdmin software supports the Data Link Control DLC environment Depending on the number of network printers and type of printer driver when using virtual memory improved performance might be realized by increasing server RAM especially if the swapper dat file is large LocalTalk network The LocalTalk interface enables you to print directly from a stand alone Apple Macintosh computer or from a Macintosh computer on a Local Talk network For specific information about configuring your computer and printer to print through a Local Talk interface refer to the printer s getting started guide and the HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide Macintosh DIN 8 cable To connect a Macintosh computer directly to this printer use a standard Macintosh DIN 8 printer cable This cable cannot be used in a network configuration Note For Local Talk configuration the DIN 8 printer cable must be plugged into the printer port of yo
62. a double line should be aligned For proper operation ensure that the ITB clutch CL2 is connected to J103 on the Paper Feed PCB and that the ITB cleaning roller clutch CL3 is connected to J104 C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 191 Transfer roller cam clutch CL4 To remove the transfer cam clutch 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the left side cover 3 Disconnect the connector J105 at the Paper Feed PCB from the clutch 4 Remove the e clip shown in Figure 6 54 with needle nose pliers and remove the clutch 31 ECA0O oon EN CU amm FI La P ade v i j cs T a x Hr is rg E Figure 6 54 Transfer roller cam clutch removal and replacement Replacement tip For proper operation ensure that the cable is connected to J105 on the paper feed PCB 192 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 CAUTION C7085 90921 Left side gears To remove the left side gears 1 2 3 4 al 10 11 12 Remove the top cover Remove the left side cover Remove the fusing assembly Remove the screw shown in callout 1 Figure 6 47 on page 185 and remove the black plastic piece Disconnect all connectors from the paper feed PCB and free the cables from the cable stays Remove the screw securing the gear cover and remove the cover shown in callout 3 Figure 6 47 on page 185 Remove the fuser motor Remove the paper path motor Remove the three clutches CL2 CL3 and CL4 Remove the
63. and HP Color LaserJet 4550 shown with 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex unit Top output bin Printer control panel Power switch standby button Duplex unit drawer optional on 4500 4500N 4550 and 4550N models Tray 3 500 sheet tray optional on 4500 4500N 4550 and 4550N models Tray 2 250 sheets standard tray Intermediate Transfer Belt ITB drawer transfer belt access Tray 1 150 sheet multipurpose tray O ON Oo O FP WO N Drum drawer imaging drum access 10 Top cover release toner access button 11 Toner cartridge access cover C7085 90921 Chapter 1 Printer description 25 Figure 1 7 Rear view HP Color LaserJet 4500 shown with 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex unit Rear door fuser access Rear output bin door Cover for duplex unit Power receptacle for duplex unit Duplex unit power cord to the printer Printer power receptacle EIO slots Parallel connector C connector O O JO C FP c N Memory access 26 Printer description C7085 90921 Figure 1 8 Rear view HP Color LaserJet 4550 shown with 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex unit Rear door fuser access Rear output bin door Cover for duplex unit Power receptacle for duplex unit Duplex unit power cord to the printer Printer power receptacle ElO slots Parallel connector C connector O O JO O FP OQ N Memory access C7085 90921 Chapter 1 Printer description 27
64. are still running Note If the front panel display looks dark and an error message appears check the ribbon cable between the formatter and the DC controller 5 Remove any HP JetDirect or other EIO cards then retry powering on the printer 6 Make sure the control panel display is on 7 Check fuse in power supply see Figure 7 36 8 Replace the power supply 9 Replace the interconnect PCB 216 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Printer error troubleshooting Hint Note C7085 90921 Printer messages The following tables explain messages that might appear on the printer control panel Alphabetical printer messages and their meanings are listed in Table 7 2 and numerical printer messages are listed in Table 7 3 If a message requesting that you load a tray persists or if a message indicating that a previous print job is still in the printers memory persists press Go to print or press CANCEL Jos to clear the job from the printers memory Not all messages are described in the tables those messages that are not listed are self explanatory Some printer messages are affected by the AUTO CONTINUE and CLERERBRELE WARM TMG settings from the Configuration Menu on the pH control panel e f CLEBEBRBLE WARM THO iis set on the control panel warning messages appear until the end of the job Pin which hey were generated e If CLEBERHELE HARM EA is set warning MESSA appears until Go is pressed elf anerror occurs that prevents printing a
65. attention to the voltage listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct printer model 324 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 Ordering parts All standard part numbers are stocked and can be ordered from Commercial Support Services Organization Americas CSSO A or Commercial Support Services Organization Europe CSSO E For information about contacting CSSO A or CSSO E see page 41 Note Parts that have no reference designator or part number are not field replaceable and cannot be ordered near you or if your local dealer is temporarily out of stock call the HP Customer Information Center at 800 752 0900 Note See page 327 for documentation part numbers Consumable parts and accessories are available directly from Hewlett Packard at the following numbers e U S 800 538 8787 e Canada 800 387 3154 Toronto 416 671 8383 e United Kingdom 0734 441212 Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone numbers Table 8 1 Consumables accessories and supplies 3 m 9 ft parallel cable IEEE 1284 compliant Product number with a 25 pin DB male to a IEEE 1284C male C connector Local Talk cable kit DIN 8 printer cable for Macintosh computers cO NO NO al Z R94 4001 410CN R96 5009 000CN R96 5007 000CN Fuser kit 110V Drum kit Transfer kit O um cO N C4198A R96 5008 000CN Fuser kit 220V Localized font DIMMS
66. by the pick up motor and picks up the paper Once the separation roller separates the paper from any extra sheets of paper paper is fed into the printer by the paper feeder feed roller and printer feed roller The rest of the paper path is the same as that in the Tray 2 cassette see Figure 5 26 d signals Pick wo motor drive Cassette O SW3002 ae SW3003 Pick up and feed system Table 5 4 Solenoids sensors switches Reference Description Paper feeder pick up solenoid Paper feeder paper detection sensor Paper feeder paper size detection switch Paper feeder paper size detection switch Paper feeder paper size detection switch 126 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Figure 5 31 C7085 90921 Paper size detection The paper size and the presence of the cassette are detected by the paper size detection switches SW801 SW802 and SW803 The combinations of paper size detection switches are listed in Table 5 5 Table 5 5 Paper size detection switches Paper size Cassette paper size detection switch Sws01 SW802 SW803 Legal A4 Letter Executive B5 B5 ISO A5 No cassette Fusing and delivery unit The fusing motor M1 drives the fusing assembly and the paper delivery rollers Paper separated from the ITB is fed into the fusing unit and output from the fusing unit by the upper and lower fusing rollers and fusing delivery rolle
67. cable from the cable stays and then disconnect the connector from the densitometer 6 Remove the densitometer by sliding it toward the rear of the printer 166 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Figure 6 25 Densitometer removal and replacement 2 of 2 C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 167 Right side assemblies Formatter To remove the formatter 1 Turn off the printer 2 When the fans are turned off unplug the printer CAUTION Power is applied to the formatter as long as the printer is plugged in Removing the formatter while power is supplied to the printer can damage the formatter 3 Remove the six screws in the formatter shown in Figure 6 26 4 Slide the formatter out of the rear of the printer ht M W N s NI NA i x P bU a i t D 1 4n W 1 hT L 23 k I a b Ta A h P ir ar eae L kc ar mi ias n b b dl Pr P 7 A l a T H re Ms ly af i asl Figure 6 26 Formatter removal and replacement Note The HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer formatter looks different externally but the removal procedure is the same as for the HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer 168 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Note Note C7085 90921 Formatter PCB To remove the formatter PCB from the cradle Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer Before replacing the formatter or firmware make sure to record the printer s serial number f
68. drawers 335 printers 140 vertical banding troubleshooting 255 vertical lines troubleshooting 261 Vivid color map 246 C7085 90921 voids character 257 voltage AC DC power supply 135 duplex unit 128 exposed 213 high voltage power supply 136 operating 19 overvoltage protection 136 paper feeder 126 part numbers 324 power consumption 22 primary charge 105 W Warp servers 72 warranty statement 44 waste toner cleaning operation 109 113 sensor PS13 113 313 wavy characters troubleshooting 262 Web server embedded 285 websites HP 15 HP JetAdmin software 70 Material Data Safety Sheet MSDS 37 PANTONE palettes 249 product and support information 42 service part information 42 specifications 22 weight media 29 printer 20 23 wheel assembly removing 206 white lines troubleshooting 261 white pages troubleshooting 256 width printer 23 Windows FIR compliance 68 network configurations 71 wiring diagrams 321 Word Microsoft 249 X Xpress Quark 249 Y yellow toner cartridges density settings 251 installing 51 54 part numbers 327 replacement intervals 142 replacing 86 C7085 90921 Index 377 378 Index C7085 90921 invent copyright 2000 Hewlett Packard Company www hp com support l 4550 english C7085 90921
69. error appears when PS6 detects no motion within the fuser Photosensor PS6 is the fusing unit pressure switch shown in Figure 7 27 51 LASER ERROR 4500 Or 51 X PRINTER ERROR 4550 Description Indicates a beam detect error or laser failure 232 Troubleshooting 3 Referring to Figure 7 36 measure the resistance for both the upper and lower thermistors The resistance should be between 430K ohms and 310K ohms at room temperature 25 C 77 F If the resistance exceeds limits replace the fusing assembly If resistance is within limits proceed to step 4 Verify the connectors at J1011 of the DC controller PCB and J1 of the DC power supply assembly are firmly seated Replace the power supply assembly Action 1 Power cycle the printer to try to clear the message Remove the left side cover of the printer Verify that the fusing motor M1 connector is seated firmly into J102 of the feed PCB Ensure that the connector at J110 of the feed PCB is firmly seated this connector contains the wiring for PS6 which provides fuser motion feedback Note Closely inspect the mechanical linkage The gears along the gear drive path can bind the gears which will prevent M1 from rotating If the error persists Observe the drive shaft of M1 refer to Figure 7 31 while powering on the printer If this shaft DOES NOT rotate your failure is related to the motor drive circuitry Referring to the printer s
70. for a wide range of HP products To subscribe to this quarterly service in the U S or Canada call 800 336 5987 In Asia Pacific call 65 740 4484 Parts identification and pricing information can also be checked via the World Wide Web at http www hp com go partsinfo HP Support Assistant Compact Disc This support tool offers a comprehensive online information system designed to provide technical and product information about HP products To subscribe to the quarterly service in the U S or Canada call 800 457 1762 In Hong Kong Indonesia Malaysia or Singapore call Mentor Media at 65 740 4477 42 Service approach C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Ordering related documentation and software Table 2 1 shows where to order related documentation and software Telephone numbers for the various sources are e Commercial Support Services Organization Americas CSSO A 800 227 8164 US only e Commercial Support Services Organization Europe CSSO E 49 070 3114 2253 e HP Distribution Center HPD 661 257 5565 Fax 805 257 6995 Table 2 1 Related documentation and software Description HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide Part Number 5963 7863 CSSO A CSSO E HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator s Guide 9969 6818 Technical reference package 9021 0377 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Printer Drivers Disk C4084 60122 HP Color LaserJet 4500 4500 N documentation bundle quick refe
71. four screws callout 1 Figure 6 55 on page 194 and remove the sheet metal over the gears Remove the one or two screws shown in callout 2 Figure 6 55 on page 194 and e clip shown in callout 3 Figure 6 55 on page 194 that hold the solenoid assembly in place and then remove the solenoid assembly Remove any e clips or bushings necessary to remove the affected gears Left side gear replacement 1 Install the back half of the large double gear shown in callout 1 Figure 6 56 with the small portion of the gear 18T facing outward Install the two gears shown in callout 2 Figure 6 56 on page 194 so they cover the back half of the large double gear Install the remaining gears and the front half of the large double gear so they appear as shown in Figure 6 56 on page 194 When reinstalling the solenoid assembly make sure that the flat parts of the pickup rollers are down and that the plastic spring loaded gear is fully engaged Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 193 CATA PEJE Figure 6 55 Left side gears removal and replacement 1 of 2 F J Mie M Ti ME d TIE NAH th i as os ae el a nl s 1h c sapis px 1 PrE al RG cx ture Figure 6 56 Left side gears removal and replacement 2 of 2 194 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Rear assemblies Large right side fan To remove the large right side fan 1 Remove the formatter pan assembly Remove the four screws as shown in Fig
72. heel TERRENUM HRS 197 Face dOWisaSsSembly di A At 199 Internal assemblies 22 ooo 200 Cartridge carousel assembly 0 0 0 eee eee eens 200 Toner catch tray and paper transport assembly nnna naaa naaa noo 204 Faer PICOS E C T LI PEE 205 138 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Introduction WARNING WARNING CAUTION Les ESD C7085 90921 Removal and replacement strategy This chapter explains how to remove and replace major printer components HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level Replacement is generally the reverse of removal Occasionally directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included The information in this section is intended for authorized service personnel only Repair notices Turn the printer off wait five seconds then unplug the power cord before servicing the printer Failure to completely disconnect the printer could result in severe injury Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes Never operate the printer with any parts removed The sheet metal parts can have sharp edges Be careful not to cut yourself when handling sheet metal parts Always protect the imaging drum from light and physical contact when it is removed from the printer HP recommends reinstalling the origin
73. left side fan removing 197 left side gears removing 193 lenses 120 letterhead printing 33 level detection toner 119 level location 49 levels security 74 life span consumables 83 imaging drum 80 ITB 114 296 kits 142 photosensitive drum cartridge 112 status page printing 290 toner cartridges 83 142 lift cams 114 lifting printer 49 light print troubleshooting 259 light affects on color variation 244 light emitting diodes LEDs 111 lines troubleshooting black 255 horizontal 254 vertical 261 white 261 localized font DIMMs 325 LocalTalk networks configuring 68 connecting 64 HP Cable Kit 72 location requirements 20 21 locking control panel settings 73 log event clearing 297 printing 292 low toner cartridges detecting 120 M machine screws 141 Macintosh DIN 8 connection 72 FIR compliance 68 HP LaserJet Utility 70 Macromedia Freehand 249 C7085 90921 magenta toner cartridges density settings 251 installing 51 54 part numbers 327 replacement intervals 142 replacing 86 maintenance counts 296 male connectors 58 management color 246 manual color adjustment 246 manual feeding operations 124 solenoid SL1 124 maps color 246 menu 271 294 marbled output troubleshooting 260 margins setting 298 matching color HP Color Smart Il 246 PANTONE 248 variation 244 Material Data Safety Sheet MSDS 37 media non supported 30 ordering 326 selecting 28 sizes 29 special 31 specifications 241
74. log After the process is completed the printer will return to the READ state Hard disk file directory page Information about the optional 5 GB hard disk is listed on the Hard Disk File Directory page Figure 7 16 Hard disk file directory page 292 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Service mode Figure 7 17 C7085 90921 Service mode allows for the modification of page counts and certain registration values for the printer In the 4500 series when the configuration page Is printed while in service mode all event log messages up to 50 events will be printed In the 4550 series the event log is printed from the Information menu If both the formatter and DC controller are replaced at the same time service mode will be utilized to execute the color plane registration sequence that ensures optimum print quality Accessing the service mode 1 Hold down CanceL Jos and SeLecT while turning the printer on until the display is blank and the three LEDs are on 2 Press the d side of the Menu key and then press SELECT SERL t will appear on the front panel briefly IONES 2s two rows of asterisks The printer will go o through its Emma start up cycle and then display SERUICE MODRE on the front panel again Below is a menu map showing what is available in service Node Service menu
75. need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series CAUTION 350 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 Figure 8 14 MP tray paper pick up assembly Table 8 14 MP tray paper pick up assembly Description Roller Parts for 4500 series xxG and below RB2 0717 000CN Parts for 4500 series xxH and above RB2 0717 000CN Parts for 4550 series RB2 0717 000CN Roller RB2 0744 000CN RB2 0744 000CN RB2 0744 000CN Sensor PS3 assembly last paper RG5 5130 020CN RG5 5130 020CN RG5 5130 020CN Sensor PS4 assembly multi purpose tray paper CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The RG5 5129 000CN RG5 5129 000CN 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 351 RG5 5129 000CN Figure 8 15 250 sheet cassette Table 8 15 250 sheet cassette Parts for 4500 Parts for 4500 Parts for 4550 series xxG and series xxH and series below above RG5 3400 210CN RG5 3400 210CN Description Cassette 250 sheet RG5 3400 210CN Cover roller RB1 9001 000CN RB1 9001 000CN RB
76. of the middle front drawer Reseat the transfer roller 13 12 Jam in duplex paper feed 13 13 1 Jam in input feed area area Inspect the rear of the Check the input trays and duplex duplex unit and the duplex tray unit 13 11 Jam in duplex unit Inspect 14 13 2 Paper did not clear the input sensor in time area Inspect the rear of the duplex unit and the duplex tray the rear of the duplex unit and the duplex tray 13 21 Door open jam Check the 1 1 19 5 Jam FER MIDDLE rear door duplex cover and rear PLT Lak alternates with output door CH IH 1 13 20 Jam in paper feed area init ace Check ilis middle front Check the entire paper path es Check and pull out the Loose toner or paper dust on the fuser Table 7 6 Explanation of alternating message Check middle front doors Check middle front drawer O Watch pick roller to ensure it is turning Check all rear doors 6 Check duplex cover Check upper rear door and rear output door Check front duplex drawer e Check front duplex drawer 240 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 General paper path checklist I Verify that media is correctly loaded in the input trays and that all length and width guides are set correctly J Clean the printer Toner and paper dust in the paper path inhibit free movement of media through the printer and block the sensors I Vary the input and output selections of the printer to determine if the problem is associated with a particular
77. out to clear the alignment pin Lift the control panel up to access the cable oO c A c N Disconnect the cable EG P Wu TT I TTA MM itt na i 3g Nt Ws Cann VENE Control panel removal and replacement Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 153 Installing or changing the control panel overlay You might need to install the control panel overlay or replace the English overlay with one that displays your language You also might need to configure the control panel to display messages in your language 1 Locate the control panel overlay that came in the printer box and remove it from the bag If you are installing an overlay rather than replacing one skip to step 4 Otherwise continue to step 2 Gently lift out on both sides of the overlay that is currently installed on the printer Grasp the bottom of the overlay pull it down and then lift it out Note When removing the control panel overlay you might want to use a small flat blade screw driver to gently pry off the control panel overlay 4 To install the new overlay position it over the control panel and install the top side first Insert the top tabs on the overlay into the slots on the printer face Then push the overlay up and push in the bottom 5 Snap the overlay firmly onto the control panel 154 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 CAUTION Figure 6 12 C7085 90921 Front right cover To remove the front right cover
78. paper feeder and duplex unit installed Tray 1 input area Transfer belt area Tray 2 input area Front duplex drawer area Tray 3 500 sheet paper feeder area Rear duplex cover area Fuser area Rear paper path area CON OO FP WN 238 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Figure 7 5 C7085 90921 Jam locations by error message Use Figure 7 5 and Table 7 4 to troubleshoot jams by the error message received For instructions on clearing jams see the sections later in this chapter Jam locations by error message See the next page for the Color LaserJet 4550 associated error messages Table 7 4 HP Color LaserJet 4500 jam locations and associated error messages 13 11 Paper in the paper path is too long Check the Tray 1 area Check the entire paper path 13 10 Paper in the paper path is too short Check the Tray 1 area Check the entire paper path 13 9 Irregular jam in the paper path Check the Tray 1 area Check the entire paper path 13 8 Door open jam Check the rear door duplex cover and rear output door 13 7 Jam in paper feed area Check the entire paper path Loose toner or paper dust on the density sensor can cause this error Clean the sensor 13 6 Jam in duplex paper feed area Inspect the rear of the duplex unit and the duplex tray 13 5 Jam in duplex paper feed area Inspect the rear of the duplex unit and the duplex tray 13 4 Jam in du
79. photos independently The two halftone options are Smooth and Details HP ColorSmart II default settings will produce optimum results for most color printing needs However you can also manually adjust color settings through the printer driver s Vivid Color and Screen Match color control options See the printer driver s online Help for details on color settings and their effect on printed output Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 69 Network configuration Configuring the printer for the network You can configure certain network parameters on the printer from the printer control panel or for most networks from the HP JetAdmin Software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh The utilities are provided on the printing software CD ROM that comes with the printer You can also set these parameters from the HP Web JetAdmin Software which is available at http www hp com go webjetadmin For a complete list of supported networks and for instructions on configuring network parameters from software such as HP JetAdmin and HP Web JetAdmin see the HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide The guide comes on the CD ROM with printers in which an HP JetDirect 600N print server is installed Note If you are configuring network parameters from the printer control panel the control panel menu appears in the languages listed below If your language is not listed the menu will appear in English and you will need to configure
80. possible problem Identify the sensor or switch in the table above and test to see if the value changes Cassette paper size settings for each tray are described in Table 7 30 Table 7 30 Paper size settings Tray 2 Switches Tray 3 Switches DEF HIJ Custom A5 Custom B5 ISO Executive Legal No tray installed These values are the same for Tray 3 Door sensor test The door sensor test allows service personnel to open and close doors on the printer while watching the sensor status on the front panel Switches 4 and 5 are in series with each other which causes the value to toggle under identifier A Once the door sensor test is initiated the front panel displays the status for each sensor listed in Table 7 31 As a door is opened and closed the state of the sensor changes the indicator values on the front panel Table 7 31 Sensor status Name Description SW4 and SW5 Front and rear door switches Toner cartridge door Drum drawer switch Drum detect Detect if a drum cartridge is installed 304 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Table 7 31 Sensor status emer neme Desipion Fuser Detects if fuser is installed Changes state if not detected or removed when rear door is opened and closed Activates A as well when opened 1 Press the ITem key until GIHE its DOOR SEHSOES appears on the front panel 2 Press the SeLecT key to activate the test The front panel wi
81. printed The printer No action required returns to the REHE stage upon completion of this page PRINTING CONFIGURATION PAGE Description Action The configuration page is being printed The printer returns No action required to the RE HE stage upon completion of this page PRINTING FONT LIST Description Action A typeface list for the available personalities is being printed No action required The printer returns to the EE stage upon completion of these pages PRINTING MENU MAP Description Action The printer menu map is being printed The printer returns to No action required the EHE state upon completion of this page 222 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 C7085 90921 PRINTING REGISTRATION PG Description The registration page is being printed The printer returns to the EHD state upon completion of this page Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error messages continued Action No action required PRINTING LASERJET DEMO 4500 Or PRINTING DEMONSTRATION 4550 Description The demo page is being printed The printer returns to the keH r state upon completion of this page Action No action required PRINTING LASERJET DEMO 2 4500 only Description The demo page is being printed The printer returns to the mieh state upon completion of this page Action No action required PRINTING ACCESSORIES Description Action The accessories page is being printed The printe
82. printer control panel press VALUE once to prepare the printer for installation of the next toner cartridge When the printer is ready the control panel displays GG lor zz z z I M b Install the other three toner cartridges by repeating steps 3 through12 Install the cartridges in the following order 1 black K 2 magenta M 3 cyan C 4 yellow Y After installing the fourth toner cartridge close the top cover and press Go Wait while the printer runs an internal color calibration The calibration takes a few minutes When the printer is ready the control panel displays HERD CAUTION If you need to ship the printer remove the toner cartridges and imaging drum before shipping C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Installing the toner cartridges for newer version HP Color LaserJet 4500 and HP Color LaserJet 4550 printers Note The following instructions are for newer versions of the 4500 series and 4550 series printers see page 140 to determine which version of the printer you have See page 51 for instructions for installing toner cartridges in older version printers 1 Locate the toner cartridges packaged in the printer box The printer uses four different toner colors and has a different toner cartridge for each color C black M magenta C cyan and Y yellow If the printer is not already turned on turn it on and close all d
83. registration roller Light is emitted from PS301 and passes through the paper path reflected by the reflective mirror and returned to PS301 As paper passes over PS301 the light emitted from PS301 is blocked by the paper and thus does not return to PS301 Transparencies are detected when the light passes through the OHT which is reflected by the prism and returns to the sensor The printer is then switched to OHT mode and changes the paper path speed during transfer and fusing lt When plain paper is fed gt Prism gt Plain paper Wind As T menn indow OHT Sensor E received ee Mulit purpose tray lt Cross sectional view of the OHT sensor gt x Hont usd E OHT is fed Figure 5 29 Overhead transparency sensor C7085 90921 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 125 Tray 3 500 sheet paper feeder Power supply The printer supplies 24 V and 5 V to the paper feeder for power The paper feeder is controlled by the DC controller It does not contain a microcomputer CPU or a drive motor Its rollers are controlled by the printer s pick up motor M2 Pick up and feed system Three switches SW3001 SW3002 and SW3003 on the paper feeder PCB detect the paper size and presence of a cassette The DC controller activates the pick up motor M2 and turns on the paper feeder pick up solenoid SL3001 after the pick up motor starts The paper feeder pick up roller is activated
84. release paper paper position NEN level Sensor PS12 toner leve toner Sensor PS14 density Shaft paper pick RB20545 0000N RB20545 0000N_ RBZ0545000CN 8 14 e SL2 Spring grounding HBZO9St 000N RBZ 09810000N RBZOSST000CN Spring toner Tiap Spring torson RBT SOYS 0000N_ RBT 9016 000CN_ RBY 9016 0000N 817 8 tension secondary Transfer cam assembly RGS 3240 000N HGS 5118 000CN RG5 5118 00CN_ 8 14 Tray extension RB2 1215 000CN RB2 1215 000CN RB2 1215 000CN 86 7 These parts require exchange 358 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 Numerical parts list CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series Table 8 19 Numerical parts list C7085 90921 Patnumter Desorption ar trons C4081 60001 I O Card 4500 only C4082 67901 500 sheet paper feeder C4083 67901 Duplex unit C4084 60004 Firmware DIMM 4500 only C4084 67906 Kit fuser deflector C4084 67907 Kit carousel flap C4084 69004 Formatter PCB 4500 C4084 69002 Fuser 110V C4084 69003 Fuser 220V C4207 60001 I O card C4227 69001 Formatter PCB 4550 only C9130 60001 Firmware DIMM Cap to
85. replacement intervals 142 drum motor M4 134 Index 367 drum test 303 drums imaging installing 57 imaging replacing 80 88 life span 80 photosensitive 112 duplex feed motor M3101 129 duplex feed roller pressure release solenoid SL3101 129 duplex pick up paper sensor PS3104 122 129 duplex pick up sensor PS3103 122 130 duplex unit assembly diagrams 354 connector diagrams 320 locating 25 26 models with 15 ordering 326 supported media 30 duplexing drum life 80 glossy paper avoiding 30 paper path 128 pick up operations 131 duty cycle maximum 24 E edges detecting leading 114 trailing 129 EDO DIMMs not supported 16 EEPROMs 112 ElO configuration 67 event log printing 292 Menu 280 slots locating 26 troubleshooting 268 electrical specifications 22 electrical surface resistivity 31 electrostatic discharge 139 eliminator charge 108 e mail page 286 embedded Web server 285 embossed media 30 emissions acoustic 23 engine diagnostics 302 testing 306 entering diagnostics mode 300 service mode 293 envelopes printing 32 supported sizes 29 environmental specifications 20 22 environmental stewardship program 34 EPSF Charts 249 error logs printing 292 error messages alphabetical list 217 clearing 217 282 jams 239 numerical list 226 ESD electrostatic discharge 139 ESD strap 140 Ethernet connections 65 Euro standard CMYK 248 368 Index event log clearing 297 pri
86. series HP PCL 5c HP PCL 6 PostScript 3 Emulation Automatic language switching A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom B5 ISO 16 pages per minute ppm 8 ppm for transparencies heavy paper and glossy paper 4 ppm 2 ppm for transparencies heavy paper and glossy paper The printer comes equipped with two ElO slots Note If the printer is not configured with a network interface card connect the printer using a bidirectional parallel cable IEEE 1284 compliant with a C connector Chapter 1 Printer description 17 Identification Figure 1 3 Note Model and serial numbers The model number and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer The model number is alohanumeric such as C4084A for the HP Color LaserJet 4500 The serial number contains information about the country of origin the printer version production code and the production number of the printer see Figure 1 3 For information on determining the version of printer you are servicing see page 140 printer version HEWLETT PACKARD 11311 CHINDEN BLUD production code BOISE IDAHO 63714 U S A country of origin Serial No USBB123456 PTT Th production number Made in Singapore D HEWLETT 4118A PACKARD Model and Serial number information Table 1 2 Model names and numbers Model Name Model Number HP Color LaserJet 4500 C4084A HP Color LaserJet 4500 N C4089A HP Colo
87. the printer by using HP JetAdmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh DanishFrenchPortuguese DutchGermanSpanish EnglishltalianSwedish FinnishNorwegian Configuring Novell NetWare frame type parameters The HP JetDirect 600N print server automatically selects a NetWare frame type Select a frame type manually only when the print server selects an incorrect frame type To identify the frame type chosen by the HP JetDirect 600N print server print a configuration page 70 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 Configuration tips C7085 90921 HP JetDirect 600N print servers network cards provide software solutions for Novell NetWare versions 3 x and 4 x Microsoft Windows 3 1 and Windows 95 Microsoft Windows NT 3 51 and 4 0 IBM OS 2 LAN Server or Warp Server LocalTalk UNIX HP UX Solaris and SunOS For information about installing HP JetDirect 600N print servers and the types of interfaces and network operating systems supported see the HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide NetWare 3 x and 4 x based products When using Novell NetWare 3 x and 4 x products with the HP JetDirect print server queue server mode provides improved printing performance over remote printer mode For more information see the HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide Windows 3 1 Windows 95 and Windows NT 3 51 and 4 0 networks For Windows 3 1 and Windows 95 networks HP JetAdmin software works as a
88. the printer has a duplex unit open the rear cover of the duplex unit 11 Remove the two used air filters from the rear of the printer Then use the hand wipe to clean excess dust away from the fan areas 12 Insert the new air filters Close all doors plug in the printer and turn the printer on Tm A T SD gt 7 Y D t2 O 2 DO if t A CELL E TI C7085 90921 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 91 Replacing the fuser kit Replace the fuser kit when the printer control panel displays The fuser kit contains one fuser four paper rollers and a hand wipe WARNING To prevent possible burns be sure the power cord is unplugged and that the printer has cooled for 30 minutes 1 Open the upper rear door of the duplex unit if attached Open the upper rear door of the printer Release the straps from the rear door by squeezing the latches on the straps where the latches connect to the rear door 4 Inside the back of the printer near the bottom locate the two blue latches on the fuser
89. the service technician to verify the operation of components within the paper path When the test is initiated both the M1 and M2 are activated You will see the ITB lift cams rotate once and the ITB drive gear turn briefly The remaining portion of the test simply allows both the M1and Me to run thus exercising the gears and rollers associated with them If an error occurs during the paper path test the message FETH iPPHPER PATH TEST FAILED appears Developer test The developer test rotates the carousel stopping at each toner cartridge and rotating the developer sleeve For the best view of the carousel and the toner cartridge sleeves remove the drum cartridge The drum drawer must be closed before the test can run 1 Press the ITem key until ENGINE DIGGS DEUELOPER TEST appears 2 Press the SELEcT key to run the test The front panel will display ENGINE DIGGS Eai DEVELOPER while the test is running Watch the carousel and make sure the toner scende fasi Sleeve rotates The sequence will be black followed by a pause then magenta cyan and finally yellow The test will last for approximately 35 seconds While the developer test is running you will see the drum turn if it is installed as well as the drive gear for the ITB Drum test The drum test exercises the drum drive mechanism Also the fuser motor is turned on to allow the lift cams for the ITB to be rotated into the ITB up position 1 Press the ITem key until GIHE its
90. to M or M to C not K to C Do not expose the imaging drum to light for more than 15 seconds The drum is light sensitive and exposure to light can cause permanent damage Banding horizontal e The imaging drum might have been exposed to light See Sunburn on page 260 e The ITB can accumulate contamination on its rollers causing a random mechanical banding If you notice buildup on the rollers replace the ITB e As the developer rotates the gap between the imaging drum and the developer can vary slightly This can cause toner to be transferred unevenly and appear lighter or darker approximately every 38 mm 1 5 inches This defect is more apparent in secondary colors There is no workaround for this defect 254 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Banding vertical The doctor blade on the developer can develop notches over time If you observe severe notching replace the developer As the imaging drum gets older the charge roller doesn t charge the imaging drum as well as it used to If you notice buildup or contamination on the charge roller replace the imaging drum Black lines The toner cartridge is defective The toner cartridge is not seated properly The fusing assembly is contaminated or damaged The static eliminator teeth are contaminated or defective The imaging drum is damaged or the waste toner collection in the drum is full Replace the imaging drum Black or partially black pages
91. un n ver dees de Ge de atte a wees s 84 Replacing consumable items ne eee ee ees 85 Cleaning the toner density Sensor 0 2 0 0 cc ee ee eee eens 85 Replacing the toner cartridges 10 cc ee eee nena 86 Replacing the imaging drum o 88 Replacing the transfer kit 2 III n 89 Replacing the fuser Kit 0 0 0 ee a 92 Replacing the paper rollers 0 eee eee ee ees 94 VIN COMMOUC AMON ar paraa asad aa Br Hk ed ae y LOT L1 12 57 27 C1 721 98 Adding memory nanana aaaea hh hh hens 98 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 77 Cleaning the printer and accessories To maintain high print quality and performance use the following opportunities to thoroughly clean the printer and the paper handling accessories e every time you change the toner cartridge run a few pages through e after printing approximately 5 000 pages for C cyan M magenta and Y yellow and 8 000 pages for K black e whenever print quality problems occur Clean the outside surfaces with a water dampened cloth Observe the warning and caution below WARNING Before you begin these steps turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard Be careful when cleaning around the fusing assembly area It might be hot CAUTION To avoid permanent damage to the toner cartridge do not use ammonia based cleaners on or around the printer Do not touch the transfer roller Skin oils on the roller can reduce print
92. 0153 000CN RS6 0153 000CN Gear 18T 348 Parts and diagrams RS6 0139 000CN RS6 0139 000CN RS6 0139 000CN C7085 90921 Description Clutch CL4 electromagnetic Table 8 12 Paper pick up assembly 3 of 3 continued Parts for 4500 series xxG and below RH7 5180 000CN Parts for 4500 series xxH and above RH7 5180 000CN Parts for 4550 series RH7 5180 000CN Gear 16T RS6 0151 000CN RS6 0151 000CN RS6 0151 000CN Clutch CL3 electromagnetic RH7 5178 000CN RH7 5178 000CN RH7 5178 000CN Gear 29T RS6 0152 000CN RS6 0152 000CN RS6 0152 000CN Paper feed PCB assembly RG5 3810 000CN RG5 3810 000CN RG5 3810 000CN ICL cam assembly RG5 3242 000CN RG5 3242 000CN RG5 3242 000CN Clutch one way RB2 0561 000CN RB2 0561 000CN RB2 0561 000CN ITB cam assembly RG5 3241 000CN RG5 3241 000CN RG5 3241 000CN Clutch one way RB2 0561 000CN RB2 0561 000CN RB2 0561 000CN Rowel swing assembly RG5 4696 000CN RG5 4696 000CN RG5 4696 000CN Spring tension RS5 2800 000CN RS5 2800 000CN RS5 2800 000CN Link rowel RB2 0614 000CN RB2 0614 000CN RB2 0614 000CN Transfer assembly secondary RG5 3235 000CN RG5 5115 040CN RG5 5115 040CN Plate support RF5 3124 000CN included in 26 included in 26 Gear 26T RS6 0159 000CN RS6 0159 00
93. 04079 00104 10400 Figure 7 37 Fusing assembly Table 7 45 110 volt fusing assembly 6 3 ohms 1 ohm C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 317 Table 7 45 110 volt fusing assembly Pins 3 to 2 3 1 ohms 1 ohm Pins 4to 3 3 1 ohms 1 ohm 1A to 2A 310 K to 430 K ohm at room temperature 1B to 2B 310 K to 430 K ohm at room temperature 3B to 4B Short 110 volt unit Rear of printer Figure 7 38 318 Troubleshooting J1019 JB o f tn me m N e 5 LT E B 131006 Bh A1 A2 Ew x a A11 A10 J1015 J1016 B1 IC205 Aja J1005 i3 J1022 IC206 42 41021 6 noes ner J1011 8 QT Joso DC controller PCB connectors Front of printer C7085 90921 Note Some locations will vary slightly depending on the version of the printer Figure 7 39 Location of connectors C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 319 Figure 7 40 J8110 J3109 gt lt J3108 im J3107 N _ J3106 d id KR M Ss NS S Ss SS il LS SOS EM he S S E Y LC d idi i Z EN Note Some locations will vary slightly depending on the version of the printer Location of duplexer and 500 sheet paper feeder connectors 320 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Josuas Jaded J9p99 Jodeg LO0 Sd LT J 1asddo eS Re Eer ET Ji Aud1SdO oorr 4coo0er NcOOEP YOUMS uoioejep ezis Jeded
94. 085 90921 Rear door To remove the rear door 1 Open the rear door of the printer 2 Push in the retaining strap connectors to release the two plastic retaining straps attached to the inside of the rear door as shown in Figure 6 5 3 Slide the bottom of the rear door to your right until the plastic guide pin clears the guide pin harness attached to the printer 4 Remove the rear door ever ever NT eer eee CYYYY evr verr oven omme 3r apr pr a on D IR Figure 6 5 Rear door removal and replacement C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 147 Right rear cover To remove the right rear cover Note Remove the duplexer if installed 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the right side cover 3 Remove the screw as shown in Figure 6 6 4 Rotate the top of the cover toward the left side of the printer and remove the cover Reinstallation tip Ensure that the lip on the lower right side of the cover slides behind the lower rear cover lil TE ANCE STANDARD 216FR CHARIES PERFORMANLE 4 SUBCHAPTER MADE IN JAPAN A Figure 6 6 Right rear cover removal and replacement 148 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Drum drawer top drawer cover To remove the drum drawer top drawer cover CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available To identify which printer version you are servicing see page 140 The HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer is equivalent to the newer version of th
95. 0921 Table 7 14 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Paper Handling Menu TRAY 1 MODE FIRST CASSETTE TRAY 1 SIZE LETTER A4 appears only if Tray 1 LEGAL mode is set to EXEC TRAY 1 MODE CASSETTE TRAY 1 TYPE appears only if Tray 1 PREPRINTD mode is set to LTRHEAD TRAY 1 TRNSPRNCY MODE CASSETTE GLOSS PREPUNCHD LABELS BOND RECYCLED COLOR HEAVY CARDSTOCK TRAY 2 TYPE same choices as TRAY 1 TYPE except LABELS and CARDSTOCK TRAY 3 TYPE same choices as TRAY 1 TYPE except LABELS and CARDSTOCK MANUAL FEED ON OFF Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 275 Configuration Menu The Configuration Menu is used to set general printer default settings CAUTION Hewlett Packard recommends that configuration settings only be changed by a system administrator Configuration settings seldom need to be changed Table 7 15 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Configuration settings Menem vaes Denton POWERSAVE OFF The length of time before the printer 1 MIN used for goes into power saving mode troubleshooting 30 MIN 1 HR 2 HRS 4 HRS 8 HRS PERSONALITY The personality language the printer uses to process a print job CLEARABLE If ON message appears until Go is WARNINGS pressed If JOB message appears until end of print job AUTO CONTINUE Determines whether the printer continues printing when certain errors occur If ON printer returns to the READY state If OFF printer remains offline until Go is pressed TONER LOW CONTINUE
96. 0CN RS6 0159 000CN Plate left RF5 2094 000CN RF5 2094 000CN RF5 2094 000CN Cover plate RB2 1572 000CN RB2 1572 000CN RB2 1572 000CN Plate right RF5 2095 000CN RF5 2095 000CN RF5 2095 000CN Spring RS5 2799 000CN RS5 2799 000CN RS5 2799 000CN D roller assembly RG5 3225 040CN RG5 3225 040CN RG5 3225 040CN CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 349 Figure 8 13 Upper drawer assembly Table 8 13 Upper drawer assembly Description Drum drawer assembly Parts for 4500 series xxG and below RG5 5230 000CN Parts for 4500 series XXH and above RG5 5142 050CN Parts for 4550 series RG5 5142 050CN Sensor PS14 density RG5 3281 000CN RG5 5149 000CN RG5 5149 000CN Cover connector RB2 0916 000CN RB2 0916 000CN RB2 0916 000CN Connector assembly RG5 5146 000CN Rg5 5146 000CN RG5 5146 000CN Bushing drum drawer RB2 1130 000CN RB2 1130 000CN RB2 1130 000CN Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will
97. 1 9001 000CN Limiter torque RB1 8974 000CN RB1 8974 000CN RB1 8974 000CN Roller separation RF5 1885 000CN RF5 1885 000CN RF5 1885 000CN Indicator paper level RB1 9009 020CN RB1 9009 020CN RB1 9009 020CN Arm lifter left RB1 9012 000CN RB1 9012 000CN RB1 9012 000CN Arm lifter right RB1 9013 000CN RB1 9013 000CN RB1 9013 000CN Spring torsion RB1 9016 000CN RB1 9016 000CN RB1 9016 000CN CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series 352 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 Figure 8 16 500 sheet paper feeder Table 8 16 500 sheet paper feeder Description Parts for 4500 Parts for 4500 Parts for 4550 series xxG and series xxH and series below above 500 sheet paper feeder C4082 67901 C4082 67901 C4082 67901 500 sheet paper cassette RG5 3900 000CN RG5 3900 000CN RG5 3900 000CN Roller separation RF5 1885 000CN RF5 1885 000CN RF5 1885 000CN CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service
98. 141 Table 6 2 Approximate replacement interval for consumable items 142 Table 7 1 Pre troubleshooting checklist 0 0 00 0 ccc eee 213 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error Messages 0 ce eee 217 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages nananana aaa 226 Table 7 4 HP Color LaserJet 4500 jam locations and associated error messages 239 Table 7 5 HP Color LaserJet 4550 jam locations and associated error messages 240 Table 7 6 Explanation of alternating message 0 ees 240 Table 7 7 lmagederect table cuidar a dekere bee den 253 Table 7 9 Defect spacing Chart 0 0 ccc ee eee eee 267 Table 7 10 Communications Check 44 c ces04 Vase ka es vad Ra Vo eee Sa ee eae 268 Table 7 11 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Information Menu 00 000 llle 273 Table 7 12 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Information Menu 0 000 ee eee eee 273 Table 7 13 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Paper Handling Menu o o oo oooooo o 274 Table 7 14 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Paper Handling Menu oo ooooooo 275 Table 7 15 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Configuration settings o o o o 276 Table 7 16 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Configuration settings o oo o o 277 Table 7 17 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Printing Menu settings 278 Table 7 18 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Printing Menu settings 279 Table 7 19 HP Color LaserJet
99. 19 Figure 5 22 Toner cartridge contact separation function ce ees 119 Figure 5 23 Toner level detection toner cartridge detection 0 2 0 ees 120 Figure 5 24 Laser scanner operation 0 ccc ee eee ete 121 Figure 5 25 Paper jam sensors shown with the optional 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex Mo A O A 122 Figure 5 26 Tray 2 cassette operation o o o o ooooo ooo 123 Figure 5 27 Tray T Manual TOCA 3 9 94 5 aii a AA AA Adi 124 Figure 5 28 Laser paper detected o o oo ooooooo eee teen eee nes 125 Figure 5 29 Overhead transparency Sensor o 125 Figure 5 30 Pick up and feed system 0 cee eee tenet nee eens 126 Figure 5 31 Fusing and delivery unit 2 2 S Soya ri ee eee ew be G4 SS Ae PE ees 127 Figure 5 32 Reversing and duplex pick up operation 0 0 00 128 Figure 5 33 Reversing OCI ANON erica atar we he tret an od on ee pe eae 2 4 Ye ee Ded A ut 129 Contents vii Figure 5 34 Side registration adjustment 0 0 ee eee eee eee 130 Figure 5 35 Duplex feed roller pressure 0 0 ccc eee rn 130 Figure 5 36 DC controller PCB 1 Ras 132 FOUE 5 37 NIOIOIS ANG IANS ai ADA athe Sea do dep e ee 133 Figure 6 1 Phillips and Posidriv screwdriver comparison 00 cee eee eee 140 Figure 6 2 Top cover removal and replacement rear view of printer o oooooooooooooo 144 Figure 6 3 Left side cover removal and replacement 0 ccc ee eee eee 145
100. 200 000CN 6 Cover ITB drawer RG5 3320 000CN RG5 3320 000CN RG5 3320 000CN 7 Tray extension RB2 1215 000CN RB2 1215 000CN RB2 1215 000CN 8 Cover drum drawer RG5 5232 000CN RG5 5152 000CN RG5 5152 000CN 9 Cover left side RG5 3313 000CN RG5 5151 000CN RG5 5151 000CN 10 Cover lower rear RB2 1206 000CN RB2 1206 000CN RB2 1206 000CN 11 Door rear access RG5 3325 040CN RG5 3325 040CN RG5 3325 040CN 12 Cover rear RB2 1205 000CN RB2 1205 000CN RB2 1205 000CN Refer to note below CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series Note Early CLJ4500 printers serial numbers xxGxxxxxxx and below have two versions of the drum drawer cover and the upper drum drawer assembly Figure 8 7 item 6 and Figure 8 13 item 1 If the drum drawer cover requires replacement first determine whether you have the original version of the drum drawer by locating a bar code label with a part number of RG5 3315 on the inside of the drum drawer cover just to the right of the fan cover If you have the original version of the drum drawer order kit part number RG5 5230 000CN to obtain the newer version of the drum drawer assembly drum drawer cover plus additional hardware required to complete the update If the newer versio
101. 3 Figure 7 31 PS14 sensor location Table 7 41 Density sensor location Name Deseriton oooO ye WHEIBEEHH x Li Le LJ 1 E NV J 1 ns a qu b d NN E Am a Figure 7 32 Miscellaneous parts Table 7 42 Miscellaneous parts Drum ground connector Drum drawer closed switch SW3 Front drawers drum ITB 24V interrupt switch SW4 ITB drawer closed switch inside chassis wall SW1 314 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Table 7 42 Miscellaneous parts Location em ooo 5B Tray 2 pickup solenoid behind chassis wall SL2 E Secondary venster roler oth cL pr matar My 8B ITB an clutch behind lower gear CL2 rg mort 000 12 Toner level sensor emitter receiver PS12 Carousel home position sensor PS10 Rear left small cooling fan connector Figure 7 33 Imaging drum connector Table 7 43 Imaging drum connector Location 1 Fan FM3 2 Imaging drum connector 3 FM3 cooling fan connector drawer to chassis C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 315 Press to defeat Rear door interlock switch defeat Figure 7 34 Right rear fan Figure 7 35 C7085 90921 316 Troubleshooting Figure 7 36 Fuse F1 and CB101 Table 7 44 Fuse F1 and CB101 location Circuit breaker CB101 A HHLA IY WIEW neie SEGHUNDLHON LOXINOO TON IANS LOH youre Y a 4 a NEM NM MAE mies ib mc CMA OLS TANO IVICI NON MES TA LLM LHEU JHI
102. 4 ordering 326 controller DC assembly diagrams 333 connectors 318 formatter PCB 135 operations 132 removing 158 replacing 297 Copy Jobs Menu Quick 283 cord power connecting 50 unplugging 139 CorelDRAW 247 249 C7085 90921 count page color 296 consumables 142 definition 80 ITB 114 printing report 291 total 297 counter ITB 114 country of origin determining 18 covers Cleaning 78 covers removing diagrams 335 drum drawer 149 front right 155 ITB drawer 151 left side 145 middle drawer 151 protective scanner 139 right rear 148 right side 146 switch assembly top 161 top 144 top drawer 149 CPU 68 cradle formatter PCB 169 CSSO A Commercial Service and Support Organization America 41 CSSO E Commercial Service and Support Organization Europe 41 cutouts 30 cyan toner cartridges adjusting density 251 installing 51 54 part numbers 327 replacement intervals 142 replacing 86 cylindrical lens 120 D Dainippon Press DIC 248 dark gray release button 51 Data Link Control DLC 72 DC bias 105 DC controller assembly diagrams 333 connectors 318 formatter PCB 135 operations 132 removing 158 replacing 297 default settings Configuration Menu 276 print jobs 278 restoring 282 defeat rear door switch 316 defects troubleshooting images 253 repetitive 265 transparencies 263 delivery deflector solenoid SL3102 129 delivery paper sensor PS7 122 127 312 delivery rollers 127 Deneba Canvas 249 densitometer asse
103. 4500 series xxG and below RS6 0158 000CN ad Parts for 4500 series xxH and above RS6 0158 000CN Parts for 4550 series RS6 0158 000CN Gear 18T 14T RS6 0157 000CN RS6 0157 000CN RS6 0157 000CN Gear 53T 46T RS6 0156 000CN RS6 0156 000CN RS6 0156 000CN Gear 17T RS6 0158 000CN RS6 0158 000CN RS6 0158 000CN Roller RF5 2092 000CN RF5 2092 000CN RF5 2092 000CN Gear 18T RS6 0140 000CN RS6 0140 000CN RS6 0140 000CN Gear 19T RS6 0141 000CN RS6 0141 000CN RS6 0141 000CN Solenoid Tray 2 feed SL2 RG5 3245 000CN RG5 5119 000CN RG5 5119 000CN O0 0O0 J O 0O1 CO Ph Gear 27T RS6 0135 000CN RS6 0135 000CN RS6 0135 000CN Gear 27T RS6 0135 000CN RS6 0135 000CN RS6 0135 000CN Gear 30T 16T RS6 0134 000CN RS6 0134 000CN RS6 0134 000CN Bushing 346 Parts and diagrams RS5 1293 000CN RS5 1293 000CN RS5 1293 000CN C7085 90921 Table 8 11 Description Gear 31T Paper pick up assembly 2 of 3 continued Parts for 4500 series xxG and below RS6 0136 000CN Parts for 4500 series xxH and above RS6 0136 000CN Parts for 4550 series RS6 0136 000CN Motor M2 pick up RH7 1343 000CN RH7 1343 000CN RH7 1343 000CN Gear 47T RS6 0147 000CN RS6 0147 000CN RS6 0147 000CN Gear 24T 37T RS6 01
104. 4500 I O Menu settings oo oooooooooo 280 Table 7 20 HP Color LaserJet 4550 I O Menu settings o ooooooooooooo 280 Table 7 21 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Calibration Menu settings 281 Table 7 22 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Calibration Menu settings 281 Table 7 23 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Resets Menu settings o o o oo o o 282 Table 7 24 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Resets Menu settings o o o oo o o 282 Table 7 25 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Quick Copy Jobs menu 00 eee eee 283 Table 7 26 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Private Stored Jobs menu L 284 Table 7 27 Formatter diagnostics aaa 300 Table 7 29 Bngine diagnosll6S 211 52 4 9 pd e ie ees eer ior qup ica be P Petes 302 Table 7 29 Paper path sensors and switches llellllesn 303 Table 7 30 Paper size settings du eu Rr sd a EAE EE 304 Xi xii Table 7 31 Sensor status cerrar 304 Table 7 32 Sensor function and locations llle 308 Table 7 33 Solenoid and clutch functions and locations llli 309 Table 7 34 Printer motors and Tans 42524 220t0s22 469d oie te Ded ERR aede px 310 Table 7 35 Miscellaneous sensors and clutches 0 00 0 cee ee eee eee 311 Table 7 36 Intermediate transfer belt sensors 0 0 cee 311 Table 7 37 PS3 and PS4 description 0 ccc eee eee 312
105. 578 mm 22 8 inches 500 mm 19 7 inches 500 mm 19 7 inches 500 mm 19 7 inches 500 mm 19 7 inches 559 mm 22 inches 709 mm 27 9 inches 559 mm 22 inches 709 mm 27 9 inches 97 Table 1 7 lists the acoustic emissions of the printer when it is printing and when it is in standby mode kg 125 Ib Table 1 7 Acoustic emissions HP Color LaserJet 4500 Series HP Color LaserJet 4550 Series Per ISO 9296 DIN 45635 T 19 Operating position Printing Standby Bystander 1m Printing Standby Lpa 58 dB A Lpa 49 dB A Lpa 52 dB A Lpa 45 dB A 75 kg 165 Ib Per ISO 7779 DIN 45635 T 19 57 kg 125 Ib Lpa 56 dB A Lpa 48 dB A Lpa 52 dB A Lpa 44 dB A 75 kg 165 Ib Per ISO 9296 DIN 45635 T 19 Per ISO 7779 DIN 45635 T 19 Sound power Printing Standby C7085 90921 Per ISO 9296 Lwad 6 6 bels A Lwad 5 8 bels A Per ISO 9296 Chapter 1 Printer description 23 Lwad 6 7 bels A Lwad 5 3 bels A Note This product emits a sound intensity level Lag at 6 4 bel during printing Do not place the printer in close proximity to users Maximum duty cycle is 35 000 pages per month 24 Printer description C7085 90921 Printer assemblies Figures 1 6 and 1 7 show the location of each major assembly in the printer These assemblies are described in Chapter 3 Figure 1 6 Front view HP Color LaserJet 4500
106. 63 000CN RS6 0163 000CN RS6 0163 000CN Gear 35T RS6 0132 000CN RS6 0132 000CN RS6 0132 000CN Gear 20T RS6 0138 000CN RS6 0138 000CN RS6 0138 000CN Gear 37T 14T RS6 0133 000CN RS6 0133 000CN RS6 0133 000CN Gear 34T 15T RS6 0144 000CN RS6 0144 000CN RS6 0144 000CN Gear 29T 17T RS6 0145 000CN RS6 0145 000CN RS6 0145 000CN Gear assembly 18T 52T RF5 2161 000CN RF5 2161 000CN RF5 2161 000CN Gear 52T RS6 0146 000CN RS6 0146 000CN RS6 0146 000CN Motor M1 fusing assembly RG5 3227 000CN RG5 3227 000CN RG5 3227 000CN Gear 26T RS6 0149 000CN RS6 0149 000CN RS6 0149 000CN Gear 37T RS6 0143 000CN RS6 0143 000CN RS6 0143 000CN Sensor paper size RG5 3234 000CN RG5 3234 000CN RG5 3234 000CN Cable paper feed RG5 3785 000CN RG5 3785 000CN RG5 3785 000CN Gear 29T RS6 0150 000CN RS6 0150 000CN RS6 0150 000CN Gear 29T RS6 0150 000CN RS6 0150 000CN RS6 0150 000CN Clutch CL2 electromagnetic RH7 5176 000CN RH7 5176 000CN RH7 5176 000CN Sensor PS8 cassette paper WG8 5309 000CN WG8 5309 000CN WG8 5309 000CN Spring Tray 2 pickup tension RS5 2794 000CN RS5 2794 000CN RS5 2794 000CN Cone RS5 1341 000CN RS5 1341 000CN RS5 1341 000CN Metal tab tray 2 RB2 0593 000CN RB2 0593 000CN RB2
107. 8 0000N RG5 3808 0000N_ 9 fe MO card ereo foreo fazore BSB MB assemby RGSS173 0000N_ RG5 5173 0000N_ RG5 5173 0000N_ 98 e ITB cam assembly RG5 3241 000CN RG5 3241 000CN RG5 3241 000CN 8 14 21 TB drawer assembly RG5 5120 100CN RG5 5120 100CN RG5 5120 100CN 8 8 VST STTEOTACN Kit imaging drum drawer Not shown RGSSUSONON Bio B RBT 8974 0000N 25 Metal tab Tay 2 3s Microswitch ITB WC2 5330 000CN WC2 5330 000CN WC2 5330 000CN 8 12 2 Motor M1 fusing RG5 3227 000CN RG5 3227 0000CN RG5 3227 000CN A assembly Motor M2 pick up RH7 1343 000CN RH7 1343 000CN RH7 1343 000CN 14 Paper feed PCB RG5 3810 000CN RG5 3810 000CN RG5 3810 000CN Paper feed PCB assembly RG5 3810 000CN RG5 3810 000CN RG5 3810 000CN Paper size sensor PCB RG5 3816 000CN RG5 3816 000CN RG5 3816 000CN C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 357 Parts for 4500 Parts for 4500 Parts for HP series xxG and series xxH and Color LaserJet below above 4550 printer RF5 2094 000CN RF5 2094 000CN RF5 2094 000CN 1 RF5 2095 000CN RF5 2095 000CN RF5 2095 000CN Reference E NI N I O NI O1 e 0i N OTI GO OI NI OIN NJ Co A N 00 Role ERN eo purpose tray paper Roller RF5 2092 000CN RF5 2092 000CN RF5 2092 000CN RF5 1885 000CN RF5 1885 000CN RF5 1885 000CN RF5 2112 000CN RF5 2112 000CN RF5 2112 000CN RG5 4696 000CN RG5 4696 000CN RG5 4696 000CN 4 1 1 1 pressure
108. 816 000CN Paper feed PCB assembly RG5 3810 000CN RG5 3810 000CN RG5 3810 000CN Formatter PCB C4084 69001 C4084 69001 C4227 69001 Firmware DIMM C4084 60004 C4084 60004 C9130 60001 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I O card Toner level sensor PCB C4081 60001 C4081 60001 C4207 60001 RG5 5247 000CN co These parts require exchange CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 333 SS External covers panels etc Figure 8 4 C7085 90921 334 Parts and diagrams Table 8 4 Printer cover and door Description Parts for 4500 Parts for 4500 Parts for 4550 series s n xxG series s n xxH series and below and above 1 Cover right side RB2 1203 000CN RB2 1203 000CN RB2 1203 000CN 2 Cover connector RB2 1224 000CN RB2 1224 000CN RB2 1224 000CN 3 Cover right front RG5 3310 000CN RG5 3310 000CN RG5 3310 000CN 4 Cable control panel RG5 3802 000CN RG5 5195 000CN RG5 5195 000CN 5 Control panel assembly RG5 5200 000CN RG5 5200 000CN RG5 5
109. 90921 Cleaning the toner density sensor Clean the toner density sensor whenever the imaging drum is replaced or when the control panel message displays GEMSITY SENSOR OUT OF CAUTION To avoid scratching the sensor do not clean it with any paper products To clean the toner density sensor 1 Open the ITB drawer and remove the cleaning brush mounted inside 2 Open the drum drawer and remove the imaging drum using the blue handle 3 Using the cleaning brush remove all dust and toner particles from the sensor as illustrated 4 Replace the imaging drum Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 85 86 Printer maintenance Replacing the toner cartridges ds and me toner i when the control panel displays The day can i indicate that one or more toner colors are out 1 With the printer turned on and warmed up push the dark gray release button on the side of the printer 1 and open the printer s top cover 2 Note ij e nal Hees to replace a toner cartridge and the TOMER CHAR LO or PE OUT messages are not ee on the contro o panel open and close the top cover Wait for the FRESS SELEC me to ma on the control Daniel Press unen and the message 1 REDE appears on the printer control panel Press VALUE to Salen ihe toner cartridge you want to replace and proceed to the following steps 2 Lift the toner access cover and remove the used toner cartridge CAUTION Do not shake the toner cartridg
110. 90921 342 Parts and diagrams Table 8 9 Developing carousel assembly Description Fan large Parts for 4500 series xxG and below RH7 1346 000CN Parts for 4500 series xxH and above RH7 1435 000CN Parts for 4550 series RH7 1435 000CN Spacer RS5 6210 000CN RS5 6210 000CN RS5 6210 000CN Bearing carousel XG9 0361 000CN XG9 0361 000CN XG9 0361 000CN Gear 125T RS6 0176 000CN RS6 0176 000CN RS6 0176 000CN Developing PCB RG5 3811 000CN RG5 5180 000CN RG5 5180 000CN Carousel drive assembly RG5 5209 000CN RG5 5209 000CN RG5 5209 000CN Cable fusing connector RG5 3886 000CN RG5 3886 000CN RG5 3886 000CN Cable rotary RG5 3795 000CN RG5 3795 000CN RG5 3795 000CN 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 Sensor PS12 toner level RG5 3355 000CN RG5 3355 000CN RG5 3355 000CN Sensor PS10 carousel position WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN Carousel assembly RG5 5249 000CN RG5 5249 000CN RG5 5249 000CN Spring toner flap RS5 2739 000CN RS5 2739 000CN RS5 2739 000CN Cap toner flap RB2 0964 000CN N A N A Kit carousel flap C4084 67907 C4084 67909 C4084 67909 Toner level sensing PCB N A N A RG5 5247 000CN Toner level sensing cable N A N A RG5 5444 000CN Grounding spring RB2 0981 000CN RB2 0981 000CN
111. A ese e 7 11 4500 series menu map 7 12 4550 series menu map 7 13 4500 series left and 4550 series right printer configuration page 7 14 Supplies status page 7 15 Usage page 7216 Rard diskle directory Dage stoner Gok ad OSEE tebe ee np 7 17 Service mode menu map 1 ee eras 7 18 HP Color LaserJet 4500 series Service menu map llle 7 19 HP Color LaserJet 4550 series Service menu map llle 7 20 Registration page 7 21 Location of the engine test button llli 7 22 Sensor locations 7 23 Printer solenoids and clutches sceler 7 24 Printer motors and fans 7 25 Miscellaneous sensors and clutches hs 7 26 Intermediate transfer bell sensors rs 7 27 Miscellaneous sensors with tray 1 front cover removed 0 000 c eee eee eee eee 7 28 PS6 and PS7 sensor location 000 ccc ccena 7 29 Miscellaneous switches 7 30 Miscellaneous switches 7 31 PS14 sensor location 7 32 Miscellaneous parts 7 33 Imaging drum connecto 7 34 Rear door interlock swit 7 35 Right rear fan 7 36 Fuse F1 and CB101 7 37 Fusing assembly andisensOfS rta a ard Be ARD Aib A PL pM Gli deleab t II ne Ede a De ord rosse es ALD owes Duty Bt eee 7 38 DC controller PCB connectors cce 7 39 Location of connectors Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Fi
112. B2 1556 000CN RB2 1556 000CN ITB assembly RG5 5173 060CN RG5 5173 060CN RG5 5173 060CN ITB drawer assembly RG5 5120 100CN RG5 5120 100CN RG5 5120 100CN Handle ITB drawer RB2 1361 000CN RB2 1361 000CN RB2 1361 000CN 2 3 3 4 o 6 7 8 9 Filter air Small RB2 1283 000CN RB2 1283 000CN RB2 1283 000CN O Fan small RH7 1407 000CN RH7 1407 000CN RH7 1407 000CN Fuser 110V C7085 90921 RG5 5154 050CN C4084 69002 RG5 5154 050CN C4084 69002 RG5 5154 050CN C4084 69002 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 337 Table 8 6 11 Description Fuser 220V Internal components 1 of 3 continued Parts for 4500 series xxG and below RG5 5155 050CN C4084 69003 Parts for 4500 series xxH and above RG5 5155 050CN C4084 69003 Parts for 4550 series RG5 5155 050CN C4084 69003 12 Kit Fuser Deflector 1 C4084 67906 C4084 67906 C4084 67906 13 Drum bushing assembly 1 RG5 5169 000CN RG5 5169 000CN RG5 5169 000CN 14 Rod delivery 1 RB2 1284 000CN RB2 1284 000CN RB2 1284 000CN 15 Spring tension 1 RS5 2754 000CN RS5 2754 000CN RS5 2754 000CN 16 Face down delivery assembly 1 RG5 5135 000CN RG5 5135 000CN RG5 5135 000CN 17 Filter air large 1 RB2 1282 000CN RB2 1282 000CN RB2 1282 000CN 18 Flapper guide assembly 1 RG5 5251 000CN RG5 5251 000CN RG5 5251 000CN
113. CB are routed to J201 on the developing PCB to J1017 on the DC controller PCB RESETTING MEMORY Description The printer is executing a memory reset The printer returns to the HEHE state upon completion of this process Action No action required RESETTING VALUES FINISHED Description The color calibration density values have been reset to their default values RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS Description The printer Is oe ar Action No action required Action is No action required SELECT LANGUAGE Description The language selection power up key sequence has been entered The printer will prompt the user to select a new control panel display language once it has completed its initialization process Action Select new language when prompted SERVICE MODE Description The Service Mode power up key sequence has been entered The printer will remain in Service Mode until Go is pressed Action Press Go to end Service Mode TONER CMYK LOW Description The toner cartridge specified is low on toner This message appears if 7 3FER i L6 default is set on the printer control panel in the Configuration Menu Action Printing will continue until a TOMER LET message appears To change the toner cartridge now press Select TONER CMYK OUT alternates with PRESS SELECT TO CHANGE TONER Description The toner cartridge specified is out of toner TONER CMYK LOW alternates with
114. CN Gear 49T RS6 0154 000CN Gear 39T 31T RS6 0155 000CN Gear 53T RS6 0156 000CN Gear 53T 46T RS6 0157 000CN Gear 18T 14T RS6 0158 000CN Gear 17T RS6 0158 000CN Gear 17T RS6 0159 000CN Gear 26T RS6 0163 000CN Gear 24T 37T RS6 0176 000CN Gear 125T Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 363 Table 8 19 Numerical parts list Partnumber Description Figure Reference VS1 6173 014CN Connector not shown VS1 6174 014CN ITB drawer connector 8 10 6 WC2 5330 000CN Microswitch 8 8 7 WC2 5330 000CN Microswitch ITB 8 10 2 WG8 5309 000CN Sensor PS8 cassette paper 8 11 32 WG8 5309 000CN Sensor PS6 fusing unit pressure release 8 10 4 WG8 5309 000CN Sensor PS4 multi purpose tray paper 8 14 4 WG8 5362 000CN Sensor PS10 carousel position 8 9 10 WG8 5364 000CN Sensor PS3 last paper 8 14 3 XG9 0361 000CN Bearing carousel 8 9 3 These parts require exchange 364 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 Index Numerics 10 100Base TX networks 66 10Base2 networks 65 10BaseT networks 66 A AC bias 105 AC DC power supply 135 access denied 73 accessories cleaning 78 ordering 41 325 acoustic emissions 23 Acrobat Adobe 249 adding memory 98 adhesive labels printing 32 supported sizes 29 adjusting colors automatic 246 balance 250 Adobe Acrobat 249 Adobe Illustrator 249 Adobe InDesign 250 Adobe PageMaker 249 Adobe Pho
115. CSSO A CSSO E 8050 Foothills Blvd Wolf Hirth StraBe 33 Roseville CA 95678 D 7030 B blingen Germany Ordering consumables Consumables can be ordered directly from Hewlett Packard The phone numbers for ordering consumables are e U S 800 538 8787 e Canada 800 387 3154 Toronto 416 671 8383 e United Kingdom 0734 441212 e Other local phone numbers may also be available Chapter 2 Service approach 41 Exchange program HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts These are identified in Chapter 8 and can be ordered through Commercial Support Services Organization Americas CSSO A or Commercial Support Services Organization Europe CSSO E Consumables Paper and toner cartridges can be ordered directly from Hewlett Packard See Chapter 8 for ordering information World Wide Web Printer drivers updated HP printer software and product and support information can be obtained from the following URL in the U S http www hp com go support Printer drivers may be obtained from the following sites In China ftp www hp com cn go support In Japan ftp www jpn hp com go support In Korea http www hp co kr go support In Taiwan http www hp com tw go support or the local driver website http www dds com tw HP Service Parts Information Compact Disc This powerful CD ROM based parts information tool is designed to give users fast easy access to parts information such as pricing and recommended stocking lists
116. DRUM TEST appears 2 Press the SELECT key to run the test The front panel will display EHGIHE DIGGS Edi DRM while the test is running Watch to see if the ITB lift cams turn and if both the drum drive gear and the ITB drive gear are rotating Path sensors test The path sensors test allows the paper path sensors and switches to be tested for correct operation Table 7 29 shows the correlation between the identifier on the front panel and the sensor or switch it represents Table 7 29 Paper path sensors and switches Wee Name pesen NEN CNN T T NN C May tr ted pales E sn or b m oa as nz ne fiese NEN NN TUI ON NNNM E Pm ona oy a paper nr pvc opin Toy par sa omena 1 SM opin oy par sa wien yan opin oy par ss otro NEN EN I T NN Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 303 Table 7 29 Paper path sensors and switches continued emer Name Description Lo PS11 ITB photo sensor Mo NA 500 sheet feeder 1 installed O uninstalled Ho P9 Top output tray full sensor 1 Press the Item key until ENGINE DIC QF appears on the front panel 2 Press the SELECT key to activate the test The front panel will display A through N with a binary value below it When running this test make sure the ITB drawer is installed and trays 2 and 3 are removed In this state the default value on the front panel should be 0X111111110010 where the x can be either a 0 or 1 If there is any other value then there is a
117. EM XN 775177 posos a L mem ro 8 C4292A CAS maditionalChinese 8 MB C4293A CAS Simplified Chinese 8 MB YS 90210 Japanese 8 MB C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 325 Table 8 1 Consumables accessories and supplies continued Product number Part number Description C2934A C2936A HP Color LaserJet Transparencies A4 C4179A oT HP Color LaserJet Soft Gloss Paper letter C4179B GF HP Color LaserJet Soft Gloss Paper A4 100 pin Memory DIMMS C4140A C4140 67901 4 MB HP Color LaserJet 4500 C4141A C4041 67901 8 MB HP Color LaserJet 4500 C4142A C4042 67901 16 MB HP Color LaserJet 4500 C4143A C4043 67901 32 MB HP Color LaserJet 4500 C3913A C3913 67901 64 MB HP Color LaserJet 4500 168 pin Memory DIMMS C7848A C7848 60001 64 MB HP Color LaserJet 4550 C7850A C7850 60001 128 MB HP Color LaserJet 4550 HP Color LaserJet Transparencies letter Network Connectivity J3110A J3110 69001 HP JetDirect 600N for ethernet 10Base T RJ 45 J3111A J3111 69001 HP JetDirect 600N for ethernet 10Base T RJ 45 and 10Base 2 BNC and LocalTalk DIN 8 J3112A J3112 69001 HP JetDirect 600N for Token Ring DB9 RJ 45 J3113A J3113 69001 HP JetDirect 600N for Fast Ethernet 10 100 Base TX RJ 45 J4169A J4169 69001 HP JetDirect 610N for Fast Ethernet 10 100 Base TX RJ 45 C4082 67901 C4083 67901 Duplex unit two sided printing HP Color LaserJet 4500 cabinet 5 GB Hard D
118. Interpreting the usage page The following sample illustrates a usage page HP LaserJet 4550 series printers Figure 7 15 Usage page Usage totals all media sizes Black coverage Cyan coverage Yellow coverage a FF QQ N Magenta coverage C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 291 Event log Detailed service information is noted in the event log The following is a list of the types of messages logged in the event log e jam errors e ElO errors catastrophic errors The last 50 errors are listed with the most recent error listed first The event log can be viewed either on the control panel display or it can be printed from the control panel To view the event log on the printer s control panel 1 Press MENU until THFGEMATION HEHE appears on the control panel display 2 Press ITEM until SHOH EVENT LOG appears on the display 3 Press SELECT to view the event log on the control panel display 4 Press Go to bring the printer back online To print the event log 4500 series 1 Access the printer s service mode see page 293 Press ITEM until FEINT OOF TGUEATION appears Press SELECT to print the configuration page Up to 50 events will be printed on the configuration page To print the event log 4550 series 1 On the printer control panel press MENU until HFOEMATION MEHL displays 2 Press ITEM until PRINT EUEHT LOG displays 3 Press SELECT to print the event
119. L3102 The rotation of the delivery deflector solenoid moves the delivery deflector feeding the media into the duplexer The reversing motor M3102 rotates counter clockwise to feed the media into the reversing unit Once the reversed paper sensor PS3101 detects the trailing edge of the paper fed into the reversed unit the duplex driver PCB changes the paper feed direction by rotating the reversing motor clockwise Paper is then fed along the lower duplex guide until the paper reaches the duplex feed unit PS3101 Duplexing unit PS3103 Duplex feed unit Reversed unit Reversed roller 2 PS3101 Duplexing unit Reversed roller 1 09104 Duplex feed unit Reversed unit Reversed roller 2 Figure 5 33 Reversing operation C7085 90921 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 129 Figure 5 34 Figure 5 35 Side registration adjustment The printer adjusts side registration so that the center of the paper in the horizontal direction matches the center of the printable area on the ITB when printing on the second side The side registration guides press against both sides of the paper in order to complete the adjustment The duplex driver PCB then drives the side registration motor M3103 clockwise and moves the home registration guide to the home position Once the side registration home position sensor PS3105 detects the home position of the side registration guide the duplex driver PCB stops M3103 and holds the side registration guide a
120. OJ The printer accepts the NAME parameter and returns the name string in the unsolicited JOB start status message if unsolicited job status is enabled The printer transmits the unsolicited JOB status message to every I O channel that has enabled this function This message s format is PJL USTATUS JOB lt CR gt lt LF gt START lt CR gt lt LF gt NAME job name gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt FF gt The printer resets the nested job counter whenever it switches the source to a different I O channel This prevents a corrupt job on one channel from disrupting the activities on another channel PJL EOJ This command identifies the end of a print job and is a hint for the I O switching algorithm The printer counts nested jobs and recognizes job boundaries when the counter decrements to zero The printer ignores isolated EOJ commands Each EOJ must be preceded by a JOB command PJL ECHO This printer supports the ECHO command which transmits its parameters over the I O channel to the host that issued the command PJL USTATUS JOB ON OFF This command enables or disables the JOB status for the I O channel that delivers the command PJL USTATUSOFF This command disables the unsolicited JOB status for the I O channel that delivered the command For this printer it duplicates the function of JL USTATUS JOB OFF AND PJL USTATUS DEVICE OFF Note All commands not supported by this printer s PUL command set are returned with the m
121. ON Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 3 Open the ITB drawer middle drawer and Tray 2 4 Remove the two screws as shown in callout 1 of figure 6 3 5 Carefully pull out the bottom of the left cover disengage the two tabs located behind the cover see callout 2 of figure 6 3 and then lift the cover up and off CAUTION Be careful to not break the tabs when pulling out the bottom of the cover Figure 6 3 Left side cover removal and replacement C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 145 CAUTION CAUTION Figure 6 4 Right side cover To remove the right side cover from the printer 1 Open the drum drawer top drawer and remove the imaging drum protecting it from light 2 Remove the top cover Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 3 Open the ITB drawer middle drawer and Tray 2 4 Remove the two screws shown in callout 1 Figure 6 4 5 Carefully pull out the bottom of the cover and disengage the two tabs located behind the cover see callout 2 Figure 6 4 by sliding the cover to the rear Lift the cover up and off Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the cover ensure that the tabs on the inside of the cover callout 2 Figure 6 4 are seated properly by pushing in firmly on the tabs while sliding the cover forward into position Y Right side cover removal and replacement 146 Removal and replacement C7
122. OR Description CAUTION 54 2 PRINTER ERROR Description Indicates that a problem exists with the carousel assembly Either the carousel is not rotating or the sensor has failed Drive motor M3 provides drive for the toner cartridge carousel If motion is not 2 detected a 54 2 error appears M3 is a 6 phase stepping motor and receives its drive signal from J203 of the developing PCB Photosensor PS10 monitors movement and the position of the toner cartidge carousel Different width tabs four tabs one for each cartridge on the left end of the Continued on next page Action Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Verify connectors J551 on the beam detect PCB J1103 on the scanner motor and J1006 on the DC controller are fully seated and connected correctly Replace the laser scanner unit Action Verify that the DIMM is installed correctly Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Remove and replace the DIMM that caused the error Action Indicates that an internal power failure has occurred 1 Turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on Replace the high voltage power supply Check the fuser to ensure jams have not occurred 54 1 errors can be caused by damaging the thermistor while clearing fuser jams Make sure there is not a fluctuation in the power supply to the printer Check that the electrical specifications see Chapter 1 are met Rep
123. OR Description A density sensor out of range error was detected during a color calibration Action The density sensor might be dirty Inspect and clean the sensor See Cleaning the toner density sensor page 85 DIAGNOSTICS MODE Description The extended diagnostics power up key sequence has been entered Refer to the diagnostics procedures at the end of this chapter Action No action required DRUM ERROR REPLACE DRUM KIT Description An error has been detected with a component of the printer drum kit Action Replace the drum kit DRUM LIFE LOW REPLACE DRUM KIT 4500 Or DRUM LIFE LOW ORDER DRUM KIT 4550 Description Approximately 80 of the drum s life has been consumed DRUM LIFE OUT REPLACE DRUM KIT Description The imaging drum has reached the end of its expected life Action Continue printing and order the drum kit Drum replacement will be required when the Drum Life Out message is displayed Action Replace the drum kit DUPLEXER ERROR CHECK DUPLEXER Description An error has occurred in the duplex unit Action 1 Verify that the duplex unit is correctly installed 2 Verify that the small power cord from the duplex unit is plugged into the printer and the power cord from the AC outlet is plugged into the duplex unit ElO X INITIALIZING YYY alternates with DO NOT POWER OFF Description The ElO device in slot X is initializing The YYY value w
124. PCB I l Video i controller PCB 1 1 I I nin Drum cartridge EEPROM js f Multi purpose tray me yy E Serial communication Bus line Video data DC controller PCB eria db Feed PCB T Developing PCB mI J Developing rotary motor M3 _ Control line Drum motor M4 Toner cartridge motor M5 C7085 90921 Motors and fans The printer contains five motors that drive the paper pick up feed assembly and the image formation assembly The printer also contains three fans Figure 5 37 and Table 5 8 illustrate the location of each motor and fan Figure 5 37 Motors and fans Table 5 8 Motor and fan locations Reference Components Fusing motor Pick up motor Carousel motor Drum motor Toner cartridge motor Large fan Small fan Front fan Fusing motor M1 The fusing motor is a two phase stepping motor This motor operates the fusing assembly secondary transfer roller feed belt feed roller ITB contact clutch ITB cleaning roller contact clutch and the secondary transfer contact clutch Pickup motor M2 The pick up motor is a two phase stepping motor The pick up motor operates the cassette multi purpose tray paper feeder and registration roller Carousel motor M3 The carousel motor is a two phase stepping motor The carousel motor operates the toner carousel
125. Plug the other end of the parallel cable into the computer Tighten the screws on the parallel cable to secure the cable to the computer 4 Turn the computer on and then turn the printer on Note Your system will sense the printer if your system is Plug and Play compatible Follow the directions on your screen To install the complete software package cancel Plug and Play and see the getting started guide for more information C7085 90921 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 59 Parallel cable pin configuration To take advantage of the enhanced bidirectional parallel interface use a 10 meter 30 ft parallel cable IEEE 1284 compliant with a 25 pin DB male to a IEEE 1284C male C connector Use the following table to verify correct pin configuration Computer Signal Name Printer Pin nSTROBE wsmox 8 Bi 9 1 CIS AS CAS DWAz 8 4 DWA3 8 8 DRA E 8 DRASTIC DRAB 8 8 DWAT 8 8 moWG E BUY Cd CALL PE S 8 SELECT 8 Nui WM ooo mooo 0 8 7 PERPRIH e NG a 60 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 C7085 90921
126. S out Ensure that the rear plastic retaining strap attached to the HVPS clears the chassis and its remaining components High voltage power supply replacement tip When reinstalling the HVPS carefully insert the plastic retaining strap attached to the rear of the HVPS through the chassis Figure 6 32 High voltage power supply removal and replacement newer version HP Color LaserJet 4500 and HP Color LaserJet 4550 printers 174 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Figure 6 33 High voltage power supply removal and replacement older version HP Color LaserJet 4500 printers C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 175 Drum drive assembly To remove the drum drive assembly Note Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer 1 Open both front drawers CAUTION Make sure the imaging drum is protected from light Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 2 Remove the formatter pan assembly 3 Remove the power supply 4 Disconnect the two cables from the HVPS and free them from the cable stay 5 Remove the screw that secures the cable trough to the drum drive assembly as shown in Figure 6 34 ES E i Figure 6 34 Drum drive assembly removal and replacement 1 of 3 6 Carefully release the cable trough by pulling out slightly on the bottom and releasing the clip Depress the plastic v shaped clip underneath the DC controller to loosen the cable guide
127. Service ans Support Organizations 41 HP Distribution Center 43 ordering parts 41 ordering supplies 325 photoconductive material 105 106 photodiodes 111 photosensitive drum cartridge 112 operations 116 PhotoShop Adobe 247 249 pick up assembly diagrams 345 pick up motor M2 operations 122 126 133 removing 187 pick up rollers operations 124 removing 205 pin configuration parallel cable 60 C7085 90921 pins memory 98 PJL Printer Job Language commands 269 Technical Reference Manual 75 placement requirements 20 21 plates waste toner transfer 109 pliers 140 Plug and Play 59 ports BNC 65 FIR 68 LocalTalk 64 parallel 58 RJ 45 66 Posidrive screwdrivers 140 postcards printing 32 supported sizes 29 PostScript color matching 250 support 17 pouches ESD 139 power consumption 22 rating information 19 troubleshooting 216 power button 50 power cord connecting 50 unplugging 139 power receptacle locating 26 power supplies AC DC 135 duplex unit 128 high voltage 136 removing 173 power switch SW6 locating 25 overcurrent protection 136 PowerSave formatter PCB control 135 power consumption 22 settings 63 preprinted forms 33 presses commercial 248 pressure release sensor fusing unit PS6 127 312 pressure release solenoid duplex feed roller S3101 129 pressure atmospheric 23 pre troubleshooting checklist 212 primary charge roller 105 primary transfer 107 print in grayscale option 246 print jobs monochrome
128. TIFF files Adobe PhotoShop for example being a raster image editor is not on the above list of applications that support the Automatic PANTONE calibration feature PANTONE palettes for some raster image editor applications such as Adobe PhotoShop are available on the Web at http www hp com support 1j4550 Once connected select Downloads and Drivers Printer drivers ICC color profiles and sRGB color swatches are also available at this Web address PANTONE Application Palettes are available for Adobe Illustrator 4 8 PageMaker 5 6 and 6 5 PhotoShop 3 5 5 CorelDRAW 6 9 Micrographics Designer 6 7 Macromedia Freehand 4 8 QuarkXpress as EPS files 3 3 4 04 Deneba Canvas 3 5 6 1 Fractal Design Painter 2 5 5 EPSF Charts TIFF Charts PANTONE Color Drive Text Format ASCII Raw PostScript File Adobe Acrobat Vector graphics such as company logos created in one of the above applications using palettes or applications that preserve the PANTONE name can be imported into Microsoft Word PowerPoint and other MS Office applications To do this the color application must create an Encapsulated PostScript EPS file of the image to be inserted as a file into the Office document using the insert file function Cutting and pasting from the clipboard will not work These tasks do not preserve the PANTONE name or the CMYK palette value Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 249 Note CAUTION Note Some of the PANTONE colors w
129. Table 7 38 PS6 and PS7 deScriplion 1 44 04 5414008 a ECC d ees 312 Table 7 39 Switch description llli 313 Table 7 40 SW2 SW5 and PS13 description llli llle 313 Table 7 41 Density sensor location lille 314 Table 7 42 Miscellaneous parts llli III 314 Table 7 43 Imaging drum connector oocococooo ees 315 Table 7 44 Fuse F1 and CB101 location 0 0 eee 317 Table 7 45 110 volt fusing assembly 0 0 0 0 eee ne 317 Table 8 1 Consumables accessories and supplies LL 325 Table 8 2 Types of screws eee rn 328 Table 9 94 OB assembly 24a 6554 te hou Food docet Ee ORE QA oases eee SR dd 333 Table 8 4 Printer cover and door 1 0 ccc eee es 335 Table 8 5 Top Cover Gotiponells 559 9 9 x A deor eros She ed d REDE bed eee s 336 Table 8 6 Internal components 1 of 3 llle 337 Table 8 7 Internal components 2 of 3 llle 339 Table 8 8 Internal components 3 of 3 lille 341 Table 8 9 Developing carousel assembly 0 00 ccc eee eee 343 Table 8 10 Paper pick up assembly 1 of 3 eee 345 Table 8 11 Paper pick up assembly 2 of 3 1 0 eee 346 Table 8 12 Paper pick up assembly 3 of 3 lille 348 Table 8 13 Upper drawer assembly 2 0 0 0 ccc eee eee tenes 350 Table 8 14 MP tray paper pick up assembly 0 00 ee eee 351 Table 8 15 250 s
130. The CPU requires 5 V of power to be supplied from the printer This power is also used to supply power to the paper feeder The external power supply provides 24 V and 5 V and is used to drive the motors solenoids and sensors Operation Paper is fed into the duplexing unit by the duplex feed rollers which are rotated by the duplex feed motor M3101 The paper is reversed by the reversing roller which is rotated by the reversing motor M3102 The paper is then fed into the printer by the duplexing unit feed roller after the side registration roller is adjusted by the side registration guide see Figure 5 32 E Do a PS3101 Figure 5 32 Reversing and duplex pick up operation 128 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Table 5 7 Motors solenoids and sensors Reference Description Duplex feed motor Reversing motor Side registration motor Duplex feed roller pressure release solenoid Delivery deflector solenoid Reversing unit paper sensor Face up sensor Reversing unit stationary paper sensor Duplex pick up paper sensor Side registration home position sensor Reversing operation The media is guided to the duplex unit with the face up deflector in conjunction with the face up tray If the face up tray is closed the delivery deflector solenoid SL3102 operates the deflector The duplex driver PCB turns the delivery deflector solenoid S
131. VD BOISE IDAHO 83714 U S A Serial No USBB123456 AA Made in Singapore DU HEWLETT 4118A PACKARD Sample label Chapter 1 Printer description 19 Site requirements The printer must be kept in a proper location to maintain the performance level that has been set at the factory In particular be sure that the environment adheres to the specifications listed in this chapter Below are recommendations for the printer location and placement Make sure the printer has the following e awell ventilated dust free area e ahard level surface not more than a 2 angle e for the HP Color LaserJet 4500 and 4500N the surface must support 51 kg 112 Ib for the HP Color LaserJet 4500DN the surface must support 77 kg 169 Ib e for the HP Color LaserJet 4550 and 4550N the surface must support 51 kg 112 Ib for the HP Color LaserJet 4550DN and 4550HDN the surface must support 77 kg 169 Ib e alevel surface that supports all four corners of the 500 sheet paper feeder e aconstant temperature and humidity Do not install near water sources humidifiers air conditioners refrigerators or other major appliances Make sure to keep the printer e away from direct sunlight dust open flames or ammonia fumes e away from the direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems e away from walls or other objects There must be enough space around the printer for proper access and ventilation See Figure 1 5 on page 21 20 P
132. a aaea heh hh hh ns 70 Soap cis 4 524 3e zur d ied rs esI oy eee elie ee Ge A 71 Setting network security on the printer 0 eee eee eee eens 73 4 Printer maintenance Cleaning the printer and accessories 1 ee rans 78 Approximate replacement intervals for consumable items 0000 eee 80 Locating Consumables ee eee has 84 Replacing consumable items 0 eee eee eee hh 85 DIMM configuration RCETT CITUR LU TC TI LOT n 98 5 Theory of operation ius e o o Ie 102 SIC OC le m cee ction ua el io ws ia ca ies weg ee qu od Sed dl er le deb ee Hs 103 Mage TOMAN ai Cet ane oh Rh od a da e id dass dal cd a ee 104 Toner deN Siy ns pacien panas roca a e pos pais a o e ae ta bad e as 111 Mechanical SY SCCM wx ser ane dca ae a d 0 49 and AR OE 099 dado 8 i di de a do ud 112 gioi 122 DC controller subsystem llle Rh hans 132 IO TOPS ST THIS vega dox st QC ww CREER e a ooo e MERI d Un s c A ah me cr ae Wn te iL oo dae d S GU ww 133 Formator SySlOI m T T v mmm 135 FOwer SUPDPIOS sep fetus ok nod Ato da a Aes Oe Ome Be ee Aone A he ee ad 135 Contents 6 Removal and replacement Ig e AI es er ee eee E ta ae 139 Consumable assemblies 0 000 cee en Rr 142 Covers drawers and top and front assemblies 2 0 ee ee eens 144 Right side assemblies x aca cem REA ERE DESEE RE GESSERAZISx ERAI
133. able 1 9 describes the recommended specifications for transparencies Do not use DeskJet inkjet transparencies in this printer The transparencies can become overheated and melt causing serious damage to your printer Hewlett Packard recommends using HP Color LaserJet Transparencies with this printer HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results Table 1 9 Printing on transparencies Description Specifications Electrical surface 2 0 to 15 by 10 ohms per square inch resistivity Fusing compatibility Materials must not discolor melt offset or release hazardous emissions when heated to 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second Caliper thickness 0 12 mm 0 0048 in to 0 13 mm 0 0052 in Glossy paper For optimum results when printing on glossy paper select the glossy print setting in the printer driver using Because this setting affects all print jobs it is important to return the printer to its original settings once your job has printed See the section in the online user guide on configuring input trays Do not duplex on glossy paper Doing so will result in jams and print quality problems Colored paper Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper Pigments used must be able to withstand the printer s fusing temperature of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second without deterioration Do not use paper with a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced
134. al cover whenever the drum is removed from the printer Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Watch for the ESD reminder shown at the left when removing printer parts Protect the parts that are sensitive to ESD with protective ESD pouches Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 139 Determining the printer version Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available To accurately perform removal and replacement procedures or determine the correct part for reordering you will need to know the version of the printer that is being serviced To identify the printer check the serial number located at the rear of the printer All printers will have US or JP in the first two positions of the serial number e g USBB123456 Newer versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 printers will have an H or higher letter in the third position e g USHB123456 If the letter in the third position in the serial number is B C D or F then you have an older version The HP Color Laserjet 4550 printer is equivalent to the newer version of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer unless otherwise specified Required tools The following tools are needed to service the printer Phillips 2 magnetized screwdriver 152 mm 6 inch shaft Small flat blade screwdriver Small needle nose pliers ESD strap e Penlight optional All components in the HP Color L
135. alettes PANTONE 249 pan assembly formatter 170 PANTONE colors 248 paper non supported 30 ordering 326 preprinted 33 recycled 33 selecting 28 Soft Gloss 326 specifications 241 supported sizes 29 paper feed PCB removing 183 paper feed rollers locating 84 replacing 94 paper feeder paper detection sensor PS3001 126 paper feeder paper size detection switches SW3001 3002 3003 126 paper feeder pick up solenoid SL3001 126 Paper Handling Menu 274 372 Index paper jams checklist 241 error messages 239 locations 238 log printing 292 recovery enabling 242 sensors 122 paper path duplex unit 128 jam checklist 241 operations 122 test 302 troubleshooting 237 paper pick rollers cleaning 78 removing 205 paper pick up assembly diagrams 345 paper size detection sensors 126 detection switches 123 127 313 Paper Handling Menu 274 paper size switch PCB removing 181 paper sizes supported 17 29 paper transport assembly removing 204 parallel cable connecting 59 pin configuration 60 specifications 58 troubleshooting 268 parallel connector 26 parallel port 58 parameters network 70 part numbers alphabetical list 355 consumables 325 numerical list 359 parts compact disc information 42 ordering 41 replacing 139 passwords setting 74 PCBs removing assembly diagrams 333 developing 159 formatter 169 paper feed 183 paper size switch 181 PCL support 17 perforations 30 Phillips screwdrivers 140 phone numbers Commercial
136. am e Paper This printer is suited for the use of recycled papers according to DIN 19 309 when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide For downloadable manuals go to http www hp com support I 4550 When you connect select Manuals The user guide is provided on CD ROM which allows the same high quality information to be provided without consuming the large quantities of energy and natural resources required to produce traditional paper manuals To ensure longevity of your HP LaserJet printer HP provides the following e Extended Warranty HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP hardware product and all HP supplied internal components The hardware maintenance covers a three year period from date of the HP product purchase HP SupportPack must be purchased by the customer within 90 days of the HP product purchase WWW Information on HP SupportPack is available on the Web at http www hp com under the HP Services and Support section International customers can contact the nearest HP authorized reseller about this service e Spare Parts and Consumables Availability Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be made available for at least five years after production has stopped C7085 90921 Chapter 1 Printer description 35 Regulatory statements HP Color LaserJet 4500 For the most current regulatory statements regarding the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series please
137. an occur 2 Reseat the connectors between the formatter due to a timing error or intermittent connection and DC controller controller making sure to perform the calibration and color plane alignment procedures 57 1 FAN FAILURE Description Action The printer detected that the fan an exhaust fan Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer located in the upper left rear corner of the printer Visually check to see if the fan is rotating if you refer to Figure 7 34 was not rotating This fan cannot see any rotation place your hand over operates off Tea OD and is enabled by the DC the outlet vents to see if exhaust air is moving controller PCB s microprocessor 2 Remove the printer s left side cover Check to see if anything is preventing the fan from rotating freely 3 Verify that the fan s connector is firmly seated into connector J208 of the developing PCB 4 Ifthe error persists replace the fan 57 2 FAN FAILURE Description Action The printer detected that the fan an exhaust fan Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer located d the upper right rear ST of the primer Visually check to see if the fan is rotating if you refer to Figure 7 34 was not rotating This fan cannot see any rotation place your hand over operates off L and is enabled by the DC the outlet vents to see if exhaust air is moving controller PCB s micro processor 2 Remove the printer s left side cover Check to see if anything is pre
138. and for damages for bodily injury or death to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective HP product TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE CUSTOMER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU 44 Service approach C7085 90921 C7085 90921 To ensure longevity of your HP LaserJet printer HP provides the following Onsite service agreements To provide you with the support level best suited to your system usage and support budget HP has onsite service agreements with three response times Priority Onsite Service is designed for production critical applications giving you four hour service response to your site for calls made during normal HP business hours Next Day Onsite Service provides onsite support by the next working day following your service request Extended coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP desi
139. area of the printer L1 Worn separation pads on the multipurpose tray can cause multifeeds Check the condition of the pickup rollers and customer replaceable feed roller Bent separation tabs can cause misfeeds and multifeeds Replace the tray if necessary LJ Defective paper tray switches can cause jams by communicating the wrong size paper to the formatter I Scraps of media left in the paper path can cause intermittent jams Always check that the paper path is clear when cleaning the printer and when clearing jams Also remove the fuser and carefully check it for jam debris L There are five areas in which jammed scraps can be difficult to find The ITB drawer connector on the engine side The OHT sensor under the registration plate The fuser remove the fuser to check it carefully The center of the web transport before the fuser e Inside the ITB Rotate the belt by rotating the two white knobs on either side of the ITB to clear jam debris Print media checklist Many print problems are caused by printing on media that does not meet specifications The HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide contains detailed information about media specifications see page 325 for ordering information Refer to the following list for common media related printing problems I Rough paper causes poor toner transfer and smeared print problems Check that the paper meets specifications for smoothness L The printer handles onl
140. aserJet 4500 printer and the HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer use Phillips head screws that require a 2 Phillips screwdriver Ensure that you have a Phillips screwdriver and not a Posidriv screwdriver Figure 6 1 below shows the difference between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver Note that the Phillips tip has more beveled surfaces Phillips Posidriv Figure 6 1 Phillips and Posidriv screwdriver comparison 140 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Types of screws Table 6 1 describes the screws used in the printer and provides guidelines to help determine where each type of screw is used The screws can vary in length depending on the thickness of the material being fastened Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one into its original location Table 6 1 Illustration Types of screws Description Screw machine w washer To hold plastic to metal example printer skins Screw self tapping To hold plastic to plastic example control panel Screw trus head To hold sheet metal to sheet metal example formatter pan Retaining ring e type To hold a bolt through a slot example toner catridge carousel Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 141 Consumable assemblies The user replaces consumable assemblies as part of periodic maintenance Chapter 4 explains the maintenance procedures Note The printer tracks the amount of use on some
141. ation 0 ccc ee eee eee eee rn 103 Figure 5 2 Image TOrmallOhi Lara dr da baad oe ea Renee d DE hee oe Re td 104 Figure 5 3 Primary charge i 3 ax dbase Me awe wd A da de ae Reh ead ate dae es e s 105 Figure 5 4 Laser exposure 11 24 a A AA ease Aad eee eed 106 Figure 5 5 Development 0 ccc ee hh hrs 106 Figure 5 5 Prmaty tFalisfel scr rada ea ea 9E hoa AA Ee utin Y do duce Se A a 107 Figure 5 7 Secondary transfer 108 Figure 5 6 SeDdrallOl siirdada i dota com did ded o Gene deat As 108 Figure 5 9 ITB residual toner cleaning llle 109 Figure 5 10 Waste toner to waste toner reservoir ee eee eens 109 FOS Ws EUSOE aua taa eed ati Sue eun cu pe d Bee abcde dU x Bae wa agent HB dre bas 110 Figure 5 12 Tener density SensOL s 235 adero ET P ESOde A die edu 111 Figure 5 13 Photosensitive drum cartridge n nannaa naaa 112 Foure 5 14 WASE OTIO awd ah eror de EVA ce eee dor poe Rd E E Ted Vd neh o Ur MS le ds eR ee 113 Figure 5 15 Transfer unit function 0 ee eee RR rn 113 Figure 5 16 Home position detection o oooooooo eaea a a a ag 114 Figure 5 17 ITB unit life detection lllllellee RII IR ees 115 Figure 5 18 Secondary transfer roller unit 2 116 Figure 5 19 ITB unit contact separation unit 0 0 2 rn 117 Figure 5 20 Toner carousel asselbly 49d yd ma A hm e ba do PI ced E EE rca 118 Figure 5 21 Toner carousel operation 0 cc eee eee ees 1
142. ation and configuration The following ports are available on the HP JetDirect print servers 1 LocalTalk DIN 8 port not available on the HP JetDirect J3113A print server 2 BNC port for ThinLAN coaxial cable not available on the HP JetDirect J3113A print server 3 RJ 45 port Note On the HP JetDirect J3113A print server you can attach either a ThinLAN cable or a 10Base T cable but not both at the same time See the instructions that follow to connect one or more network cables to the printer Connecting to a LocalTalk network J3111A only Plug the end of your DIN 8 cable into the LocalTalk port on the HP JetDirect print server Attach the other end to the network Note Network cables are not included with the printer They must be purchased separately C7085 90921 O Connecting to a 10Base2 network J3111A only 1 Attach one section of your ThinLAN cable to the BNC T connector 2 Attach another ThinLAN cable section 1 or a 50 ohm terminator 2 to the other side of the BNC T connector If you are attaching the printer to the end of your network you must connect a 50 ohm terminator Note The BNC T connector and 50 ohm terminator for the 10Base 2 connection are not included with the printer They must be purchased separately 3 Connect the BNC T connector to the BNC port on the HP JetDirect print server Note The HP JetDirect J3111A print server supports one Ethernet cable con
143. ayassen cooems O cOOEMS O LOOEMS O god 19p39 sodeg J N AYQ10d0 y Tr WAbet weooer se00er a A r T LO0 IS piouejos dn oid Japesy Jaded LOLr co bg e SN Peale Age peek anos HE A P 1 gh AUS EPab R Mo SE dde Lbepc 1 6 Iddo AS asisdoy SS ER IO bao 4 04 e3ZISdO E ON TPL MiS 5i AGL WLooer 3LOOEr Isr ceo N 73 Oo N 5 J pund O 500 sheet feeder wiring diagram Figure 7 41 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 321 C7085 90921 322 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Parts and diagrams Chapter contents Inge 222ecuatewreneae eget a e beter titi sd e o e ai a 324 Drdermd Palio eas Ru a chu borro nor ea sr ras cor dos 325 Consumables accessories and supplies llli 325 COMMON Tas lefiBE S 2424245548 dro adit aaa Sce ur UR OO ewes ded cde ees Hees 328 Illustrations and parts lists llli 329 Alphabetical parts list uir Rogeri ce e nara mena te ge tn hw ann dc UR c e 355 Numerical parts list 0 ne RR arn 359 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 323 Introduction The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts A table materials list follows each exploded assembly diagram Each table lists the reference designator item number the associated part number quantity and description of each part Note When looking for a part number pay careful
144. bin is open CANNOT DUPLEX CHECK REAR BIN alternates with CANNOT DUPLEX CHECK PAPER Description The printer cannot duplex because the rear output bin is open or the media is not supported by the duplex unit Action 1 Close the rear output bin door 2 Ifthe error message does not clear turn the printer off and then on Action 1 Close the rear output bin 2 If the error message does not clear turn the printer off and then on Verify that the media is supported by the duplex unit See Supported media weights and sizes in Chapter 1 CHECKING PRINTER Description The printer is performing an internal test This process should take approximately 30 seconds The message appears during the initiation of the engine test When finished the printer goes online CLEARING PAPER FROM PRINTER Description The printer has jammed or was turned on and media was detected in the paper path The printer is attempting to clear these pages Action When the test has finished press Go to return the printer to the REPE state Action No action required CLOSE FRONT DUPLEX DRAWER Description The duplex drawer is not completely closed Action Close the duplex drawer CLOSE MIDDLE FRONT DRAWER Description The drawer that holds the intermediate transfer belt is open This drawer is called the ITB drawer but is referred to as the middle front drawer for end users Switch SW1 refer to Figu
145. ble from the DC controller shown in callout 1 Figure 6 29 DAN Vel yn i VV NX S ABBA Formatter pan assembly removal and replacement 3 of 4 Although Figure 6 29 depicts the RFI shield still installed make sure this shield was removed at step 7 13 Remove the control panel cable from its cable stay if necessary 14 Remove the screws from the formatter pan assembly shown in Figure 6 29 and Figure 6 30 15 To remove the formatter pan lift it slightly while pulling it out so that it clears the tabs Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 171 NH Lo PRA BED A Bui A m m a im Tamra dim Woo F EN ee ee ee es ee es um ESO E ee ee ee ees mm F es as EENTO eo eae Figure 6 30 Formatter pan assembly removal and replacement 4 of 4 Reinstallation tip e Be sure the four tabs two on the top and one each on the rear and front of the formatter pan assembly are engaged prior to tightening the screws e Be sure to reconnect the ribbon cable from the DC controller shown in callout 1 Figure 6 29 172 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Note Figure 6 31 C7085 90921 Power supply To remove the power supply Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available the later version is equivalent to the HP Color LaserJet 4550 unless otherwise noted To identify which printer version you are servicing see page 140 1 Rem
146. bly by pulling the assembly straight out CAUTION Be sure to reconnect the sensor cables see Figure 6 40 callout 2 Carousel drive assembly replacement tip When replacing the carousel drive assembly be sure to align the D shaped shaft with the D shaped hub located on the gear shown in the center of Figure 6 41 Figure 6 41 Carousel drive assembly removal and replacement 2 of 2 180 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Paper size switch PCB To remove the paper size switch PCB Note Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer Pull Tray 2 out Remove the high voltage power supply Disconnect the connector as shown in callout 1 bb c N Remove the black screw from the paper size switch PCB shown in callout 2 Remove the switch PCB Figure 6 42 Paper size switch removal and replacement C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 181 Left side assemblies Drawer switch assembly To remove the drawer switch assembly 1 oa Ff C N Remove the top cover Remove the left side cover Disconnect the connector shown in callout 1 Remove the two screws from the drawer switch assembly shown in callout 2 Pull the drawer switch assembly away from the chassis Replacement tip Open both front drawers for easier installation Figure 6 43 Switch plate assembly removal and replacement 182 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Paper feed PCB To remove the paper feed PCB
147. canner PCB Remove the four long brass screws shown in callout 2 0 N O C Tilt the narrow end of the laser scanner assembly up pull it toward you and lift slightly to remove it f Figure 6 14 Laser scanner assembly removal and replacement Ia Ff AM Ex LP C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 157 DC controller To remove the DC controller Note Turnthe printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer Remove the top cover Remove the left side cover Remove the RFI shield Disconnect all connectors from the DC controller including the two ribbon cables Remove the five screws from the DC controller shown in Figure 6 15 oO oa Bb c N Lift the DC controller up and out to remove DC controller replacement tip The connectors are keyed and will fit in only one slot iad i a a ag E b Iu mu air htm G dv ete iem a ce oo E Figure 6 15 DC controller removal and replacement 158 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Developing PCB To remove the developing PCB Note X Turnthe printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the left side cover 3 Remove the RFI shield 4 Remove the plastic shield callout 1 Figure 6 16 by releasing the two tabs shown callout 2 Figure 6 16 If necessary insert a flatolade screwdriver between the shield and the frame to release the tab 5 Liftup
148. cartridge removal stop position flag Y cartridge development stop position flag and C cartridge removal stop position flag Toner carousel operation Toner cartridge contact separation function This function brings the developing sleeve closer to the photosensitive drum by pushing the toner cartridge push cam out so that the toner cartridge rotates up onto the cam The DC controller determines the time lapse of the developing stop position flag with the carousel position sensor PS10 to determine that the toner cartridge is in position The DC controller then activates the toner cartridge motor M5 and the motor begins to rotate clockwise This causes the toner cartridge push cam to rotate and push out The toner cartridge then rotates up onto the cam This positions the toner cartridge and the developer sleeve near the drum and puts the spacers in contact with the drum see Figure 5 22 The toner cartridge contact sensor PS11 detects when the toner cartridge is close to the drum see Figure 5 22 Once the toner cartridge is facing the drum the DC controller deactivates the carousel motor M3 which stops the rotation of the carousel At the same time the DC controller starts development by rotating the toner cartridge motor M5 counter clockwise to begin rotation of the developing sleeve Once development is complete M5 again rotates clockwise moving the toner cartridge away from the drum The toner cartridge co
149. d disable the 24 VDC supply when the drawers covers or doors are open The low voltage power supply circuit monitors the 5 V signal fed back from the connector PCB to ensure the 5 V power supply to the formatter Chapter 5 Theory of operation 135 Note Overcurrent overvoltage protection Each DC power supply circuit has an overcurrent protective function and overvoltage protective function This will prevent a power supply circuit failure by automatically interrupting the output voltage when anomalies such as a short circuit develop on the loads that result in overcurrent flow or abnormal voltage If this function is activated and no DC voltage is output from the low voltage power supply circuit turn OFF the power switch SW6 unplug the power cord resolve the anomaly on the load and then turn ON the power switch SW6 again Protective functions remain active for two minutes after activation Wait for at least two minutes to turn the power back on again High voltage power supply The printer contains two high voltage PCBs mounted in one assembly Together these PCBs generate the voltage supplied to the primary charging roller developing sleeve primary transfer roller secondary transfer roller ITB cleaning roller and upper fusing roller DC voltage or Superimposed AC voltage and DC voltage is applied to the primary charging roller developing sleeve and ITB cleaning roller Positive or negative DC voltage is applied to th
150. d of its life and the printer will not pelas Key points to remember e The drum life specification assumes two page jobs one sided printing on A 4 Letter size pages When printing in color four images per page the number of pages will be 1 4 of the images printed e Due to the carousel arrangement of the color cartridges color printing uses four images per page even if only one color is actually used 80 Printer maintenance C7085 90921 Drum life under different circumstances The following graph shows the approximate life of the imaging drum for different types and sizes of print jobs 40 gt 38 36 e 1 LLLLALGni i ldbCL LLLLO 34 ECT 32 gt 30 28 4 26 2 24 7 we Cf n 4 20 E 18 A 16 ras o 14 gt 12 10 2 8 AAA 6 4 2 0 1 2 5 10 15 20 2000 Pages job m A 4 simplex monochrome A 4 duplex monochrome EI A 4 simplex color un A4 duplex color Figure 4 1 Imaging drum life Note When printing black pages there is a wider range of variation in pages drum The drum life will be well below 25 000 images if only short monochrome jobs are printed C7085 90921 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 81 The following graph shows the drum life for printing in Letter and Legal formats Figure 4 2 OPC life 82 Printer maintenance Engine total page count 45000 40000 35000 30000 25000 20000 15000 10000
151. d sizes 29 carousel toner assembly diagrams 331 components 118 drive assembly removing 179 housing assembly removing 200 motor M3 118 133 operations 118 position sensor PS10 118 119 cartridge photosensitive drum 112 cassette feed solenoid SL2 123 188 cassette paper sensor PS8 123 CD service part information 42 Central Processing Unit CPU 68 Index 365 characters troubleshooting dropouts 257 voids 257 wavy 262 charge development 106 eliminator 108 laser exposure 106 primary 105 transfer 107 checklist pre troubleshooting 212 circuit assemblies 40 breaker diagram 317 capacity 22 cleaning printer and accessories 78 toner density sensor 85 waste toner operation 109 113 cleaning brush 85 cleaning roller clutch CL3 Operations 114 removing 189 cleaning roller operations 114 clearing error messages 217 282 event log 297 clothing toner on 37 clutches CL1 registration 123 CL2 ITB unit contact separation 114 116 190 CL3 ITB cleaning roller 114 189 CL4 secondary transfer roller 114 115 192 diagrams 309 311 314 removing 189 CMYK 248 coated media 30 collimator lens 120 color automatic adjustment 246 balance adjusting 250 calibration 54 Calibration Menu 281 CMYK 248 density test 243 halftone settings 245 HP ColorSmart Il 246 map settings 246 missing 260 page count tracking 296 PANTONE matching 248 PostScript 250 settings 244 246 software applications 249 SRGB 246 troub
152. detected by the registration paper sensor PS2 the duplex driver deactivates M3101 stopping the paper feed process The duplex driver then activates M3101 to resume feeding once it receives the refeed command Once the media is in position the duplex driver will deactivate M3101 and stop the duplex feed roller After the second side of paper is printed the paper is fed to the face down delivery bin Chapter 5 Theory of operation 131 DC controller subsystem The DC controller is responsible for coordinating the entire printing process The DC controller enables the drive circuitry for the laser beam and coordinates print data from the formatter with paper size laser beam motion the high voltage system fuser temperature and motors The DC controller also shares machine status information with the formatter so that proper diagnostic messages appear on the control panel An overview is shown in Figure 5 36 Laser scanner unit DC controller PCB SW1001 RAM ES 7 1 1a Test print switch vo Laser i i A BD PEE aoe PEE Gate array LS 11003 pa Ag IC 1004 m AS J amm wi Power 22d SW6 pubs High vc voltage power supply High Various sensors Various Pick up mot Fixing jt jp moter door switch loads icd Figure 5 36 132 Theory of operation D CPU c1001 hm ET Reset IC 1C 1002 as m S CPU een MO cn Connector
153. discussed in the image formation section only the drum memory and waste storage areas are covered here Photosensitive drum life Located inside the drum cartridge is an EEPROM that stores an identification code along with drum life and waste toner information A life threshold value is used as a comparison number to indicate when the drum has reached its end of life During printer operation the DC controller writes to the drum memory at specific times when power is deactivated when the drum drawer is opened or whenever 20 pages are printed Drum cartridge memory DC controller PCB Drum cartridge Drum cartridge memory data Photosensitive drum cartridge Two messages appear as the drum cartridge reaches its end of life The first is IPFE LOW which appears on the control panel when SOM 85 Aoi of the drum s life has xcd When the drum is 100 percent used the message ERUH LIFE CLIT appears and the printer stops printing A new drum cartridge must be installed at this time Waste toner Inside the drum cartridge are three waste toner reservoirs that store the residual toner left behind during image formation As discussed earlier in the image formation section the residual toner from the ITB is transferred to the drum A cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the drum s surface The waste toner is then carried by toner feed plates into the waste toner reservoirs for storage 112 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Was
154. drawer and remove any jammed media Check for media between the transfer roller and the fusing assembly alternates with CHECK FRONT DUPLEX DRAWER Description Action Media is jammed in the front duplexing area Open the duplex drawer and remove any jammed media 226 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages continued 13 0 Jams Description Action Media is jammed in the front part of the printer 1 l Vua Check to see if the white plastic tabs located immediately after it is picked up inside the front of the trays under the separation tabs have fallen off in Tray 2 or Tray 3 Note the position of the springs Make sure that the correct media is loaded properly in Tray 3 and that it is not overloaded Make sure that the two shipping locks have been removed from the back of Tray 3 Inspect the pick up rollers for Tray 2 the flat side of the D on the rollers should be parallel to the paper Make sure that the roller spring underneath the front of Tray 2 is secure 13 1 Jam OPEN MIDDLE FRONT DRAWER alternates with CHECK IN REAR OF DRAWER Description Action A jam has occurred inside the ITB drawer area The ITB drawer is also referred to as the middle front drawer for end users The jam might be located in the fuser area or between the transfer area andthe 2 Be sure to inspect the fusing area You might fuser need to access the fusing area through the
155. e HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer unless otherwise specified 1 Open the drum drawer top drawer and remove the imaging drum protecting it from light CAUTION Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 2 Remove the two screws in the newer version HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer and HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer callout 1 Figure 6 7 or four screws in the older version HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer callout 2 Figure 6 7 from the inside of the drawer cover 3 Reach beneath the drum drawer top drawer cover firmly grasping beneath the center of the cover Then pull down slightly on the cover rotating the bottom out toward you Lift the cover up to remove a Figure 6 7 Drum drawer top drawer cover removal and replacement C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 149 Drum drawer top drawer cover replacement tip When replacing the drum drawer top drawer cover carefully insert the black plastic tabs into the black plastic levers Figure 6 8 Note In newer version HP Color LaserJet 4500 and HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer insert the metal tabs located just inside the black plastic tabs shown in Figure 6 8 into the drum drawer top drawer cover before latching the cover onto the bottom of the drum drawer Figure 6 8 Drum drawer top drawer cover tabs and levers 150 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Figure 6 9 C7085 90921 ITB drawer middle drawer cove
156. e HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printer is equivalent to the newer version of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printer unless otherwise noted although it does have some different service parts from the 4500 series Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 329 A amp b A S ye SS EF gt AS S IS Q Assembly location diagram 1 of 2 Figure 8 1 Fuser assembly 1 Intermediate Transfer Belt assembly 2 3 Paper path and trans port 4 Feeder assembly 5 Transfer assembly C7085 90921 330 Parts and diagrams e AN yl t 1 h J PA MA eS MODAS E M y o fi Y 2 o S SS Ee l 4 a NAME CAD g Y o Ze e y Assembly location diagram 2 of 2 Figure 8 2 Cartridge carousel and housing assembly 1 2 Carousel drive assembly 3 Toner cartridge carousel assembly Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 331 C7085 90921 O Figure 8 3 PCB locations 332 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 Table 8 3 PCB assembly Description Developing PCB Parts for 4500 series s n xxG and below RG5 3811 000CN Parts for 4500 series s n xxH and above RG5 5180 000CN Parts for HP Color LaserJet 4550 RG5 5180 000CN DC controller PCB RG5 3809 000CN RG5 5254 000CN RG5 5254 000CN Interconnect PCB RG5 3808 000CN RG5 3808 000CN RG5 3808 000CN Paper size sensor PCB RG5 3816 000CN RG5 3816 000CN RG5 3
157. e HP Fast InfraRed Receiver User Guide that came with the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver 68 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 Printer drivers C7085 90921 The optimal way to control the printer is through settings in a software application or through the printer driver Changing print settings via a software application affects only that particular print job Most software applications allow you to choose print settings from menus within the application Software application settings and printer driver settings override the settings on the printer control panel For best print quality always select the paper or media type in the printer driver Different media types use different printer settings For example selecting transparencies in the driver causes the printer to use a different color table one designed for maximum print quality on transparencies Additionally transparencies cause the printer to adjust printer soeed and fuser temperature Other media types affect the printer settings as well Selecting heavy or glossy media for example causes the printer to change the engine speed The printer driver also gives you customized control of color text graphics and photos The following color control features are available only through your HP printer driver e Halftone Options e HP ColorSmart Il Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output You can select halftone settings for text graphics and
158. e RR ar Rod Ue dedo oen e De OR ade Rod ae do e a Ace ee o 217 Alphabetical printer error messages l l 217 Numerical printer error messages llle 226 Paper path troubleshooting lille n 237 ONIN gered enti a eee Aue ogee bs be tne wre Gre oe ee by eed gore es dere eee Bb oe ee are 237 et sezi oln cc to 920 E EU ede dg er tee 6 E E de pees eam eee ge 238 General paper path checklist 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee ees 241 Print media checklist 0c eee rr 241 J hilizes A TT 242 Image formation troubleshooting l l 243 Print density test and color checks llli llle 243 Understanding color variations 2l 244 Color selection process 2 ee eee eee eens 244 Customizing color output through printer drivers 0 0 0 0 ee ees 244 Adjusting color balance 2 0 0 ce eee eee eens 250 image e e AAA AN 253 Overhead transparency defects o ooocoooooo ee eee eee ee eens 263 Repetitive defects troubleshooting 0 ccc ee eee eee 265 Interface troubleshooting annann aana 268 Communications CheckS 1 0 rs 268 EIO ThOUDIESHOOMNG cis dem T 268 AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations 0 0c ees 269 Printer Job Language PJL commands 0 eee 269 Control panel troubleshooting 0 0 ee eee eee ees 271 Control panel ACCESS o erca diana aser eR deed Gon a ia a
159. e adhesives that can withstand the heat and pressures of the printer s fusing process e Envelopes should be loaded with the flaps facing away from the printer and toward the left side of the printer To prevent severe printer damage do not use envelopes that have windows clasps snaps or synthetic materials Labels To print labels Hewlett Packard recommends configuring Tray 1 as a cassette and setting the tray s media type to LABELS in the printer control panel When printing labels use the following guidelines e Verify that the label s adhesive material can tolerate temperatures of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Verify that adhesive material is not exposed between the labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause printer jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to printer components e Do not re feed a sheet of labels e Verify that labels lie flat e Do not use labels that are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged 32 Printer description C7085 90921 Preprinted forms and letterhead Observe the following guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead e Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat resistant inks that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer s fusing temperature of approximately 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Inks must be non flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers
160. e assembly To remove the carousel drive assembly Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer 4 2 3 4 Remove the formatter pan assembly Remove the rear door Remove the large fan housing and the fan Remove the toner level sensing assembly from the HP Color LaserJet 4550 see Figure 6 39 e vet 001250 Toner level sensor assembly removal and replacement 5 Free the cables from the rear cable trough located beneath the large fan housing shown in callout 1 6 Disconnect the two motor cables from their connectors J203 and J205 located on the developing PCB and remove them from their trough Disconnect the sensor as shown in callout 2 Disconnect the two high voltage red cables from the HVPS and free the front cable from the cable stays 9 Push up and out on the cable trough shown in callout 3 to release the lower tabs Then tilt the bottom of the cable trough out slightly to gain access to the top screws on the carousel drive assembly To remove the cable trough you might need to first loosen the screw on top of the developing PCB housing Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 179 y o 37 vt i LA A 1 y A j AR N uc A Mere A y Y Pa x ee a A 4 uua lm 2 Figure 6 40 Carousel drive assembly removal and replacement 1 of 2 10 Remove the four screws shown in Figure 6 41 from the carousel drive assembly 11 Carefully remove the carousel drive assem
161. e by the focusing lens At the beginning of the scan line the beam first strikes the beam detect BD mirror and then the BD PCB After the initial strike the beam strikes the drum surface With the drum rotating at a constant speed the laser beam successively scans across the drum s surface exposing the image 120 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Laser driver Collimator lens PCB Cylindrical lens BD PCB Scanner motor Focusing lens BD mirror Reflective mirror Photosensitive drum Figure 5 24 Laser scanner operation C7085 90921 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 121 Paper path Introduction For cassette feeding a sheet of paper is picked up by the cassette pick up roller and is then fed by the feed rollers For manual feeding a sheet of paper is picked up by the multi purpose tray pick up roller and is then fed by the feed rollers The pick up motor M2 provides the drive for the front of the paper path Once paper is fed into the general paper path the paper passes through the registration rollers The paper is temporarily stopped so that the paper s leading edge will match the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum The paper then passes between the secondary transfer roller and the ITB The paper continues past the web transport and past the upper and lower fusing rollers to either the face up tray or the face down tray The paper path is shown in Figure 5 25
162. e defects see page 265 Background scatter e The media does not meet HP specifications e The toner cartridge is defective e There is excess toner inside the printer Clean the printer e The transfer roller is dirty or worn Generate a cleaning page Banding and horizontal lines Banding occurs when solid fill areas show streaks or bands of shade variations This can be caused by e Worn damaged or contaminated gears e Consumables that are beyond their rated life e Improper consumable storage If the problem persists e Print a configuration page to check the life of the consumables Replace any consumable that is past its rated life e Banding is more visible in some halftone patterns than others Print a page using a halftone pattern such as banddiag provided in the Color Smart selection in the printer driver If the defect occurs only once on a letter size sheet try printing the pattern on a legal size sheet e Observe the following from the test sample e Check the spacing or pitch between the defects e Check to see if the defect spans all color planes e f the defect is in all color planes does the defect produce a straight line through all color planes or does it move from one color plane to the next e lf the defect moves from one color plane to the next measure the amount it moves This movement amount is called the procession Keep in mind the print order is K M C Y Measure the procession from K
163. e developers toner cartridges from the carousel and store them in a safe place Remove the top cover see Top cover on page 144 Remove the left side cover see Left side cover on page 145 Remove the right side cover see Right side cover on page 146 Remove the rear door see Rear door on page 147 Remove the control panel and front right cover see Control panel on page 153 and Front right cover on page 155 Remove the rear cover see Right rear cover on page 148 Remove the RFI shield see Radio Frequency Interference RFI shield on page 156 10 Remove the formatter assembly see figure 6 63 oye ART IA A AFL de aho Ot SOBRACE AONO CONTACT As TRT TOPE ELE eem i Figure 6 63 Cartridge carousel iraiscemente formatter pan assembly 1 of 6 11 12 13 14 15 Remove the low voltage power supply see Power supply on page 173 Remove the high voltage power supply see High voltage power supply on page 174 Remove the continuous toner level sensor assembly see figure 6 64 Remove the developer PCB assembly see To remove the developing PCB on page 159 and then remove the developer PCB mounting plate by removing the four screws of the plate underneath the developer PCB assembly and lifting the plate out Remove the large fan housing and the large fan see Large fan housing on page 178 200 Removal and re
164. e message back and forth Entering diagnostics mode 1 To open diagnostics mode hold down the left side of the ITem key and turn on the printer Formatter diagnostics Formatter diagnostics are designed to be used by qualified service personnel to thoroughly test the functionality of the formatter If all the tests pass the formatter is working correctly and it can be assumed that the problem resides elsewhere Listed below are descriptions of the formatter tests available Table 7 27 Formatter diagnostics If set to vis the tests will run continuously until mune In the 4550 series only CANCEL JOB will abort the test TU d will occur for each setting BR HIE the test will stop when a failure occurs Hst the test will stop for a short period of time then resume e with the remaining tests L LHT the tests will continue even when a failure occurs 4500 series only Tests the firmware ROM for correct functionality Tests the on board RAM and the DIMMs Tests the SRAM inside the ASIC Tests the SRAM physically mounted on the formatter 300 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Table 7 27 Formatter diagnostics CAUTION Do not interrupt the NVRAM test Doing so will cause the printer to lose all NVRAM values In almost all cases this test should not be run Tests the formatter NVRAM This test takes 15 18 minutes to run and should only be used when NVRAM values are being lost In the 4550 ser
165. e primary transfer roller and secondary transfer roller Negative DC voltage is applied to the upper fusing roller 136 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Removal and replacement Chapter contents Igilfero lei Neda net Sees aed ap arash dis oe wince tk Oe serge near oye ee ara ee 139 Removal and replacement strategy 0 0c eee eee 139 sao ne a oad dhe a Uke spe ee ee a eae eS ee eh ee a te S 139 Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD 0 ce ees 139 FS pre o acy e aaa ar ese oo 140 Types Of SCIOWS eiii ina Rx oae Oe ad See ee de cl cone cr d ee 141 Consumable assemblieS 0 0 ee rss 142 Covers drawers and top and front assemblies 0 0 000 cee ee ees 144 HOD COVCE ya oca bon usaras eee ia a Rue he ed ru eu dd 13 3 5 90 3759 9 9 ee 144 Left side COver Lc 145 PIGHESIOe COVED suo cease sce cee te eee hee oe eee ae ee oe ee a eee bea oe al 146 Rear door 1 ee ee eee hh hrs 147 FIOM Teal COVED aas rx 99 9r eae edad Por hee ped d Be d eq Fruor ee ee ae Va 148 Drum drawer top drawer COVEr 1 ee ee ee eee ees 149 ITB drawer middle drawer Cover 1 0 0 eee n 151 Control panel 153 FONT NOM COVE aq 1 4 24 9 a x25 32 13a ea A 99 5 ede a 155 ITB drawer middle drawer 0 0 00 ccc ee n 152 Radio Frequency Interference RFI shield llle 156 Laser scanner assembly 157 DOCO o cacon recon eros bees aa 158 Developing POB 159 Top cover switch assembly
166. e than the other ovals the black density does not need to be adjusted and you should continue with the next step If not use the following steps to adjust the density 1 Press ITEM until BLACK PEHSITY appears 2 Press the right side of the VALUE key to increase the value or press the left side to decrease it until the number corresponding to the oval that most closely matches the background pattern appears Step 6 Reprint the color balance calibration page See step 1 Step 7 Adjust the gray balance Adjusting densities using the gray balance pattern allows you to fine tune color balance This process affects all four color bars Examine the gray balance circles in the box at the bottom of the color balance calibration page If the circle in the center most closely matches the background pattern then the gray balance does not need to be adjusted If the circle does not match use the following steps to adjust gray balance 1 Locate the gray circle that most closely matches the background The magenta M and yellow Y numbers associated with this circle indicate the optimum gray balance settings for these colors 2 Adjust the magenta and yellow settings yellow is horizontal and magenta is vertical until the gray circle is in the middle Use the values from the bars above to select the value to be entered 3 After making adjustments to the magenta and yellow settings press Go to return the printer to the READ state
167. e top cover removed unless the carousel brake has been released or removed 3 Verify the carousel drive motor wiring harness is firmly seated into connector J203 of the developing PCB see Figure 7 38 Verify PS10 refer to Figure 7 31 is working correctly and not excessively dirty clean if necessary and that the wiring harness is firmly seated into both the sensor assembly and connector J206 of the developing PCB 5 Verify PS11 is connected and functioning properly 6 Verify all connectors to the developing PCB and the DC controller PCB are firmly seated 7 Verify that the rotary drive assembly is working Replace it on older units with more than 50K of life Note The following URL provides help with cartridge installation and removal http www hp com go ljsupplies Action 1 Verify the densitometer is clean perform the toner density sensor cleaning procedure in Chapter 7 of the online user guide Inspect the density sensor wiring harness for damage The harness runs from the density sensor through the left side upper control arm of the imaging drum drawer to J1010 of the DC controller PCB Verify that the cable is firmly seated into the J1010 of the DC controller PCB If the error persists replace the density sensor assembly 54 4 PRINTER ERROR Description Optional equipment is not recognized Action Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 54 5 PRINTER ERROR Descriptio
168. e transfer belt surface The laser scanner is defective The high voltage power supply is defective Light black or no black print o No e image e available C7085 90921 The black toner cartidge is empty Replace it The HVPS might be faulty The connections into CL2 and CL3 have been switched at the clutches not on the PCB Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 259 No image available No image available No image available No image available CAUTION 260 Troubleshooting Loose toner e Loose toner is in the printer The toner cartridge is defective The paper is too smooth The driver setting for the paper type is wrong The fuser is defective Mottled or marbled output Print a configuration page and refer to the color blocks at the bottom of the page Replace the toner cartridge of the color or colors that are marbled Determine which toner color needs to be replaced by looking at the secondary colors on the self test page e f red and green are mottled replace yellow e f red and blue are mottled replace magenta f green and blue are mottled replace cyan Random spots e The paper does not meet HP paper specifications You are printing on the wrong side of the paper The printer requires cleaning with a cleaning page The toner cartridge is damaged The imaging drum is damaged Sharkskin rough mottled printing eo Use paper with lower resistivity e Make sure the humidity and te
169. ed in Chapter 1 of this manual Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight Does the customer use only supported media Is the media in good condition no curls folds etc Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits Media checks Is the specified volume or less loaded into the media source Is the printer set to the correct media source Media source Toner cartridge Are the color toner cartridges for each color correctly installed Drum cartridge Is the drum cartridge seated in the printer properly Are the ITB and fusing units seated properly ITB and fusing Doors and drawers Are the toner cartridge door duplexer drum drawer and ITB drawer closed Does condensation occur following a temperature change particularly in winter following cold storage If so wipe affected parts dry or leave the printer on for 10 to 20 minutes Condensation Miscellaneous Check for and remove any non HP components toner memory modules and EIO cards from the printer If hardware or software configuration has not changed or the problem is not associated with any specific software contact the Customer Care Center see Chapter 1 Remove the printer from the network and ensure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting Remove the printer from t
170. eee ee ee eens 355 NUMCHCAIDANSUSh aros rra Gerd ri benre nur 772 0720 77217 11017 7011 11277 0 TT 359 vi List of Figures Figure 1 1 HP Color LaserJet 4500 family printers 0 0 0 ee eens 14 Figure 1 2 HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printers ccc eee eens 15 Figure 1 3 Model and Serial number information ccc eee eee ees 18 Figure 1 4 Sample label 24 6 2 9 3 p uchub euro t om et dn boy e A Al a E ds 19 Figure 1 5 Space requirements 21 Figure 1 6 Front view HP Color LaserJet 4500 and HP Color LaserJet 4550 shown with 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex unit o ooooooonoonne nee 25 Figure 1 7 Rear view HP Color LaserJet 4500 shown with 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex unit 26 Figure 1 8 Rear view HP Color LaserJet 4550 shown with 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex unit 27 Fotre 3t FaAcKage GOMEMS sar a AA A AE 48 Figure 3 2 Parallel cable with a C connector o oooooooo eee eee eee eens 58 Figure 4 TInmaging arirti fe ea A a A hee ei Re ae dde aol A 81 Figure 4 2 OPCIE ceras pidio A ini la edi 82 Figure 4 3 Location OL consumables sip iia aa ida daa 84 Figure 4 4 Removing the formatter board oooooooooo ee eee eens 98 Figure 4 5 Do not remove the DIMM in slot 4 llli 99 Figure 4 6 Do not remove the DIMM in slot 3 2 1 0 2 eens 99 Figure 4 7 EDO and SDRAM memory modules 0 00 cece eee eee eee 99 Figure 5 1 Basic system oper
171. eee rns 36 HP Color LaserJet 4500 1 ee eee eee eens 36 HP Color LaserJet 4590 s lt 4 sss ak peeebade risa Pelee be EE oO RE ER ee 36 Safety information 0 0 ee has 37 Laser safety statement 0 0 0 eee eee ee hr 37 Material Safety Data Sheet 0 0 eee eee teens 37 TONE A e C 37 Laser statement for Finland 0 0 ccc ee eee eee eens 38 C7085 90921 Chapter 1 Printer description 13 Printer features The HP LaserJet 4500 printer family pictured in Figure 1 1 has three models e The HP LaserJet 4500 printer is the base model it contains 32 MB of RAM e The HP LaserJet 4500 N printer is the base model with an HP JetDirect 600N print server network card and 64 MB of RAM e The HP LaserJet 4500 DN printer is the base model with an HP JetDirect 600N print server network card a 500 sheet paper feeder a duplex unit and 64 MB of RAM Figure 1 1 HP Color LaserJet 4500 family printers 1 HP Color LaserJet 4500 and 4500 N printers 2 HP Color LaserJet 4500 DN printer The HP LaserJet 4550 printer family pictured in Figure 1 2 has four models e The HP LaserJet 4550 printer is the base model it includes 64 MB of RAM e The HP LaserJet 4550N printer is the base model with an HP JetDirect 610N print server network card and 64 MB of RAM e The HP LaserJet 4550N printer is the base model with an HP JetDirect 610N print server
172. er 120 g m Limit of 200 sheets glossy 32 1b 80 Ib text C7085 90921 Chapter 1 Printer description 29 Table 1 8 Tray Supported media specifications continued Media specifications Capacity Supported media Tray 3 optional 500 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper Single Sided 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28 Ib bond Paper A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 Custom B5 ISO Two Sided 64 105 g m 17 28 Ib bond 0 13 mm 5 mil 120 g m 32 Ib 80 Ib text Transparencies Glossy Paper Limit of 50 transparencies Limit of 500 sheets glossy Duplex printing accessory optional 64 to 105 g m 17 to 28 Ib bond Paper A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 Trays 2 and 3 do not support the range of custom sizes available in Tray 1 Trays 2 and 3 use custom size specifically for B5 ISO Note Use only HP supported transparencies HP part number C2934A Letter size C2936A A4 size Non supported media Use the following guidelines to avoid poor print quality or damage to your printer 30 Printer description Do not use paper that is too rough Do not use paper that is embossed or coated unless it is specifically recommended for use in this printer Do not use paper with cutouts or perforations other than standard three hole punched paper Do not use multipart forms Do not use paper with irregularities such as tabs or staples Do not use letterhead pa
173. er belt ITB cleaning roller o Figure 5 9 ITB residual toner cleaning Waste toner transfer plate Cleaning blade Waste toner Waste toner reservoir Figure 5 10 Waste toner to waste toner reservoir C7085 90921 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 109 Fusing The final step in the image formation process is the fusing of the toner to the media The heat and pressure provided by the fusing assembly serve two purposes to permanently fuse the toner to the media and to melt the toner together to produce the full color image on the page This process uses upper and lower rollers made of Teflon tubing to reduce sticking Both rollers are heated by Halogen heaters which cause the four colors to fuse and mix on the paper creating the permanent image Halogen heater Upper roller Lower roller Figure 5 11 Fuser 110 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Toner density Figure 5 12 C7085 90921 Maximum toner density is monitored and corrected if it is outside parameters to prevent variations in the toner density Toner density can vary as a result of environmental conditions a deteriorated photosensitive drum or the amount of toner used A pattern of toner patches with varying densities is laid on the photosensitive drum The DC controller detects the density of these patches and determines the optimum developing bias for each color The DC controller uses the density sensor PS14 located in the dru
174. er roller 115 sensor diagrams 311 transfer operations 107 unit contact separation clutch CL2 114 116 190 unit life sensor PS1 114 waste toner cleaning 109 J jam sensors 122 237 jams checklist 241 error messages 239 locations 238 log printing 292 recovery enabling 242 sensors 122 237 JetAdmin software 67 70 JetDirect print servers connecting 10 100Base TX 66 connecting 10Base2 65 connecting 10Base T 66 installing 67 ports 64 supported configurations 71 jobs print monochrome affect on drum life 81 settings 278 short 80 K kits ordering 325 replacement intervals 142 replacing 89 92 status report printing 290 L labels printing 32 supported sizes 29 languages changing control panel overlay 154 display 61 embedded Web server 286 localized DIMMs 325 printer job PJL 269 printer language support 17 universal exit UEL 269 laptop computers 68 370 Index large fan housing removing 178 large right side fan removing 195 laser image exposure 106 operations 120 laser safety statements Finland 38 United States 37 laser scanner assembly removing 157 LaserJet 4500 family printer models 14 LaserJet Family Print Media Guide 28 LaserJet Soft Gloss Paper 326 LaserJet Transparencies ordering 326 LaserJet Utility for Macintosh 70 last paper detection roller 125 last paper sensor PS3 124 125 312 leading edge detecting 114 LEDs 111 left side assemblies removing 182 left side cover removing 145
175. erception of color Fluorescent light lacks many colors present in incandescent light and the color range of natural light is broader than any artificial light When comparing color choose a standard light source for reference and understand that the perceived color will change as the light changes e Long term color variations occur as paper ages Use high quality paper and protect the paper from sunlight to help minimize discoloration e Environmental changes can cause color variation The development process places a high potential across an air gap to attract toner to the imaging drum Changes in relative humidity vary the point at which the toner travels to the imaging drum e All consumable components have a finite life span As these components reach the end of their useful life their ability to produce consistent print quality diminishes e Paper roughness can cause colors to look different Use standard paper Color selection process The user selects the color in the application but the operating system might convert or modify some characteristics of the color before sending the information to the printer driver The printer driver might also modify color characteristics depending upon the selected output mode Any color characteristics not addressed by the printer driver or applications are set to the printer default The default color might not match the color the user selected Customizing color output through printer drivers
176. es after removing them 3 Position the toner cartridge over the cartridge slot so that the blue arrow on the toner cartridge points to the blue arrow on the printer The arrow on the right control panel side of the printer should point straight down C7085 90921 C7085 90921 4 Make sure that the tab on the other end of the toner cartridge aligns with the notch on the cartridge slot Note If the tab does not fit in the notch when you insert the toner cartridge the toner is the wrong color for that cartridge slot Slide the toner cartridge down into the slot until the cartridge stops Rotate the toner cartridge toward the back of the printer within the cartridge slot until the cartridge stops The cartridge shutter opens to reveal the developer sleeve 7 Lower the toner access cover and close the printer s top cover Note You must close the top cover before installing another toner cartridge CAUTION If you need to ship the printer remove the toner cartridges and imaging drum before shipping Note If you receive a 54 2 error see page 233 for more information Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 87 Replacing the imaging drum Replace the imaging drum when the printer control panel displays 1 Open the drum drawer and remove the used imaging drum 2 Locate the new imaging drum Align it over the drawer so that the arrow on top points to the rear of the printer and the blue end cap on the side fits into the slo
177. es the job from the printer s hard disk 284 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Troubleshooting tools Note C7085 90921 Embedded Web server The embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network status and to manage printing functions from your PC instead of from the printer control panel This service is designed for offices using an IP network and a standard Web browser Below are examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server view printer control panel messages determine the remaining life on all consumables order consumables view and change tray configurations view and change the printer control panel menu configuration view and print internal pages receive notification of printer events view and change network configuration To use the embedded Web server you must have an IP based network and a Web browser The embedded Web server can be used with Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 or above and with Netscape Navigator 4 and above IPX based printer connections are not supported by the embedded Web server To use the embedded Web server 1 Open your Web browser 2 Type the IP address assigned to the printer into the Address or Location field The IP address for the printer is listed on the printer configuration page For more information about printing a Configuration Page see Printer configuration page page 287 Embedded Web server page sets The embedded Web server has three sets of internal
178. escription C7085 90921 Supported media weights and sizes Table 1 8 shows the media types and sizes supported by the printer and the printer accessories Table 1 8 Supported media specifications Tray Supported media Media specifications Capacity Tray 1 Paper Single sided 150 sheets of 75 g m A4 Letter 20 Ib paper Legal If less than or equal Executive to 148 mm width JIS B5 60 to 176 g m A5 16 to 47 lb Do not load more than the Custom maximum stack height of Minimum size If more than or equal 15 mm 0 6 in 76 by 127 mm 3 by 5 in to 148 mm width Maximum size 60 to 135 g m 216 by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 in 16 to 36 Ib bond Two sided 64 to 105 g m 17 to 28 Ib bond Transparencies 0 13 mm 5 mil Limit of 50 A4 Letter 120 g m Limit of 50 sheets Glossy Paper 32 Ib 80 Ib text Envelopes Maximum weight Limit of 10 Tray 1 only 90 g m 24 Ib Com10 bond Monarch C5 DL B5 JIS Labels Limit of 50 Tray 1 only Cardstock postcards Tray 1 only Maximum weight 176 g m 47 Ib bond Maximum size 200 mm by 148 mm 7 87 in by 5 82 in Do not load more than the maximum stack height of 15 mm 0 6 in Tray 2 Paper Single Sided 250 sheets of 75 g m A4 Letter 60 to 105 g m 20 Ib paper Legal 16 to 28 Ib bond Executive JIS B5 Two Sided A5 64 105 g m 17 Custom B5 ISO 28 lb bond Transparencies 0 13 mm 5 mil Limit of 50 transparencies Glossy Pap
179. eseat the firmware DIMM Run formatter diagnostics Replace the firmware DIMM Replace the formatter 80 SERVICE XXXX EIO ERROR Description A critical EIO failure has occurred X indicates the slot number of the device XXXX indicates the error type 236 Troubleshooting Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Reseat the EIO card 3 Replace the ElO card C7085 90921 Paper path troubleshooting Jams Jam error messages appear if paper fails to arrive at or clear the paper path sensors in the allowed time Dedicated paper sensors PS2 PS7 PS3101 PS3103 and PS3104 detect whether paper is present in the sensor and if the paper is fed normally see Figure 7 3 When the control board detects a jam it immediately stops the printing process and displays the appropriate jam message for the sensor that detects the jam Figure 7 3 Jam sensors shown with the optional 500 sheet paper feeder and duplex unit installed Registration paper sensor PS2 Duplex paper pick sensor PS3104 Duplex pick up sensor PS3103 Reversed paper sensor PS3101 Delivery paper sensor PS7 O Ff ON e C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 237 Jam locations Use Figure 7 4 to troubleshoot jams in the printer For instructions on clearing jams see the sections later in this chapter 8 1 7 2 3 6 4 Figure 7 4 Jam locations shown with the optional 500 sheet
180. essage PJL XXXX lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CR gt lt LF gt 270 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Control panel troubleshooting Figure 7 11 C7085 90921 Control panel access Accessing the diagnostics for the control panel is a simple no noe BOW te left side of the Irem key lt and turn on the printer Hold the key down until E o cone on Te Hon pana ang then release the key The front panel will hange ane display Fi TER AECUTE TESTS Press the Menu key to switch between the formatter R aid the engine oeste vies IrEM to scroll through the diagnostics available in each section A menu map helps you use the control panel menus See the menu map sample that follows Printing a menu map Printing a menu map can help you navigate through control panel menus Printing a menu map 1 n we aa Cono panel press MENU until HEDEG ii appears 3 Press SELECT to print the menu map The printer will return to the REPE state Interpreting the menu map The following sample illustrates the printers menu map CA oaa Plor lasere 80 Y RESET MEMORY RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS 4500 series menu map Information Menu Paper Handling Menu Configuration Menu Printing Menu I O Menu Calibration Menu Oo OG FBP CQ N Resets Menu Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 271 Figure 7 12 Note Cr eng m PEA R FRIHTING MENU T FEL Le TRA 4 eee I Se NETTO E TRA 4 HE I L ETT EF TRA TTEE Z PLA
181. f you install more than 192 MB of RAM it will not be used by the printer HP Color LaserJet 4550 series 5 GB hard disk drive Included wit the HP Color LaserJet 4550HDN printer CAUTION The HP Color LaserJet 4500 series uses 100 pin non parity SDRAM DIMMs The HP Color LaserJet 4550 series uses 168 pin non parity synchronous DRAM DIMMs Extended Data Output EDO DIMMs are not supported C7085 90921 Table 1 1 Feature Paper handling input tray capacity Paper handling output face down correct order output Printer language support Paper sizes supported Print soeed monochrome printing Print speed color printing Standard interfaces C7085 90921 Printer features continued Description The capacities will vary depending on the media being used for example transparencies labels heavy media and envelopes Quantities based on 75 g m 20 Ib media for both the HP Color LaserJet 4500 and 4550 printers Tray 1 150 sheet multipurpose tray Tray 2 250 sheet standard cassette Tray 3 Optional 500 sheet paper feeder included with the HP Color LaserJet 4500DN 4550DN and HDN models Top output bin holds up to 250 sheets of standard paper Rear output bin holds up to 100 sheets of standard paper The output of the rear output bin is in reverse order facing up HP Color LaserJet 4500 series HP PCL5c PostScript Emulation Automatic language switching HP Color LaserJet 4550
182. fects HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free If HP is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if installed by HP If customer schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by HP c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of 300 000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the subject of the claim
183. fer roller see Figure 5 2 A detailed description of the imaging units follows the image formation process Laser beam Electro Developing M item formation Toner X Sa Fe e cartridge VN PV ISS TN y Secondary transfer roller pue cleaning roller Transfer Figure 5 2 Image formation 104 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Primary charge The primary charge roller applies a negative DC bias to the drum To maintain a consistent charge across the drum s surface an AC bias is also applied The charge voltage on the drum surface ranges from approximately 700 V to 500 V With the large negative charge on the drum surface an equal positive charge forms below the photoconductive material Primary charging roller DC bias Figure 5 3 Primary charge C7085 90921 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 105 Laser exposure Photoconductive material in the absence of light allows the negative charge the charging roller placed on the imaging drum s surface to remain in place Areas of the photoconductor that are exposed to the laser become conductive and discharge the negative charge on the surface to the metal cylinder of the drum These discharged areas are what form the electrostatic image Laser beam Unexposed area Exposed area Figure 5 4 Laser exposure Development With the toner cartridge in position a negative charge is applied to the toner particles As the developer sleeve and drum rotate past o
184. fix Characters or control codes other than PJL such as CR or lt LF gt enable the default language and process the print job in that language All jobs must begin and end with the UEL command Besides entering PJL the UEL command has the same effect as the lt esc gt E command However the lt esc gt E command should always be included to ensure backward compatibility PJL COMMENT This command designates the current line as a comment which is ignored The syntax is PJL COMMENT words lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL INFO CONFIG This command solicits a response to describe the installed options and allows the printer to automatically configure the installed options as the applications require Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 269 DPJL INFO ID This command identifies the printer type to the host for reference when selecting printer drivers for automatic installation The command syntax is PJL INFO ID CR lt LF gt PJL INFO USTATUS This command queries the state of unsolicited JOB status PAGE and TIMED status are not supported The syntax is PJL INFO USTATUS CR lt LF gt PJL INFO PAGECOUNT This command returns the number of pages printed by the engine PJL JOB This command informs the printer of the start of a PJL job and synchronizes the job status information The printer counts print jobs including nested jobs incrementing the job counter for the PJL JOB command and decrementing it for PJL E
185. for circumferential scars on the photosensitive drum If scars are present replace the drum cartridge if the line goes through all colors Check for circumferential scars on the upper fusing roller If scars are present replace the upper fusing roller if the line goes through all colors Remove the imaging drum and inspect main charger or imaging drum for a contaminant such as a fiber if the line goes through all colors Do not expose the imaging drum to light for more than 15 seconds The drum is light sensitive and exposure to light can cause permanent damage Vertical black lines The toner cartridge is defective The toner cartridge is not seated properly The fuser entrance is dirty The fuser has scratches on it This might be a repetitive defect If so the lines will repeat at a consistent interval down the page The printer needs to be cleaned There is a problem in the heating element Vertical white lines If white lines or streaks appear only in the black areas of the printed media print several configuration pages to clear the anomaly If this does not clear the problem check the sleeve surface to confirm the defect then replace the black toner cartridge If white lines appear only in a particular color try printing several configuration pages to clear the error If the error does not clear check the sleeve surface to confirm the defect then replace the defective toner cartridge There is a lack of toner or t
186. g The two thermo switches are wired in series with the bulbs and thermo switches are fusing bulbs and open if the temperature exceeds good you should observe light 240 C 464 F from the lower fusing bulb as the l printer warms up X Description 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer If 1 Low temperature error the error persists try re installing the fusing 2 Fuser warm up service assembly If the error continues to persist 3 High fuser temperature proceed to step 2 4 Faulty fuser Turn the power off and remove the fusing 5 Fuser voltage mismatch verify that you have assembly Measure the resistance between pin 3 and pin 4 The resistance should be between 6 2 ohms If there is no continuity between pins it can be assumed that either a heating bulb and or a thermo switch is open Replace the fusing assembly If resistance limits are acceptable proceed to step 3 NOT installed a 110V fuser in a 220V printer or vice versa Fuser heater cutoff 7 Fuser motor malfunction see recommended action for 50 7 Fuser error O Continued on next page Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 231 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages continued 50 7 FUSER ERROR Description The fusing motor M1 drives the fusing assembly the paper transport web assembly ITB lift mechanism transfer roller transfer roller lift mechanism and the face down output delivery drive 2 assembly A 50 7 fuser
187. g clips on the drawer guide rails Then lift the tab and pull the drawer out slightly to clear the latch that holds the plastic retaining clips in place see Figure 6 22 and Figure 6 23 12 Pull the drum drawer top drawer straight out and away from the printer Reinstallation tip When replacing the drum drawer top drawer assembly make sure the cable is lying flat in the cable guide 164 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Figure 6 22 Drum drawer top drawer assembly removal and replacement 2 of 3 The following graphic shows an alternative method of removing the left side of the drum drawer Figure 6 23 Drum drawer assembly removal and replacement 3 of 3 C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 165 Densitometer assembly To remove the densitometer Note Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer 1 Open the drum drawer top drawer until it stops and remove the imaging drum protecting it from light CAUTION Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 2 Remove the two screws on the densitometer as shown in callout 1 Figure 6 24 and move the assembly slightly to the rear 3 Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab shown in callout 2 Figure 6 24 and remove the metal shield over the densitometer Figure 6 24 Densitometer removal and replacement 1 of 2 4 Remove the plastic cable cover as shown in Figure 6 25 Remove the
188. g it PERSONALITY AUTO The personality language the printer uses to process a d print job Denotes default setting C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 277 Printing Menu The Printing Menu is used to set default settings for a specific print job Table 7 17 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Printing Menu E COPIES 1 to 999 default 1 Number of copies ORIENTATION PORTRAIT Determines the default LANDSCAPE page orientation FORM LENGTH 5 to 128 lines Maximum lines on a page default 60 before a formfeed occurs DUPLEX OFF Enables two sided printing ON BINDING LONG EDGE Prints pages for specified SHORT EDGE binding type PCL FONT SOURCE INTERNAL Instructs the printer where SOFT to look for PCL fonts SLOT n n 1 2 3 PCL FONT NUMBER O to 999 default 0 Specifies a default PCL font number PCL FONT PITCH 0 44 to 99 99 Specifies a default pitch for default 10 PCL fonts PCL FONT 4 to 999 75 Specifies a default font size POINT SIZE default 12 for PCL fonts PCL SYMBOL SET PC 8 default Used to select an appropriate symbol set COURIER REGULAR Note Dark Courier was DARK used in older LaserJet printers APPEND CR TO LF NO Appends a carriage return YES to each line feed character in the data stream UNIX Denotes default setting Only appears when the duplex unit is attached 2Only appears when PELEX is selected SOnly appears when a fixed space font is specified Only appears when a prop
189. g printer 54 shutting down printer 139 side registration adjustment 130 side registration home position sensor PS3105 130 side registration motor M3103 129 130 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 67 site requirements 20 21 skewed images 257 slots ElO 26 memory 16 98 C7085 90921 smart color 246 smeared toner 261 Smooth option 245 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 67 Soft Gloss paper 326 software installing 59 JetAdmin 67 70 ordering 43 PANTONE applications 249 SRGB applications 247 Solaris 72 solenoids diagrams 309 314 removing 188 SL1 manual feed 124 SL2 cassette feed 123 188 SL3001 paper feeder pick up 126 SL3101 duplex feed roller pressure release 129 SL3102 delivery deflector 129 sound intensity level 24 space requirements 21 spacing chart defects 266 special media printing 31 specifications electrical 22 environmental 22 media 29 preprinted paper 30 printer 23 site requirements 20 space requirements 21 speed printing 17 spilled toner cleaning 78 washing off clothing 37 spots troubleshooting 259 260 Standard RGB sRGB 246 Standard Web Offset Press SWOP 248 standby button 25 50 standby mode acoustic emissions 23 button for 50 power consumption 22 star wheel assembly removing 206 static discharge 139 status pages printer 286 supplies 290 stirrer toner 120 stop position flags 118 119 stored jobs menu 284 storing consumables 23 media 33 printer 22 strap ESD 140
190. ge has been damaged Replace the toner cartridge for the streaking color The paper does not meet HP paper specifications Use media that meets HP media specifications Light dark or faded pum The message TRAMSFE SEPLACE TROMSEER KIT appears on the printer control panel Print out a orion page to nives ies remaining g life of the transfer belt Replace the transfer belt if necessary The moisture content of your paper is uneven or too low Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper Some areas of the paper reject toner Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper The paper is excessively rough Use a smoother xerographic paper The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper Try a smooth xerographic paper If this solves your problem consult with the printer of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets the specifications for this printer Media does not meet the specifications for this printer Only use media that meets the media specifications for this printer The printer is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions Verify that the printing environment is within ia specifications If a TGHER LORH or TOMER GUT message is displayed on the printer control panel replace the Opa toner cartridge If the problem persists call for service Excess toner may have been deposited on the transfer belt Use a lint free cloth to clean any excess toner from th
191. ges for older version HP Color LaserJet 4500 printers Note The following instructions are for older versions of the 4500 series printers see page 140 to determine which version of the printer you have See page 55 for instructions for installing toner cartridges in newer version 4500 series and 4550 series printers 1 Locate the toner cartridges packaged in the printer box The printer uses four different toner colors and has a different toner cartridge for each color K black M magenta C cyan and Y yellow 2 Close all the doors and drawers on the printer If the printer is not already turned on turn it on Wait for the sales tov warm up When it IS EAM me Sonne panel displays TOMER PUES T TION If the IH HSTRLL message appears wait for the LO TOHER CHETEIDGE message then proceed with the lona instructions 3 Push the dark gray release button on the side of the printer 1 and open the top cover 2 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 51 4 The cartridge slot for the black toner cartridge is visible Lift up the flap that partially covers the cartridge slot The correct toner color is shown on the flap CAUTION Do not shake the toner cartridges after removing them from the packaging 5 Remove the cyan toner cartridge from the bag Gently rotate the toner cartridge from side to side to redistribute the toner 6 Remove the inside sealing tape by firmly pulling the orange tab located on
192. gnated service zones are available for additional charges on most on site service agreements Weekly Volume Onsite Service Agreement for organizations with many HP LaserJet printers provides economical scheduled on site coverage Designated for customer sites using 25 or more workstation products this service provides scheduled weekly repair visits to your central location HP can write an agreement for any combination of 25 or more workstation products including printers plotters computers and disk drives For more information on HP service agreements call 800 835 4747 U S or 800 268 1221 Canada Chapter 2 Service approach 45 46 Service approach C7085 90921 Installation and configuration Chapter contents Wlg ole IG TNS PURIG eni yar te eee PA PM IA 48 Package CONOS s x aoo Deb wre Greet wie RR e dl e Cn x dene 18 a de one Rap UP wre ae ae 48 Unpacking the printer a d su mme ee eee ge ee wd ew we CER don re 3 De gon RR nx ee a 49 inizi cie A UU on eo 50 Attaching the power cord decens ce e ame ce e KR a o CO e ed anh ak dos 50 Installing the toner cartridges for older version HP Color LaserJet 4500 printers 51 Installing the toner cartridges for newer version HP Color LaserJet 4500 and HP Color LaserJet 4550 printers aaa hrs 55 Installing the imaging ArUM o oooo RI IRI n 5 Using the parallel cable llli RII Ir 58 Selecting the display language llle 61
193. gure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 7 40 Location of duplexer and 500 sheet paper feeder connectors eee 320 7 41 500 sheet feeder wiring diagram 1 ee eee eens 321 8 1 Assembly location diagram 1 of 2 6 ee ee eee eee 330 8 2 Assembly location diagram 2 Of 2 151i zs va dada radere a ER RYE y V res 331 8 9 PUB IOCAUONS ratio li dd oa 332 8 4 External covers panels Sl A ce Ono e ede A ie DECR RE 394 9 5 NOD COVEr ASSEINDIY 4 3 xwoptrio a gta CRT n Remade t o sni ap rae eda ea a en i ie 336 9 5 Inter al components 1of3 53 1x2 2d bea ad EE EO ed ei bees erae dg cdd a dod cor baa ag 337 8 7 Internal components 2 Of 3 2 0 eee hrs 339 8 3 Internal components S Of 9 scroll Ute e UE Ue dE ORIS oe 340 8 9 Developing carousel assembly 0 0 0c eee ee eee ene 342 8 10 Paper pick up assembly 1T 0f S v3 x edes ard ce E ge debe ee ti deste udi eS 344 8 11 Paper pick up assembly 2 of 3 6 ee eee rs 346 8 12 Paper pick up assembly 3 0 3J ou di o o M D C Cn d nic Ye De ti A dC ie es 348 8 13 Upper drawer assembly oo o ooooo ern 350 8 14 MP tray paper pick up assembly 0 0 ccc ee rs 351 8 15 250 sheet cassette 0 ee ee eee eee eee enna 352 8 16 500 sheet paper feeder 0 cc eee hrs 353 Sl DUDIOX BIS ts dr e Boma Oriel Dave serene ede eas Ay acted aa a rara daria ot 354 List of Tables Contents Table 1 1 Pri
194. hat indicate the current number set on the control panel These bolded numbers will always be in the middle of the bars To set the correct value for each of the colors look at the lines within the bar and find the grouping that has the color line directly on top of the black line it will have more white space Print at least five registration pages to see if the new settings are correct Using a magnifying glass to look at the lines will help in selecting the best number to TOP edge La li HT PE OOl IOKIN md iil to LEFT edge zE 4 EI mm uw 8 T d PRINTED FROM Tray 1 Registration page Hewlett Packard strongly recommends that the registration values be selected on the basis of averaging five consecutive samples Setting the registration number 1 Press the ITem key to select the appropriate color cyan magenta or yellow at its registration number Press the VALUE key to change the registration number to the one identified 3 Press the SeLecT key to enter the value Setting margin numbers The top margin number is not tray dependent like the left side margin Simply print the registration page from whichever tray has paper Using a ruler measure from the top edge of the paper to the series of lines Find the line that is 13 mm 0 5 in away from the paper s edge C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Setting the top margin registration value
195. he grounding cam see Figure 6 66 callout 4 Remove the drum bushing assembly see Figure 6 66 callout 5 Remove the left side carousel mounting plate Remove all visible screws from the carousel mounting plate on the printer s right side see Figure 6 67 Figure 6 67 Cartridge carousel replacement right side carousel mounting plate 5 of 6 202 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Figure 6 68 C7085 90921 29 Standing at the rear of the printer lift the left side of the carousel while applying pressure toward you to the rear cross member plate As soon as the carousel clears the right side carousel mounting plate lift and rotate the carousel to your left to clear the assembly see Figure 6 68 abor 07 a J 8 ra Fd Cartridge carousel replacement lift out the cartridge carousel 6 of 6 30 31 32 33 When the carousel is out of the engine remove the 125 tooth gear bearing and plastic spacer Install them into the replacement carousel Install the end of the carousel opposite the 125 tooth gear into the holder Rotate and move the carousel down and to the right of the shroud Apply pressure toward you on the sheet metal to allow the carousel to drop into place Position the ends of the carousel so that the left side carousel mounting plate fits the plastic hub Make sure the plastic spacer is still on the shaft with the 125 tooth gear Assemble in reverse order of disassembly Chapte
196. he printers 1 Using safe lifting techniques remove the printer and the printer accessories from the box CAUTION The prepared location must be level not more than a 2 angle able to support up to 77 kg 169 Ib and must support all four corners of the 500 sheet paper feeder serves as printer base 2 Place the 500 sheet feeder in the prepared location CAUTION Avoid bending the guide pins while assembling the printer 3 Using the guide pins for proper alignment carefully assemble the printer and accessories pen the ITB drawer and remove the packing tape then close the drawer 4 Open the ITB drawer and remove the packing tape then close the drawer Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 49 Installation Attaching the power cord 1 Locate the standby button power switch on the front of the printer 2 The standby button has two positions in power on and out standby mode the fans remain on Make sure that the standby button is out standby mode 3 Locate the power cord on the back side of the printer for the HP Color LaserJet 4500 4500N 4550 and 4550N printers or on the duplex unit for the HP Color LaserJet 4500DN 4550DN and 4550HDN printers Connect the power cord to the power receptacle on the back of the printer 50 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Installing the toner cartrid
197. he network and ensure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting Electrical current is present in various printer parts whenever the printer is plugged in even if the power switch is in the standby position Line voltage is exposed when the right cover and formatter pan are removed Troubleshooting flowchart The troubleshooting flowchart shown in Figure 7 1 highlights the processes that quickly solve printer hardware problems During its power on sequence the printer verifies that its components are operating correctly If the printer fails to power on correctly use the steps shown to troubleshoot the failure Each heading depicts a major troubleshooting step A yes answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step A no answer indicates that additional testing is needed Proceed to the referenced location and follow the directions for that area After completing the additional testing proceed to the next major step Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 213 Figure 7 1 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 of 2 Power On and displaying a readable message A Perform power on checks B After control panel display becomes functional go to Step 2 214 Troubleshooting HRE Display Does the display Is the printer on YES indicate any of the YES following READY OFFLINE POWERSAVE ON A Show Even
198. he specified thickness range e paper that has absorbed too much moisture from the atmosphere room environment humidity too high or low C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 243 Understanding color variations The printed output might not match the computer screen and the colors printed on successive pages might not match While color variations are inherent in this printing method they can indicate changes in the printing environment print media or printer components Common causes of color variation The following list outlines the major causes of color variations between computers applications and output devices e Halftone patterns produced on monitors and the types of patterns used in the print jobs are different and might cause variations in the printed output e The printed output differs from the image on the monitor because the monitor and the print media have different reference values of black and white The monitor screen has charcoal gray for the black level and the white on the monitor screen is actually blue Black on the print media is limited only by the fill capability of the printer and most good quality paper has a very high white level In addition phosphor used in color monitors and toner have entirely different spectra characteristics and different color rendering capabilities Differences between output are common Blues generally match better than reds e The color of the ambient light changes the p
199. he toner cartridge is faulty There is dirt in the laser path The fuser is defective A mirror in the laser scanner is dirty Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 261 Wavy characters Mechanical instability in the scanner mechanism or the optics can cause wavy characters e Reprint the job to ensure that the problem persists e Ifthe failure remains replace the laser scanner assembly 262 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Overhead transparency defects Note 9ABCDEFGH IJK CDEFGHIJ CDEFGH No image available AaBbC amp AaBbCc _ AaBbc AaBbCc AaBbC CAUTION C7085 90921 Overhead transparencies can display any of the image quality defects shown in the previous samples In addition because transparencies are pliable while in the print path they are subject to being marked by the media handling components Allow transparencies to cool at least 30 seconds before handling them e Make sure that transparency is checked as the media type in the Paper Tab in the printer driver Also make sure that the media input tray is correctly configured for transparencies When Transparency is selected as the media type and ColorSmart Il is selected on the Color tab the printer will use a color treatment optimized for projection elf transparencies show lines and creases in the media and or the printed output compare the defect against the repetitive defect ruler page 266 to help isolate the cause to a particular componen
200. he top cover 2 Remove the left side cover 3 Remove the fusing assembly 4 Remove the screw shown in callout 1 and remove the black plastic piece 5 Disconnect connector J102 from the paper feed PCB 6 Remove the screw that secures the white cable trough to the chassis callout 2 P r MIDI aci 114 in QUA tii 1 Bele 11 s q j i A i 7 A i 1 t ETT L J LN cw e C Figure 6 47 Fuser motor removal and replacement 1 of 2 C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 185 Slide the cable trough and cables out from the chassis Remove the screw securing the plastic gear cover as shown in callout 3 and then remove the cover 9 Remove the three fuser motor screws shown in Figure 6 48 10 Carefully pull to remove the fuser motor and free the cable from the cable trough Figure 6 48 Fuser motor removal and replacement 2 of 2 186 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Paper path pick up motor M2 Note Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer 1 Remove the top cover Remove the left side cover Disconnect the paper path motor connector J109 from the paper feed PCB and remove it from the cable trough 4 Remove the two screws on both sides of the paper path motor shown in Figure 6 49 Remove the paper path motor by sliding the motor back and then out to clear the gear on the motor mz A e B aif e i1 E RS
201. heet cassette 0 0 eee eee 352 Table 8 16 500 sheet paper feeder 0 eee eee 353 Tables L7 DUpleX HE sir Seba bee eee eh Sako ede here bise 354 Table 8 18 Alphabetical parts list llle 355 Table 8 19 Numerical parts list 23242 ass pw Er A Rede oes a 359 Printer description Chapter contents Primer Teal EOS a 2 2 3 8 X063 7901 38 3 2 9 9 7 3 87 CED REMC LD dU M RC Reb de dioc ead eas 14 IdentlicaldO owe ctu eben posure ee 5 2 6 Ge sa nee eee ee hee os eee ee eee 18 Model and serial numbers 1 0 ee eee 18 Power and regulatory information 0 0 00 eee eens 19 Site requirements saeusi 0 ahh 20 Space requirements 21 Electrical specifications 0 0 ee eee rn 22 Environmental specifications assas aaea eee rn 22 Consumable storage requirements nannan cc a ee eee eens 23 Printer specifications ge ary de a 90 3 ae oh aot eae eines dened on aed car eee sears ae anda ida 23 Printer assemblies eee eee ee eee ees 25 Media requirements 28 Selecting print media 1 ee ee eee eee ees 28 Media specifications i usu dus ed Rey ek X Rm dob URGE E EUR d ORG RG weave e Rs 28 Supported media weights and SIZES 1 ee ee nee eens 29 Non supported media lisse hrs 30 Printing on special media cc hans 31 Environmental Product Stewardship Program 000 cece eee eens 34 Regulatory statements ee ee eee eee
202. iate transfer belt 0 0 0 n 113 li J4e q i oe oh ts auna ra ew Ce o te eee be ea aa ee ee 118 Laser scanner operation 0 0 ee hrs 120 plo go ee ee a ee ee ee ee ee ee es ee ee ee ee re es eee 122 hse PPCCPT 122 Nay 2 CaS eG A a E a a E e E E a A E E a a a E a RE 123 Tray 1 multi purpose tray n anaana aaa IRI He 124 Tray 3 500 sheet paper feeder llli 126 Paper Size delecHOD x dc epe oca a a cedo ta ERA E De RR on cdi Vo sae de o e a icm 127 Fusing and delivery unit 0 0 0 0 cc hn 127 Duplex unit paper path 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee ees 128 DC controller subsysteM 1 ee rn 132 MOTORS and BI RR NOCT TREE as AO EER OS ee oR Re Ee Oe TT 133 Formatter system 2 0 0 ec eer 135 CONTO panel sss stoss trade demure bbe Gam a a o de 135 Power supplies escola rta ci EA Sat we Wo WR A de Re i eel Ane ew oar kA rica a dct bos dia s 135 Power supply overview llle hrs 135 High voltage power supply 0 0 0 mn 136 C7085 90921 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 101 Introduction This section presents the theory of operation and the functional overview for HP Color LaserJet 4500 series and 4550 series printers It provides the service representative with an understanding of the printing process This chapter is also the course material for the Service Authorization class and discusses the following printing functions e Basic operation Image formation
203. ider Drum cartridge Photo eb sensitive a Op drum 7 IX Toner cartridge Developing sleeve Figure 5 20 Toner carousel assembly Table 5 1 Toner carousel assembly components Reference Description Toner cartridge motor Carousel motor Carousel position sensor Toner cartridge contact separation sensor Toner level sensor Operation The DC controller activates the carousel motor M3 and rotates the carousel As the carousel rotates the position sensor PS10 monitors the carousel for the stop position flags Each stop position flag is used as a development and toner cartridge removal flag see Figure 5 21 When a flag is detected the DC controller monitors the time it takes the flag to pass the sensor PS10 Each flag is a different width and therefore takes various times to pass the sensor This time lapse is used by the DC controller to determine which development removal stop position flag has passed the sensor When the carousel turns to the correct position the DC controller stops the carousel motor M3 and the carousel from rotating any farther 118 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 C7085 90921 C cartridge development stop position flag and M cartridge removal stop position flag M cartridge development stop position flag and K cartridge removal stop position flag esto E K cartridge development stop position flag and Y
204. ies only CANCEL JOB will abort the test Do nat turn off the printer or corruption of the NVRAM could result if the NVRAM test must be aborted use the CANCEL JOB key Runs the selected tests C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 301 Engine diagnostics Engine diagnostics access portions of the printer s internal diagnostics that occur when the printer is turned on These diagnostics are available as tools to help isolate problems that are not reported by the firmware As mentioned previously no error message will appear if there is a problem in the section being tested A good understanding of how the printer operates is required to use the engine diagnostics successfully To have a better view of the areas being exercised remove the left side cover and the ITB drawer Defeat the two ITB drawer switches SW 1 and SW 4 located on the left side of the drawer cavity Now you can run the diagnostics and watch the assemblies as they are operated Listed below in Table 7 28 are the diagnostics available and a brief description of what each diagnostic will do A detailed explanation for each diagnostic can be found under its own heading later in this document Table 7 28 Engine diagnostics Menu Item Selectable Description Value M default Selected test will run once Selected test will run in a continuous loop In the 4550 series only CANCEL JOB will abort the test Turns on the motors that control the pape
205. ight not adhere to the media and an image might show up on pages where it isn t meant to appear See Full page ghosting on page 258 When this occurs on transparencies the connections for the ITB cleaning roller clutch 3 and for the secondary transfer roller clutch 4 might be reversed Repetitive defects on transparencies Overhead transparencies that have repetitive defects spaced 131 mm 5 2 in apart indicate a defect on the upper fuser roller 1 Turn the printer off and unplug the printer allow 30 minutes for the fuser to cool and then remove the fuser Make sure to wait 30 minutes before removing the fuser The fuser will be hot Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 263 2 Turn the fuser gears and inspect the surface of the upper fusing roller If the roller has surface defects gouges replace the fusing assembly Streaking on transparencies If the transparencies have streaks this could be the result of condensed wax from the toner making its way onto the fuser assembly rollers during the fusing process Try cleaning the fuser rollers using the following process 1 Saturate a corner of a lint free static free wipe with isopropyl alcohol 2 Open the alternate path door the small door at the back of the printer 3 Place the printer into calibration mode by opening and then closing the large door at the rear of the printer or by pulling a drawer open and then quickly closing it 4 While the printer is calibrating the fuser
206. igure 6 21 Drum drawer top drawer assembly removal and replacement 1 of 3 164 Figure 6 22 Drum drawer top drawer assembly removal and replacement 2 of 3 165 Figure 6 23 Drum drawer assembly removal and replacement 3 of 3 2 2 2 eee 165 Figure 6 24 Densitometer removal and replacement 1 Of 2 eee 166 Figure 6 25 Densitometer removal and replacement 2 Of 2 0 0 eee 167 Figure 6 26 Formatter removal and replacement 0 0 cece eee eee 168 Figure 6 27 Formatter pan assembly removal and replacement 1 of 4 o o oooooooooo 170 Figure 6 28 Formatter pan assembly removal and replacement 2 of 4 oooooooommooo 171 Figure 6 29 Formatter pan assembly removal and replacement 3 of 4 2 00000 cee eee 171 Figure 6 30 Formatter pan assembly removal and replacement 4 of 4 o o oooooommooo 172 Figure 6 31 Power supply removal and replacement 00 0 ee eee 173 Figure 6 32 High voltage power supply removal and replacement newer version HP Color LaserJet 4500 and HP Color LaserJet 4550 printers 0 0 0 0 0c cee eee eee 174 Figure 6 33 High voltage power supply removal and replacement older version HP Color LaserJet 4500 printers 43 3 oai ac Ox Ria a ae haa eR aon ea dA ok Qs 175 Figure 6 34 Drum drive assembly removal and replacement 1 of 3 0 ce ee 176 Figure 6 35 Drum drive assembly removal a
207. ill increment every 10 seconds during this process Action No action required ElO X NOT FUNCTIONAL Description The EIO slot specified does not have a card installed or is not functional Action No action required EVENT LOG EMPTY Description Menu but the Event Log has no entries 220 Troubleshooting Action No action required C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error messages continued FUSER LIFE LOW REPLACE KIT 4500 Or FUSER LIFE LOW ORDER KIT 4550 Description Approximately 95 of the fuser s life has been consumed Fuser Life Out Replace Kit Description The fuser has reached the end of its expected life INITIALIZING Description The message appears when the printer is initially turned on Action Continue printing or replace the fuser kit Fuser replacement will be required in the near future Action Replace the fuser kit Action No action required INSTALL DRUM KIT Description The drum kit is not installed or is incorrectly installed Action Verify that the drum kit is correctly installed INSTALL TRAY 2 Description The printer cannot print until media is loaded into Tray 2 The paper path for Tray 3 passes through Tray 2 Action Insert Tray 2 into the printer so that printing from Tray 3 can continue or start MEMORY FULL STORED DATA LOST Description The printer has no available memory The cur
208. ill not match exactly There are over 945 PANTONE colors in the PANTONE Matching System These colors were created using sixteen inks on a lithographic printing press Not all of these colors can be reproduced by a laser color printer because they are out of a laser printer s four color range PANTONE calibrates HP printers to provide the closest match for all the colors we can reproduce and provide the colors closest to those we cannot reproduce This feature requires the use of the PostScript 3 Emulation printer driver It utilizes a function in the PostScript language for describing custom colors like PANTONE that is unique to PostScript and not present in the PCL data stream PANTONE colors are used mostly in publishing environments by applications such as QuarkXpress and Adobe InDesign that tend to use PostScript only Adjusting color balance This printer features automatic color calibration to provide high quality color output In situations that require critical color control you can manually adjust the density balance of the printer s four toner colors This procedure should only be performed by your network administrator Performing this procedure changes the color balance of the printer by altering halftones and affects all print jobs To adjust color balance Step 1 Print a color balance calibration page The color balance calibration page shown in Figure 7 7 displays current color settings and provides a record of the pr
209. inter s initial settings before any adjustments are made 1 Press MENU until SALTBRATION MENU displays 2 Press Item until PZHT CBRLIBERHTIOH PAGE displays 3 Press SELECT to print the color balance calibration page The page consists of four color bars cyan magenta yellow and black and a box containing gray balance circles The factory default setting for each color is zero The range of settings is 5 to 5 Adjusting densities using the four color bars provides coarse color balance adjustments After making these adjustments you can fine tune color densities by adjusting the gray balance See step 7 for instructions 250 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Figure 7 7 C7085 90921 O Color balance calibration page Step 2 Adjust the cyan C density setting Examine the cyan density bar C on the color balance calibration page from a distance of 2 meters 6 ft If the center oval matches the background pattern more than the other ovals the cyan density does not need to be adjusted and you should continue to the magenta M setting If an oval left of center or right of center matches the background more than the center oval use the following steps to enter the number 1 Press ITEM until COH Ei appears 2 Press the right side of the VALUE key to increase the value or press the left side to decrease it until the number corresponding to the oval that most closely matches the background pattern appears 3 Press
210. inter to the REHE state pending PAGE CANNOT PRINT NOW alternates with RETRY WHEN PRINTING STOPS Description Action An internal page has been requested while the printer is Retry the print job after the printer has completed the current printing an incoming job Interrupting the job to print the job internal page would corrupt the job s environment and potentially cause the job to finish printing incorrectly after the internal page is completed Consequently internal pages are not permitted to interrupt jobs and can only be printed when the printer is idle PLEASE WAIT Description Action The printer is in the process of purging data so that itcan go No action required offline or into the menus POWERSAVE ON Description Action The printer is in PowerSave mode This message is cleared No action required by pressing any key or by the receipt of a print job PRESS GO TO PRINT alternates with PRESS SELECT TO CHANGE TONER Description Action The top cover was opened and closed when the printer was Press Go to resume printing or press Select to enter the not in toner cartridge replacement mode toner replacement mode PRINTER LANGUAGE NOT AVAILABLE Description Action The printer received a request for a new language No action required personality that does not exist in the printer PRINTING CALIBRATION PAGE Description Action The color calibration page is being
211. ironmental Program An easy to use take back component of the program is available in over 25 countries Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge and Consumables box e HP Planet Partners printing supplies environmental program Since 1990 the HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge Recycling Program has collected more than 39 million used LaserJet toner cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in the world s landfills The HP 34 Printer description C7085 90921 LaserJet toner cartridges go to a collection center and are bulk shipped to our recycling partners who disassemble the cartridge parts for recycling Materials are separated and converted into raw materials for use by other industries to make a variety of useful products e U S Recycling Returns For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and consumables HP encourages the use of bulk returns Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use a single prepaid and pre addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package WWW For more information call 800 340 2445 U S only or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies website at http www hp com ljsupplies planet_index html e Non U S Recycling Returns Non U S customers should call the local HP Sales and Service Office for further information regarding availability of the HP Planet Partners LaserJet Toner Cartridge and Consumables Recycling Progr
212. ise on the right gear e Cams with a double line should be aligned Check for a defective development PCB If defective replace the development PCB Check for a defective DC controller PCB If defective replace the DC controller PCB Distorted image The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly The printer s operating environment does not meet HP specifications The connection of the cables to the laser scanner is poor The connection of the cables to the ECU is poor The laser scanner is defective The DC controller is defective Dropouts The paper does not meet HP paper specifications The printer s operating environment does not meet specifications The print density is set incorrectly Change to a darker setting and retry printing The DC controller PCA is defective The high voltage power supply PCA is defective The transfer roller is defective Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 257 Faded print faded areas or NN Wen streaks e The message TRANSFER IHSFER KIT appears on the printer control panel Print out a on page to Iove hen remaining life of the transfer belt Replace the transfer belt if necessary e The moisture content of your media might be uneven or too low Use media from a different source or from a new ream of paper e f some areas of the paper reject toner try using paper from a different source or from a new ream of paper e The media might be too rough and exceed media specificati
213. isk 4550 series only C4082A C4083A C4235A J6054A C4103A C4286A 500 sheet input tray Fast Infrared Pod 4550 series only Flash firmware DIMM 4550 series only Panel overlays C4084 40001 C4084 40005 C4084 40003 C4084 40006 C4084 40004 C4084 40015 C4084 40018 C4084 40014 English German French Spanish Italian Korean Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese 326 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 Table 8 1 Consumables accessories and supplies continued 0 emeapn e jme eh ermano m eem Rada oowanb pawh SSS Norwegian Portuguese Reference Materials 5963 7863 5961 0976 9969 6818 9969 3412 HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide HP PCL PJL Reference Set HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator s Guide HP JetDirect Print Server JetAdmin Setup Guide le D o cC po ri D o R94 4005 410CN R94 4004 410CN R94 4003 410CN Magenta R94 4002 410CN Yellow Note The only difference between the toner cartridges listed above is that the Europe only toner cartridges have different languages on the instruction sheet inside the box Black Cyan OOOO o E CO CO CO oO AJOIN gt 22 I5 I C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 327 Common fasteners Table 8 2 Types of screws Illustration Description Screw machine w washer To hold plastic to metal ex the skins Screw self tapping To hold plastic to plastic ex co
214. itional memory will not be used by either printer To install memory in the printer you must remove the formatter board from the rear of the printer To remove the formatter board remove the six screws shown in Figure 4 4 The DIMMs are then inserted into the available slots in the formatter board See Appendix A in the online user guide for installation instructions Figure 4 4 Removing the formatter board CAUTION Do not attempt to remove the DIMM in slot 4 see Figure 4 5 of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer or the DIMM in slot Z3 see Figure 4 6 of the HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer This DIMM is part of the printer s firmware Removing it will affect printer operation 98 Printer maintenance C7085 90921 Figure 4 5 Do not remove the DIMM in slot 4 Figure 4 6 Do not remove the DIMM in slot 3 CAUTION The HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer uses 100 pin non parity synchronous SDRAM DIMMs The HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer uses 168 pin non parity synchronous DRAM DIMMs EDO DIMMs are not supported in either the HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer or the 4550 printer To ensure you are using the correct DIMM see figure 4 7 EDO SDRAM eL
215. l Volley Jame Ucet drugs Di Top cover switch assembly removal and replacement Figure 6 19 162 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Drum drawer top drawer assembly To remove the drum drawer top drawer Note X Turnthe printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer 1 Open the drum drawer top drawer until it stops and remove the imaging drum protecting it from light CAUTION _ Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 2 Remove the top cover 3 Remove the left side cover 4 Remove the RFI shield 5 For printer serial numbers xxG or lower remove the top cover switch assembly 6 Disconnect connectors J1004 and J1010 on the DC controller see callouts 2 and 3 in Figure 7 37 on page 317 and remove the cables from the cable stays 7 Disconnect the drum drawer top drawer switch see callout 1 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 20 Drum drawer top drawer switch 8 10 C7085 90921 Free the main cable from all cable stays at the top and left side of the printer push the cables back toward the rear of the printer Remove the two screws from the black plastic housing shown in callout 1 Figure 6 21 Lift the black plastic housing and slide it forward onto the front drawer Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 163 Figure 6 21 Drum drawer top drawer assembly removal and replacement 1 of 3 11 Slide a small flat blade screwdriver under the black plastic retainin
216. l panel When light passes through the eerie all the time without interruption the printer is stopped by the DC controller and the formatter is notified that no toner is left in the cartridge A TCHER OUT message also appears on the control panel The stirrer is also used to supply toner smoothly to the sleeve The toner cartridge motor M5 rotates the stirrer and the toner feed roller Both the stirrer and the toner feed roller stir the toner in the toner cartridge Toner level sensor PS12 Light receiver Detection port Stirrer Toner Detection port Toner level sensor PS12 O Light emitter Toner level detection toner cartridge detection The Color LaserJet 4550 series has a continuous toner level sensor CTLS that was not available in the 4500 series The continuous toner level sensing printed circuit assembly PCA is mounted on the right side of the printer The sensor allows the printer to track toner usage and to display toner levels on the Supplies Status page Laser scanner operation The DC controller signals the laser driver to activate the laser diode that generates the laser beam The laser beam is aligned by the collimator lens and the cylindrical lens see Figure 5 24 The beam then strikes the six faced prism mirror located atop the scanner motor while the mirror is rotating at a constant speed The beam is then reflected and brought to a point to maintain a consistent round dot focused on the drum surfac
217. lace the low voltage power supply Action Turn the printer off and then on to reset the printer Open the color toner door and look for an obstruction lf necessary remove the toner cartridges individually by manually releasing the carousel brake and rotating the carousel around to each cartidge position and removing the cartridges Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Continued on next page Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 233 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages continued carousel housing pass through PS10 to provide positioning information The black toner cartridge tab is the home position Toner cartridge position within the carousel is monitored by PS11 If PS11 fails or is improperly connected a 54 2 error appears Another indicator of this is that the carousel starts to rotate then stops immediately A 54 2 error message can also occur if the sensor is installed backwards 54 3 PRINTER ERROR Description The printer is not receiving data back from the density sensor PS14 PS14 is located in the bottom of the imaging drum drawer refer to Figure 7 30 During calibration routines a series of images are written on the imaging drum and the densitometer measures the density of the image e g amount of toner that is placed into the drum These measurements provide the feedback to ensure image quality is consistent throughout the life of the consumable Note The printer CANNOT operate with th
218. leshooting 257 variation 244 Color LaserJet 4500 family printer models 14 Color LaserJet Transparencies ordering 326 color print speed 17 colored paper 31 ColorLaserJet Soft Gloss Paper 326 colorless output troubleshooting 257 ColorSmart ll 246 commands DOS 269 PJL 269 Commercial Service and Support Organization America CSSO A 41 Commercial Service and Support Organization Europe CSSO E 41 366 Index communication bidirectional establishing 58 troubleshooting 268 compact disc service part information 42 components diagrams 337 replacing 40 139 condensation 213 Configuration Menu 276 configuration page 287 configure printer page 286 configuring ElO 67 network parameters 70 Novell NetWare 70 71 Windows networks 71 connecting 10 100Base TX network 66 10Base2 network 65 10BaseT network 66 LocalTalk networks 64 networks 64 parallel cable 59 power cord 50 connectors diagrams 314 318 319 consumables HP 83 locating 84 ordering 41 325 replacement intervals 83 142 replacing 85 status information 290 storing 23 control panel Calibration Menu 281 changing overlay 154 Configuration Menu 276 display language 61 ElO Menu 280 error messages 217 formatter PCB 135 I O menu 280 Information Menu 273 locating 25 locking 73 menu map 271 Paper Handling Menu 274 Printing Menu 278 Private Stored Jobs Menu 284 Quick Copy Jobs Menu 283 removing 153 Resets Menu 282 service mode 293 control panel overlays installing 15
219. ll display A through F with a binary value below it All the doors and drawers should be closed In this state the display will show all 0 s Open the doors and drawers one at a time to verify correct functionality If operating correctly the O will change to a 1 If a 1 appears with all doors and drawers closed there is a defective switch or connection Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 305 Engine test The printer has one test pattern vertical lines When an image defect appears a test print can be made to identify the problem The test print can be made by pressing the test print switch located on the right side of the printer Figure 7 21 A test pattern can be printed by pressing the test print switch once after the photosensitive drum has stopped and the printer has entered the standby mode If the switch is held down the test pattern is printed continuously The switch can be used when paper is loaded in any tray other than tray 1 The engine test does the following e Verifies that the print engine is functioning correctly the formatter PCB is completely bypassed during an engine test e Isolates printer problems e Checks and adjusts registration e Prints from tray 2 or 3 only not from tray 1 e Can be activated with the formatter PCB removed Note For the printer to perform an engine test tray 2 must be installed and loaded with paper and the toner cartridge must be installed in the printer Engine test button
220. ller activates the registration clutch CL1 which feeds the paper to the secondary transfer unit The leading edge of the image on the intermediate transfer belt is matched with the leading edge of the paper The paper is fed to the fusing and delivery units see Figure 5 26 SS ee A A n Io TT Feed PS2 sub roller Registration roller Cassette feed roller Pick up O he Separation roller Cassette Tray 2 cassette operation Chapter 5 Theory of operation 123 Figure 5 27 Table 5 2 Motors solenoids sensors and switches Reference Description Pick up motor Cassette pick up solenoid Registration clutch Registration paper sensor OHT sensor Cassette paper sensor Paper size detection switch Paper size detection switch Paper size detection switch Tray 1 multi purpose tray The multi purpose tray paper sensor PS4 senses the presence of the paper in the multi purpose tray The manual feed solenoid SL1 transmits the rotational force of the pick up motor to the manual feeding pick up roller As the pick up roller rotates the pick up cam pushes up the paper lifting plate This causes the paper to be pressed against the pick up roller and thus picked up by its rotation After the separation pad separates multiple sheets the paper is fed into the printer one sheet at a time n AA 2 X 7 PS3 Multi p
221. lor options from the Color tab select Manual then select Options Halftone options Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output You can select halftone settings for text graphics and photos independently The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail e The Smooth option provides better results for large solid filled print areas It also enhances photos by smoothing out fine color gradations e The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors or images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail Color map The color map settings in the printer driver tell the printer how to interpret the data sent from a software application into the final colors that the printer will print The color map settings can be adjusted to Screen match or Vivid e Screen Match sRGB standard red green blue prints colors that are optimized to match RGB monitor colors Use this setting to more closely match the colors on your screen A world wide color standard originally developed by HP and Microsoft sRGB is a common 246 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Note color language for monitors input devices scanners digital cameras and output devices printers plotters It is the default color space used for HP products Microsoft operating oystems the World Wide Web and most office software sold today sRGB is representative of the typical Windows computer moni
222. low Step 1 Isolate the problem to the major system for example the host computer the network or server or the printer system Step 2 Determine if the problem is located in the accessories or in the printer engine Step 3 Troubleshoot the problem using the procedures in Chapter 7 Once a faulty part is located the printer can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing field replaceable units FRUs Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level Hewlett Packard does not support replacement of components on the printer circuit assembles 40 Service approach C7085 90921 Parts and supplies Note C7085 90921 Ordering parts Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in Chapter 8 of this manual Replacement parts can be ordered from HP s Commercial Support Services Organization Americas CSSO A or HP s Commercial Support Services Organization Europe CSSO E Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or support provider See Ordering related documentation and software on page 43 and Ordering parts on page 325 for additional ordering information By phone e Commercial Support Services Organization Americas CSSO A 1 800 227 8164 U S only e Commercial Support Services Organization Europe CSSO E 49 070 3114 2253 By mail Hewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Company
223. luding the counter gear and an ITB unit life detection lever The gears indicate to the ITB counter gear the number of rotations turns made by the intermediate transfer belt A page count is also stored on the formatter which is used for informational purposes only When a configuration page is printed the percentage of ITB life remaining is indicated based upon this page count If the ITB unit is replaced prematurely or the percentage of life is inaccurate the page count in the formatter must be manually corrected 114 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Figure 5 17 C7085 90921 Once the ITB counter gear has rotated one complete turn the tabbed lever drops into the gear notch This causes the life detection lever to block light from the ITB unit life sensor PS1 When light is blocked from PS1 the DC controller sends the formatter a warning that the end of the ITB unit life has been reached ITB unit life sensor PS1 When the end of the ITB unit life has been reached ITB unit life detection Secondary transfer roller unit The secondary transfer roller is normally detached from the ITB This operation presses media against the ITB with the secondary transfer roller at the time of secondary transfer During first page out the secondary transfer roller engages with the belt prior to drum to belt image transfer to stabilize the belt from side to side movement The roller stays engaged while the black image is being tra
224. m drawer assembly to read the density of the density detection pattern PS14 contains a density detection circuit a light emitting diode LED and photodiodes 1 and 2 To read the density the sensor emits light from the LED reflects it off the density detection pattern on the photosensitive drum and receives it with photodiode 2 Photodiode 1 receives the light directly from the LED The signals from photodiodes 1 and 2 are then compared to determine density values Toner density is monitored and corrected during the following occurrences e when the power is activated e after a certain number of sheets are printed e when a toner cartridge is replaced e when the drum cartridge is replaced e when the printer wakes up after a standby mode of six hours or more Density detection pattern Photosensitive drum LED Photodiode 2 Photodiode 1 Density sensor PS14 Toner density sensor Chapter 5 Theory of operation 111 Mechanical system Figure 5 13 This section discusses each of the imaging units involved in the image formation process Photosensitive drum cartridge The drum drawer assembly is a user replaceable assembly that contains the photosensitive drum primary charging roller drum memory and waste toner storage The drum motor M4 drives the drum drive assembly which in turn drives both the photosensitive drum and the ITB discussed later in the mechanical system Because the primary charging roller s function was
225. mable items through its Environmental Collection Program For details on this program see the recycling instruction guide enclosed with each consumable item In case of toner spills skin and clothing are best cleaned by removing as much toner as possible with a dry tissue then washing with cold water Hot water causes toner to permanently set into clothing Chapter 1 Printer description 37 Laser statement for Finland LASERTURVALLISUUS Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP LaserJet 4500 4550 laserkirjoitin on k ytt j n kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa k yt ss kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estaa lasers teen paasyn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on maaritetty standardin EN 60825 1 1994 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin kayttoohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle VARNING Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP LaserJet 4500 4550 kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil T llaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota v riainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita k ytt j n k sikirjas
226. mber 5961 0976 Order a copy of this manual from the HP website http www hp com In the following examples EC represents the escape character For more information on using escape characters see the PJL Technical Reference Manual e To lock or unlock the printer control panel if a password has not been set send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC 12345X PJL JOB PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK NONE or MINIMUM MODERATE or MAXIMUM PJL EOJ ECS 7545x e To set the password send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC 12345XG0PJL JOB PJL DEFAULT PASSWORD numeric password 0 to 65535 APJL EOJ ECS 12345X e To lock or unlock the control panel if the password has been set send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC 12345X PJL JOB PASSWORD numeric password APJL DEFAULT CPLOCK NONE or MINIMUM MODERATE or MAXIMUM PJL EOJ ECa 12345X Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 75 76 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Printer maintenance Chapter contents Cleaning the printer and accessories 0 ee ee ee eee es 78 Cleaning spilled toner na nn annann de ha Bes a 3C Bd C493 do Owe CR Rm A e ae cw 78 Approximate replacement intervals for consumable items llssnn 80 Madina drum lle ss asiendo iberica ada dora ca e 80 Replacement intervals for CONSUMAbleS o oooooococooo ee eee es 83 Locating consumables uuu dedo sien a ra a c
227. mbly removing 166 density sensor toner PS14 cleaning 85 operations 111 density adjusting color 250 print 243 depth printer 23 C7085 90921 Designer Micrografx 249 DeskJet transparencies avoiding 31 Detail option 245 detection port toner cartridge 120 detection switches paper size 123 developer assembly diagrams 333 testing 303 developer sleeve 118 119 developing carousel assembly 343 developing PCB removing 159 development process 106 device page set 286 diagnostics control panel 271 engine 302 formatter 300 mode entering 300 using 40 diagrams internal components 337 DIC Dainippon Press 248 dimensions printer 23 DIMMs adding 98 localized 325 ordering 326 supported 16 DIN 8 cable 72 DIN 8 port 64 diodes 111 120 disconnecting power 139 display language selecting 61 distorted images 257 DLC Data Link Control 72 documentation ordering 43 doors diagrams 335 rear removing 147 sensor test 304 switches 135 DOS commands 269 DRAM DIMMs adding 98 supported 16 drawer assembly upper 350 drawers removing drum assembly 112 163 middle 152 switch assembly 182 top assembly 163 drive assemblies removing carousel 179 drum 176 drivers printer color output 244 ordering 43 settings 69 dropouts troubleshooting 257 drum drawer assembly removing 163 cover removing 149 locating 25 versions 335 drum drive assembly removing 176 drum kits life span 83 ordering 325
228. ment C7085 90921 Transfer roller assembly To remove the transfer roller assembly Remove the HVPS Remove the left side cover Remove the ITB drawer Open the drum drawer and remove the drum cartridge Remove the star wheel assembly Using needle nose pliers remove the E ring on each side of the shaft Remove the gear Remove the bushings O ON O C FP WO N Slide the assembly out of the chassis Figure 6 72 Transfer roller removal and replacement C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 207 Cam shafts To remove the cam shafts Remove the HVPS Remove the left side cover Remove the ITB drawer Open the drum drawer and remove the drum cartridge Remove the appropriate clutch or gear on the left side Using needle nose pliers remove the e rings from each end of the shaft being removed Remove the bushings 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note If the shaft is undamaged then only the cams need to be replaced Remove the screw from the cam and replace only the cam Remove the shaft Figure 6 73 Cam shaft removal and replacement 208 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Troubleshooting Chapter contents WMUOGUCHION AnS 211 Troubleshooting process 212 Pre troubleshooting checklist 0 0 0 eee eee ees 212 Troubleshooting flowchart llli 213 Troubleshooting POWer ON 1 ear 216 Printer error troubleshooting llis 217 Printer messages ou asus die ope he
229. mperature are within specifications e Do not use Automatic Duplex mode Duplex manually or not at all Single color missing e Remove the toner cartridge and manually check the level of toner in the toner cartridge e Check for a defective light pipe sensor If defective replace the toner level sensor Sunburn The imaging drum might have been exposed to light Symptoms of sunburn are streaked or blurred lines across the length of the page side to side on portrait or top to bottom on landscape e Print 50 to 100 pages on the imaging drum to remove the sunburn elf sunburn symptoms are still occurring allow the imaging drum to sit in a dark place for two to three days f sunburn is severe the symptoms don t go away replace the imaging drum Do not expose the imaging drum to light for more than 15 seconds The drum is light sensitive and exposure to light can cause permanent damage C7085 90921 AGBE AGBE AGBE CAUTION AaBbCa AdBbCa C7085 90921 Toner smear There is dirt on the paper The fusing rollers are dirty The paper does not meet HP specifications The toner cartridge is defective The fusing assembly is defective There is loose toner in the printer The static eliminator is dirty or is not grounded allowing a static charge to remain on a page The DC controller PCA is defective Vertical lines or streaks Check for a leak where light might be entering the printer Check
230. multipart forms avoiding 30 multipurpose tray sensor PS4 124 312 POTTS POTTS JOTA sms N Navigator Netscape 285 NDS Novell Directory Services 71 needle nose pliers 140 Netscape Navigator 285 networks 10 100Base TX 66 10Base2 65 10BaseT 66 configuring parameters 70 connecting 64 ElO configuration 67 embedded Web server 285 IBM OS 2 LAN 72 LocalTalk 64 Novell NetWare 70 security 73 74 troubleshooting 268 UNIX 72 Windows 71 noise printer 23 non volatile memory NVRAM function 100 initializing 307 Novell Directory Services NDS 71 Novell NetWare configuring 70 71 numbers model 18 part 355 359 serial 18 140 296 numerical lists error messages 226 part numbers 359 Index 371 NVRAM non volatile memory function 100 initializing 307 O Office Microsoft 247 249 OHT sensor PS301 125 ordering documentation 43 drivers 43 parts 41 325 software 43 OS 2 servers IBM 72 output bins capacity 17 face down 127 face up 127 rear 26 top 25 overcurrent protection 136 overlays control panel installing 154 ordering 326 overvoltage protection 136 P package contents 48 packing tape removing 49 page count color 296 consumables 142 definition 80 ITB 114 printing report 291 total 297 page sets embedded Web server 285 PageMaker Adobe 249 pages black troubleshooting 255 blank 256 last detecting 125 leading edges detecting 114 per month maximum 24 trailing edges detecting 129 white 256 p
231. n Indicates a waste toner sensor malfunction 234 Troubleshooting Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Remove the drum cartridge and clean the waste toner detection window with a dry cloth Clean the waste toner sensor unit at the printer side with a dry cloth Check the light guide and clean it if necessary Replace the light guide if the ends are scarred Reconnect the waste toner sensor unit connector and the DC controller PCB connector J1009 correctly Replace the waste toner sensor PS13 C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages continued 54 6 PRINTER ERROR Description The OHT sensor has reported an error condition This can be caused by contamination in the connectors a blocked sensor or a defective sensor See Figure 7 24 for the sensor locations Action 1 Remove the ITB and verify that the OHT sensor prism is in place Lift the registration flap and verify that the OHT sensor is not blocked 3 Remove the ITB drawer and inspect the drawer connectors for contamination such as a piece of paper 4 Ifthe error persists verify that all connectors are firmly seated 5 Replace ITB drawer 55 DC CONTROLLER ERROR Description Action The print engine 1s not COMMURIC Aung with the 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer formatter The communication link between the formatter and DC controller was lost This c
232. n The specified media type and size need to be loaded into the requested tray TRAY X SIZE SIZE Description Media has been loaded into the specified tray The most recently configured size will be displayed with an asterisk next to it Action Load the specified media type and size into the requested tray Press Go to override this request and cause the page to be printed on different media Action 1 Value might be used to view all possible media sizes Pressing Select will select the currently displayed size Pressing Go will remove the message TRAY X TYPE TYPE Description Media has been loaded into the specified tray The most recently configured type will be displayed with an asterisk next to it Action 1 gt Value might be used to view all possible media types Pressing Select will select the currently displayed type Pressing Go will remove the message TRAY X OPEN Description The specified tray is not completely closed Action Close the specified tray WARMING UP Description The fuser is warming up Printing will continue when the fuser reaches the optimum temperature WASTE TONER FULL REPLACE DRUM KIT Action No action required Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 225 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error messages continued Description Action The waste toner full sensor PS13 detects a waste toner full 4 condition A light receiver and ligh
233. n of the drum drawer is already installed simply order the replacement drum drawer cover RG5 5232 000CN C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 335 Figure 8 5 Top cover assembly Table 8 5 Top cover components Description Parts for 4500 Parts for 4500 Parts for 4550 series s n xxG series s n xxH series and below and above Cover top RG5 3300 000CN RG5 5150 000CN RG5 5150 000CN Cover toner access RF5 2076 000CN RF5 3137 000CN RF5 3137 000CN CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series 336 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 a Figure 8 6 Table 8 6 Internal components 1 of 3 Description Cable fan Internal components 1 of 3 Parts for 4500 series xxG and below RG5 3887 000CN Parts for 4500 series xxH and above N A Parts for 4550 series N A Cable developer RG5 3783 000CN RG5 5187 000CN RG5 5187 000CN Power supply 110V RH3 2219 000CN RH3 2219 000CN RH3 2219 000CN Power supply 220V RH3 2220 000CN RH3 2220 000CN RH3 2220 000CN High voltage power supply RG5 3285 000CN RG5 5165 000CN RG5 5165 000CN Strap cover support RB2 1556 000CN R
234. nance 89 90 Printer maintenance CAUTION Avoid touching the foam portion of the roller Oil from your fingers can affect the print quality 5 Locate the new transfer roller and place it in the notches behind the roller flap CAUTION Be careful not to insert the transfer roller backwards Doing so can damage the printer 6 Snap the new transfer roller into place by pushing both ends of the roller toward the rear of the printer 7 Remove the new transfer belt from the bag Align the blue pins that are on both sides of the new transfer belt with the blue slots in the drawer Then slide the transfer belt down into place Close the ITB drawer 8 To reset the printer for the new transfer kit push Menu on the control panel until KESETS MEHL appears in the control panel display C7085 90921 SELECT IF DONE appears in the 9 Press ITEM until TEGHSFER KIT EL control panel display Then press SELECT 10 To replace the air filters turn the printer off and wait 10 minutes for the fans to stop running Unplug the power cord and open the upper rear door of the printer If
235. nce count color page count and total page count Print a configuration page to verify printer operation Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 169 Formatter pan assembly To remove the formatter pan assembly Note Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer 1 Open the drum drawer top drawer until it stops and remove the imaging drum protecting it from light CAUTION Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum Open the ITB drawer middle drawer and Tray 2 Remove the top cover Remove the right side cover Remove the right rear cover Remove the left side cover Remove the RFI shield Remove the control panel O ON OO oO FP C ND Remove the front right cover 10 Remove the two screws for the connector cover shown in Figure 6 27 Me MA nn ana NS a ASAS AAA gt gt gt rr ABBE Figure 6 27 Formatter pan assembly removal and replacement 1 of 4 11 Disconnect the two connectors shown in callout 1 Figure 6 28 170 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Figure 6 28 CAUTION Figure 6 29 Note C7085 90921 E i ES lg Formatter pan assembly removal and replacement 2 of 4 A small flat blade screwdriver should be used to release the top connector by pressing on the latch Failure to use a flat blade screwdriver to press on the latch will damage the connector 12 Disconnect the ribbon ca
236. nd AHTO COHTIBMUEZ MN is set the printer goes offline for 10 seconds before it returns online e If fUTO CONTINUE FF is set the message appears until Go is pressed Alphabetical printer error messages Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error messages ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED Description Action Appears for approximately 5 seconds when a user has See the system administrator for access to the printer control attempted to select a menu value while the printer control panel panel locking is enabled BAD DUPLEXER CONNECTION Description Action The duplex unit is not correctly installed 1 Verify that the power cord is connected to the duplex printing accessory and the short power cord from the duplex printing accessory is connected to the printer Turn printer off and then on If the error continues verify that the duplex unit is correctly installed If error persists replace duplex unit CALIBRATION EXECUTING Description Action The printer is executing an internal color calibration This No action required process should take approximately 90 seconds CANCELING JOB Description Action The printer is canceling the current print job Incoming data No action required for the current job will be discarded Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 217 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error messages continued CANNOT DUPLEX CLOSE REAR BIN Description The printer cannot duplex because the rear output
237. nd cleaning roller are moved into position against the ITB This time the image is transferred from the ITB to the media Any residual toner left on the ITB is charged positively for removal Once the print job is complete CL4 and CL3 are deactivated and the transfer and cleaning rollers are moved away from the belt CL2 is then deactivated and the ITB is lowered to move it away from the drum Home position detection The home position of the ITB is detected to precisely transfer the four toners to the intermediate transfer belt and align the leading edge of print paper with the leading edge of the image In the area outside of the toner transfer area of the ITB there are home position detection holes With the ITB rotating the home position detection sensor PS5 detects a hole and sends the information to the DC controller When the ITB home position detection signal is detected by the DC controller it sends a top of page signal to the formatter The formatter sends the image data and the DC controller begins to create the image For full color printing this process is repeated four times to form the image Developing PCB Primary transfer Intermediate transfer roller belt ITB home position detection signal TBHP Intermediate transfer belt feed roller Home position detection ITB unit life detection The ITB counter unit is located on the side of the ITB unit The counter unit consists of a number gears inc
238. nd replacement 2 of 3 0 ee 177 Figure 6 36 Drum drive assembly removal and replacement 3 of 3 0 00 eee 177 Figure 6 37 Large fan removal and replacement 1 of 2 llli ee eee 178 Figure 6 38 Large fan removal and replacement 2 Of 2 nananana naana aaa ees 178 Figure 6 39 Toner level sensor assembly removal and replacement 00 0 eee eee eee 179 Figure 6 40 Carousel drive assembly removal and replacement 1 0f2 o oooooomoooo 180 Figure 6 41 Carousel drive assembly removal and replacement 2 of 2 o o oooooommooo 180 Figure 6 42 Paper size switch removal and replacement llli eens 181 Figure 6 43 Switch plate assembly removal and replacement 00 cece eee eee eee 182 Figure 6 44 Paper feed PCB removal and replacement 1 of 3 00 eee 183 Figure 6 45 Paper feed PCB removal and replacement 2 of 3 0 eee 183 Figure 6 46 Paper feed PCB removal and replacement 3 of 3 0 eee 184 Figure 6 47 Fuser motor removal and replacement 1 of 2 0 0 eee 185 Figure 6 48 Fuser motor removal and replacement 2 Of 2 nananana naaa 186 Figure 6 49 Paper path motor removal and replacement 0 00 eee 187 Figure 6 50 Paper pick solenoid removal and replacement 00 cece eee eee 188 Figure 6 51 ITB cleaning roller clutch removal and replacement 0000 cece ee ee ees 189 Figure 6 52 ITB clutch assembl
239. nds on investigation of printer errors and problems eo Use the pre troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps required to fix the problem e Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions The flowchart guides you to the appropriate section of this chapter that provides steps for correcting the malfunction Check the printer for the following before troubleshooting a specific printer problem e Has regular maintenance been performed eo Are the maintenance units within their rated life e Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors Note The customer is responsible for checking consumable items and using consumables that are in good working condition Pre troubleshooting checklist The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help you quickly define the problem s 212 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 WARNING C7085 90921 Table 7 1 Pre troubleshooting checklist Environment Is the printer installed on a solid level surface Is the power supply voltage within 10 volts of the specified power source Is the power supply plug inserted in the printer and the outlet Also verify that the short power cord of the duplex unit is plugged into the printer and the power supply plug of the paper deck at the duplex unit is properly connected Is the operating environment within the specified parameters as list
240. ne another the toner particles are drawn to the drum s surface Areas of the drum s surface that are exposed to the laser attract and hold the toner while the unexposed areas repel the toner Photosensitive Stirrer DC bias Developer Toner transfer roller sleeve Figure 5 5 Development 106 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Figure 5 6 C7085 90921 Transfer During transfer the toner image is transferred from the drum surface to the ITB primary transfer and then from the ITB to the paper Secondary transfer Primary transfer The ITB has a primary transfer roller that provides a positive bias that pulls the toner image from the drum to the ITB This process is repeated four times one time for each toner cartridge The positive bias applied by the transfer roller increases with each pass to compensate for increasing layers of toner As shown in Figure 5 6 the toner particles still maintain their negative charge Only the transfer belt is charged positively Intermediate transfer belt Primary transfer roller Primary transfer Secondary transfer Once the entire print image is on the intermediate transfer belt the secondary transfer roller is lifted into position At the appropriate time a sheet of media is pulled into the transfer area With the secondary transfer roller biased at a positive potential the toner on the ITB is pulled onto the media as the ITB passes over the secondary transfer roller
241. ne of the following 1 Marker is corrupt 2 Strip buffer size given to HiLite is too small 3 Strip buffer size given is too large Note This error is primarily associated with the firmware and should not require a new formatter 49 04FF Description Action A large print job 800 to 1200 pages or complex Two courses of actions are available graphics can cause the printer to quit printing O Determine the page that is causing the failure If there is an image on the page try to move the image down on a portrait page or left on a landscape page to move the image out of the strip that is failing The movements will need to be very small so as not to cause the next strip to fail O Putthe printer in Lossy mode with a sequence of PJL commands Lossy compression is the process of compressing a file such that some data is lost after the file is compressed and decompressed Use the following series of commands to put the printer into Lossy mode ESC96 12345X QPJL PUJL Default Service mode HPBOISEID PUJL Default Diagnostics ON PUJL Enter Language PCL ESC 12345X PUJL Esc z9999P Esc z50P Esc z201X Continued on next page 230 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages continued eo Toturn off Lossy mode once the file has printed use the following commands ESC 12345X0OPJL PUJL Default Diagnostics OFF OJPL Default Service Mode EXIT PJL EOJ ESC 12345X PuJL Note
242. nection at a time BNC port C7085 90921 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 65 HP Color LaserJet 4500 RJ 45 10Base T or 10 100Base TX connection HP Color LaserJet 4550 RJ 45 10Base T or 10 100Base TX connection 66 Installation and configuration Connecting to a 10Base T or 10 100Base TX network Plug the connector of your unshielded twisted pair cable into the RJ 45 port The other end of the cable should be attached to the network Note The HP JetDirect print server supports one Ethernet cable connection at a time Plug the connector of your unshielded twisted pair cable into the RJ 45 port The other end of the cable should be attached to the network Note The HP JetDirect Print server supports RJ 45 connection to 10Base T or 10 100Base TX and Fast Infrared FIR and parallel ports C7085 90921 Enhanced I O EIO configuration Note Note C7085 90921 This printer comes equipped with two enhanced input output ElO slots These slots hold compatible external devices such as the HP JetDirect 600N Print Server Plugging ElO cards into the slots increases the number of network interfaces available to the printer ElO cards can maximize printer performance when you are printing from a network In addition they provide the ability to place the printer anywhere on a network This eliminates the need to attach the printer directly to a serve
243. ner flap Cable fan Bearing carousel FH7 7313 000CN Sensor PS7 delivery paper RB1 8865 000CN Roller paper pick RB1 8974 000CN Limiter torque RB1 9001 000CN Cover roller RB1 9009 000CN Indicator paper level RB1 9012 000CN Arm lifter left RB1 9013 000CN Arm lifter right RB1 9016 000CN Spring torsion RB2 0545 000CN Shaft paper pick RB2 0561 000CN Clutch one way RB2 0561 000CN Clutch one way RB2 0572 000CN Clutch one way RB2 0576 000CN Lever sensor RB2 0593 000CN Metal tab Tray 2 RB2 0614 000CN Link rowel RB2 0717 000CN Roller RB2 0744 000CN Roller RB2 0916 000CN Cover connector Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 359 Table 8 19 Numerical parts list Patrumter oesrpion ar trons RB2 0964 000CN Cap toner flap RB2 0981 000CN Spring grounding RB2 1130 000CN Bushing drum drawer RB2 1158 000CN Bushing ITB left RB2 1180 000CN Cover cable RB2 1203 000CN Cover right side RB2 1205 000CN Cover rear RB2 1206 000CN Cover lower rear RB2 1215 000CN Tray extension RB2 1224 000CN Cover connector RB2 1277 000CN Guide cable RB2 1282 000CN Filter air large RB2 1283 000CN Filter air small RB2 1284 000CN Rod delivery RB2 1361 000CN Handle ITB drawer
244. network card a 500 sheet paper feeder a duplex unit and 64 MB of RAM e The HP LaserJet 4550N printer is the base model with a 6 GB hard drive an HP JetDirect 610N print server network card a 500 sheet paper feeder a duplex unit and 64 MB of RAM 14 Printer description C7085 90921 Figure 1 2 WWW HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printers 1 HP Color LaserJet 4550 and 4550N printers 2 HP Color LaserJet 4550DN and 4550HDN printers This printer series combines the quality and reliability of Hewlett Packard printers with the features listed in Table 1 1 For more information about printer features refer to the Hewlett Packard website at http www hp com Table 1 1 Printer features Feature Connectivity Duplex Environmental Fonts C7085 90921 Description Bidirectional parallel port requires a C connector e Two enhanced input output EIO slots Optional HP JetDirect 600N print server network card included with the HP Color LaserJet 4500 N and 4500 DN printers Optional HP JetDirect 610N print server network card included with the HP Color LaserJet 4550N 4550DN and 4550HDN printers e HP Color LaserJet 4550 series Infrared receiver port e HP Color LaserJet 4550 series Embedded Web server Optional duplex unit mounts directly beneath the printer for two sided printing duplex unit is standard with the HP Color LaserJet 4500DN 4550DN and 4550HDN Note Req
245. nsferred to the ITB Just before the black image reaches the secondary transfer roller the transfer roller disengages from the ITB Following image transfer from the photosensitive drum to the ITB and after the paper is positioned in front of the registration rollers the DC controller turns on the secondary transfer roller clutch CL4 Once CL4 is on the secondary transfer roller contact separation cam rotates and lifts the secondary transfer roller mount This presses the secondary transfer roller against the intermediate transfer belt prior to the paper arriving from the registration rollers Bias for the roller is turned on to enable image transfer from the belt to the paper Once the print job is finished and the paper has passed through the unit the DC controller then turns CL4 off and secondary transfer roller disengages from the ITB Chapter 5 Theory of operation 115 Figure 5 18 Intermediate transfer belt Guide K Secondary Print paper transfer roller Secondary transfer roller mount Secondary transfer roller CLA contact separation cam Secondary transfer roller unit ITB unit contact separation unit Normally the intermediate transfer belt is separated from the photosensitive drum This operation presses the belt against the drum by moving the ITB unit contact lever at the beginning of print operation When the fusing unit temperature reaches the print temperature at the beginning
246. nsity Used for increasing or decreasing yellow toner density Used for increasing or decreasing black toner density Resets density values back to default settings Press Select to reset values Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 281 Resets Menu The Resets Menu is used for resetting the printers memory and for returning the printer to its factory default settings It is also used to clear maintenance messages following the replacement of certain consumable items Table 7 23 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Resets Menu settings RESET MEMORY Resets the printer to user specified default settings RESTORE FACTORY Resets the printer to factory default settings DEFAULTS NEW TRANSFER KIT Clears the maintenance message after the transfer kit SELECT IF DONE has been replaced NEW FUSER KIT Clears the maintenance message after the fuser kit has SELECT IF DONE been replaced Table 7 24 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Resets Menu settings Menu Item Description NEW COLOR Resets the toner gauge for the printer and allows printing to CARTRIDGE continue NEW TRANSFER KIT Clears the maintenance message after the transfer kit has SELECT IF DONE been replaced NEW FUSER KIT Clears the maintenance message after the fuser kit has SELECT IF DONE been replaced RESET MEMORY Resets the printer to user specified default settings RESTORE FACTORY Resets the printer and control panel menus to factory SETTINGS default settings POWERSAVE Allows P
247. ntact sensor detects when the toner cartridge has moved away from the drum The carousel motor M3 again begins the carousel rotation and the process is repeated for each toner cartridge Toner cartridge Toner cartridge Photosensitive push cam drum Developing rotary shaft Developing Slider sleeve When toner is not developed When toner is developed Toner cartridge contact separation function Toner level detection toner cartridge detection This function detects the remaining toner level in the toner cartridge and the presence of the toner cartridge in the carousel Chapter 5 Theory of operation 119 Note Figure 5 23 Note While the toner cartridge is facing the photosensitive drum light from the light emitter diode passes through the light guide in the carousel and enters the detection port of the toner cartridge The light passes through the cartridge when the toner around the detection port is scraped off by the cartridge stirring function and is detected by the light receiver of the toner level sensor PS12 See Figure 5 23 The printer measures the time it takes for the toner to cover the port again so that light cannot pass through This measurement determines the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridge When the light passing through the cartridge exceeds a specified time before Des IS by toner the DC controller warns the formatter that the toner life is low The TOMER L message also appears on the contro
248. nter features 2 0 0 eee ee ee eens 15 Table 1 2 Model names and numbers 0 0 0 cc eee ees 18 Table 1 3 Electrical specifications ee a 22 Table 1 4 Environmental specifications llle 22 Table 1 5 Consumable storage requirements 0 0 0 0 c eee eee es 23 Table 1 6 Primer dimensions cie a id a e ud Saks ae e pO eae 23 Table 1 7 Acoustic emissions llle 23 Table 1 8 Supported media specifications llle 29 Table 1 9 Printing on transparencies llle 31 Table 2 1 Related documentation and software lllllenn 43 Table 3 1 Printer security levels 0 20 0 ee eee eens 74 Table 4 1 Cleaning the printer usada pudo E IRA NUS EPI eA A A 78 Table 4 2 Approximate replacement interval for consumable items 83 Table 5 1 Toner carousel assembly components o ooococococnonoo 118 Table 5 2 Motors solenoids sensors and switches ooooooooonoonoo ooo 124 Table 5 3 Motors solenoids clutches and sensors llle 124 Table 5 4 Solenoids sensors switches llli 126 Table 5 5 Paper size detection switches llle 127 Table 5 6 Fusing and delivery unit components 0 0 000 e eee eee 128 Table 5 7 Motors solenoids and sensors 0 0 eee 129 Table 5 8 Motor and fan locations 0 0 cc eee ne 133 Table 6 1 Types Ol SOreWS serials
249. nting 292 exchange program 42 exhaust fans 134 exiting diagnostic mode 300 exposure laser 106 120 Extended Data Output EDO DIMMs not supported 16 F face down assembly removing 199 face down bin delivering to 127 paper full sensor PS9 127 224 face up bin delivering to 127 duplexing operations 129 faded print troubleshooting 258 259 fans diagrams 310 316 large fan housing removing 178 large right side removing 195 left side removing 197 locations 133 motor 134 Fast InfraRed Receiver FIR 68 features printer 15 feed PCB removing 183 feed rollers cleaning 78 operations 122 feeding operations cassette 123 126 duplex unit 128 manual 124 paper path 122 filters locating 84 replacing 91 Finnish laser safety statement 38 FIR Fast InfraRed Receiver 68 firmware replacing 307 upgrading 98 flags 118 119 flat blade screwdrivers 140 flowchart troubleshooting 213 fonts adding 98 localized DIMMs ordering 325 standard 15 formatter assembly diagrams 333 board removing 98 diagnostics 300 operations 135 pan assembly removing 170 processor 68 removing 169 replacing 297 307 four color printing 248 Fractal Design Painter 249 Freehand Macromedia 249 front door switch 135 front right cover removing 155 full page ghosting 258 C7085 90921 fuser assembly diagrams 330 cleaning 78 locating 84 maintenance count 296 replacing 92 fuser kits life span 83 ordering 325 replacement intervals 142 replacing
250. ntrol panel Screw trus head Sheet metal to sheet metal ex formatter pan 328 Parts and diagrams Retaining Ring e type To hold gears into place 6mm 8mm 10mm 12mm M3 M4 kate Kk O O 14mm 16 mm 25 mm C7085 90921 Illustrations and parts lists C7085 90921 The following illustrations and parts tables list the field replaceable units FRU for this printer At the end of this chapter are two tables of all of the parts shown in this chapter Table 8 18 lists the parts in alphabetical order and table 8 19 lists the parts in numerical order by part number Both tables list the appropriate figure in this chapter where the part can be found Determining the printer version Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printer are available To accurately perform removal and replacement procedures or determine the correct part for reordering you will need to know the version of the printer that is being serviced To identify the printer check the serial number which is located at the rear of the printer All printers will have US or JP in the first two positions of the serial number e g USBB123456 Newer versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer will have an H or higher letter in the third position e g USHB123456 If the letter in the third position in the serial number is B C D or F then you have an older version of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer Th
251. of its user replaceable parts by keeping a page count Swapping consumable assemblies between printers might cause a misrepresentation of consumable assembly life values and is not recommended Table 6 2 ded replacement interval for consumable items period Black K toner 9 000 pages 4 5 months See page 86 a ri ee ai Cyan C toner TOHMER C LOH 6 000 pages 2 3 months See page 86 Magenta M TOMER M LON 6 000 pages 3 months See page 86 toner cartridge TOHER M OUT Yellow Y toner TOHER Y LOH 6 000 pages 3 months See page 86 cartridge TOMER y OUT 25 000 black 12 5 months for black See page 88 and white only and white only pages pages or 6 250 jor 3 months for color color pages pages Transfer kit 100 000 black 50 months for black See page 89 TRANSFER KIT Lou and white only and white only pages pages or or 12 5 months for 25 000 color color pages pages 100 000 black 50 months for black See page 92 and white only and white only pages pages or or 25 months for color 50 000 color pages pages Approximate lives are based on 2 000 pages per month 2 Theapproximate average A4 letter size page count is based on 5 percent coverage of individual toner colors Page counts are only estimations usage conditions and print patterns can cause results to vary 142 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 CAUTION Hewlett Packard recommends the use of HP products in this
252. of the print operation the DC controller turns the ITB unit contact separation clutch CL2 on Once the ITB contact separation clutch is on the ITB unit contact separation cam pushes on the ITB contact separation lever This causes the lever to lift up on the ITB until it comes into contact with the photosensitive drum The ITB will stay engaged with the drum throughout the transfer process Once the entire print job is complete and CL3 and CL4 have been deactivated the DC controller turns CL2 off and the ITB is lowered away from the photosensitive drum 116 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Intermediate transfer belt Photosensitive ae a 5 grua _ ITB unit contact cam ITB unit ITB unit contact lever Figure 5 19 ITB unit contact separation unit C7085 90921 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 117 Toner carousel The toner carousel holds the printer s four toner cartridges K black M magenta C cyan and Y yellow The carousel motor M3 rotates the carousel and the toner cartridge motor M5 provides the drive for the positioning cam and the developer sleeve The carousel contains three sensors developing carousel position sensor PS10 toner cartridge contact separation sensor PS11 and the toner level sensor PS12 These sensors as well as the detailed operation of the carousel assembly are discussed on the following pages Carousel Toner motor cartridge motor Sl
253. olor type of format and whether duplexing has occurred The following guidelines will help determine drum life e An image is a layer of toner An A 4 Letter size color page printed on one side contains four A 4 Letter images one for each color CMYK e A duplexed sheet counts as two pages In color duplex mode printing on both sides of a page there are eight A 4 Letter size images per A 4 Letter sheet e The page count numbers on the Configuration Page give a count of the number of pages printed regardless of size For example an A 4 size color duplexed page takes eight images to print but only adds two pages to the page count Usage patterns How the printer is actually used can also have a significant effect on drum life e Because of pre and post rotations the drum wear is approximately the same for a one page job as for a two page job Frequent short jobs will decrease the drum life e There are extra rotations and cleaning cycles when printing duplex pages Duplex jobs use the imaging drum at a higher rate than comparable simplex jobs Drum life low versus drum life out The BRUM LIFE LOL warning message on the control panel indicates approximately 20 percent of life remaining This i is intentional to allow the user enough time to bad a Misa dl kit C4195A It is perfectly T to continue to print while the LIFE i message is displayed However when the Pii LIFE OUT message occurs the drum has feached the en
254. om the text Caution messages alert you to the possibility of damage to equipment or loss of data Warning messages alert you to the possibility of personal injury Contents 1 Printer description Printer PS QUIN Sects 2 5 ares wea eens ace a are eb Grade A ar ok ea bs ric wl aes en Sek 14 eC pec a y essa da rn LOT TIPP 18 Site requirements 1 0 0 ee eee eee ee eee ees 20 Printer SDECIMICa OS rica ne atta eo ead wee eee eee he dew ew hee oe ee ee a on heen ewe 23 Printer assemblies P 25 Media requirements n nannan sidad Geared etti ix ett ay ae ah quendi dia oe aac 28 Environmental Product Stewardship Program 0 ccc eee eee ene 34 Regulatory statements s a4 3 age Se goth Bay ordene ad ste he Re Ap ms BOG etn ake de HOW am ke 36 Safety information 0 eee hians 37 2 Service approach DEVICE aD seems cue daros eee a es bebe eee ease hacen ends e e 40 Farts and SUDPIES e oeecead od tape been suas cee deans beet twang chook Fees ee hoes eee Bee eee 41 Warranty statement si ssatina ed ONE ase EE OE we a ROR Oe wee a e RU a8 44 3 Installation and configuration Unpack ine o A 48 ASTAMAMO earn as E A S esa ee de ae te are qe 50 Connecting Io a TIe WOTK gt 2206 2204 04 suede sierra tetera re ae 64 Enhanced I O EIO configuration o o o ooooorr ee eee RR A 6r 67 PUNET OVO ous coer ec aene ee oe be nee eyes ae TASTE ease ee eee Sue Febeute cones ena 55 9 69 Network configuration a na aa
255. on the shield to remove it Figure 6 16 Developing PCB removal and replacement 1 of 2 6 Disconnect the connectors from the developing PCB and release the cables from the metal cable stay callout 2 Figure 6 17 on page 160 7 Remove the five or four screws depending on the version of printer that is being serviced from the developing PCB callout 1 Figure 6 17 on page 160 8 Lift the developing PCB up and out Reinstallation tip When securing the developing PCB with the five or four screws secure the metal cable stay callout 2 Figure 6 17 at the location shown C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 159 Figure 6 17 Developing PCB removal and replacement 2 of 2 160 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Note CAUTION C7085 90921 Top cover switch assembly Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available To identify which printer version you are servicing see page 140 To remove the top cover switch assembly 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the left side cover 3 Remove the RFI shield 4 Disconnect the sensor and switch cables from the top cover switch assembly callout 1 Figure 6 18 on page 162 5 Follow the instructions below depending on the version of printer that is being serviced For HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer serial numbers xxG or lower 1 Free the sensor and switch cables from thei
256. ons See Supported media specifications on page 29 Do not use paper that exceeds specifications e Check that the printing environment is within humidity specifications e Faded print could result from low toner in a particular toner cartridge Ifa TOMER LOL or TOMER HT message appears on the printer control panel replace the appropriate toner cartridge e Check to see if the transfer belt is contaminated Use a lint free cloth to clean any contaminants from the transfer belt surface e The connections into CL2 ITB unit separation clutch and CL3 ITB cleaning roller separation clutch have been switched at the clutches not on the PCB This typically shows a light black print on the page e The toner cartridge is getting low on toner e The toner density setting is not adjusted correctly e The internal mirror or optics are contaminated e The laser scanner is damaged e The document scanner needs to be recalibrated e There is a problem in the contact image sensor e There is a problem in the formatter Full page ghosting Full page ghosting occurs when an image prints in full color on one page but a faded copy of it is also seen on the following page No Image available Make sure that the top spring in the ITB drawer is properly connected Replace the ITB Ensure operation of the ITB Cleaning Roller Clutch CL3 If the imaging drum is near end of life replace it If the toner cartridge is near end of life replace it
257. oors and drawers After the printer warms up for a few minutes the control panel displays TCHER POZITIOH Push the dark gray release button on the left side of the printer 1 and open the printer s top cover 2 The cartridge slot for the black toner cartridge is visible Lift up the flap that partially covers the cartridge slot Remove the black toner cartridge from the bag and locate the orange tab on the end of the toner cartridge Pull the tab firmly to remove the inside sealing tape If the tab breaks off pull on the tape Discard the tape Position the toner cartridge over the cartridge slot so that the blue arrow on the toner cartridge points to the blue arrow on the printer The arrow on the right control panel side of the printer should point straight down Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 55 7 Slide the toner cartridge down into the slot until the cartridge stops Note If the cartridge does not slide easily into the slot ensure that you have the right color cartridge for that slot 8 Rotate the toner cartridge toward the back of the printer within the cartridge slot until the cartridge clicks in place 9 Lower the flap to partially cover the toner cartridge If the cartridge was rotated correctly the flap covers the cartridge label Close the top cover before installing the next toner cartridge 10 When the top cover is shut the carousel advances to the next toner cartridge slot When the prin
258. ooting C7085 90921 Note C7085 90921 AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations Parallel DOS commands Ensure that the AUTOEXEC BAT file contains the following statements for parallel interface communications MODE LPT1 P For MS DOS version 4 0 and above MODE LPT1 B This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1 If you are using LPT2 or LPT3 replace LPT1 in the example with the appropriate printer port Printer Job Language PJL commands See the HP Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual tor a complete description of PJL commands This manual is available with the HP PCL PJL Reference Set on CD ROM part number 5021 0337 PUJL Enter This command enables the specified printer language If the printer does not receive this command it enables the default language This ensures the correct operation applications that do not support PJL The command syntax is PJL Enter LANGUAGE PCL PostScript lt CR gt lt LF gt UEL universal exit language This command also referred to as the universal exit language command terminates the current printer language and returns control to PJL It performs the following actions Prints all data received before this command Performs a reset lt esc gt E in PCL cntrl D in PostScript e Turns control over to PJL This command is also a valid HP GL 2 terminator The UEL command must be immediately followed by the PJL command pre
259. ortional space font is specified 278 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Table 7 18 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Printing Menu settings Menu Htem Values Description COPIES 1 to 999 default 1 Number of copies UNIT OF MEASURE INCHES Set the unit of measurement MM X DIMENSION Determine the length of the custom size media Y DIMENSION Determine the width of the custom size media ORIENTATION PORTRAIT Determines the default page LANDSCAPE orientation PCL FONT SOURCE INTERNAL Instructs the printer where to SOFT look for PCL fonts SLOT n n 1 2 3 PCL FONT NUMBER 0 to 999 default 0 Specifies a default PCL font number PCL FONT PITCH 0 44 to 99 99 Specifies a default pitch for default 10 PCL fonts PCL FONT 4 to 999 75 Specifies a default font size POINT SIZE default 12 for PCL fonts PCL SYMBOL SET PC 8 default Used to select an appropriate symbol set WIDE A4 NO Sets the printer to allow side YES A4 type media APPEND CR TO LF NO Appends a carriage return to YES each line feed character in the data stream UNIX Denotes default setting Only appears when a fixed space font is specified 2Only appears when a proportional space font is specified C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 279 I O Menu The I O Menu allows you to make changes to printer interface settings The following table lists the selections that appear for each item in this menu Table 7 19 HP Color LaserJet 4500 I O Menu setting
260. ose pliers remove the e clip and the gear shown in callout 2 oO c Bb c N Using needle nose pliers remove the e clip and ITB cleaning roller clutch shown in callout 3 1 annm v See 10 i11 CcAnot ye B ITB cleaning roller clutch removal and replacement Make sure that the clutch assembly gears are correctly reinstalled For older printers the gear alignment marks should be offset by one gear tooth as shown in Figure 6 51 for newer printers the gears which have a double line should be aligned Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 189 ITB clutch CL2 assembly To remove the ITB clutch assembly 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the left side cover 3 Remove the ITB cleaning roller clutch 4 Remove the screw shown in Figure 6 52 and remove the plastic shroud F E 7 AEH IT J tt 1 a Figure 6 52 ITB clutch assembly removal and replacement 1 of 2 5 Disconnect the cable from the clutch assembly 6 Remove the three screws shown in Figure 6 53 and remove the clutch assembly AM og 80 D e T p ki e y un l a eo E t3 a o SP Figure 6 53 ITB clutch assembly removal and replacement 2 of 2 190 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 CAUTION Make sure that the clutch assembly gears are correctly reinstalled For older printers the gear alignment marks should be offset by one gear tooth as shown in Figure 6 51 for newer printers the gears which have
261. ost print jobs The Calibration Menu provides fine tuning for critical color matching requirements For information about using this menu to set toner densities see page 250 CAUTION Calibrating toner densities changes the color balance of your printer by altering halftones It affects all print jobs Notify your network administrator before performing this procedure Table 7 21 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Calibration Menu settings PRINT Prints out the color CALIBRATION PAGE calibration page CYAN DENSITY MAGENTA DENSITY YELLOW DENSITY DENSITY RESET DENSITY VALUES 5 to 5 default 0 5 to 5 default 0 5 to 5 default 0 5 to 5 default 0 Used for increasing or decreasing cyan toner density Used for increasing or decreasing magenta toner density Used for increasing or decreasing yellow toner density Used for increasing or decreasing black toner density Resets density values back to default settings Press Select to reset values Table 7 22 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Calibration Menu settings PRINT CALIBRATION PAGE CYAN DENSITY MAGENTA DENSITY YELLOW DENSITY DENSITY RESET DENSITY VALUES C7085 90921 5 to 5 default 0 5 to 5 default 0 5 to 5 default 0 5 to 5 default 0 Prints out the color calibration page Used for increasing or decreasing cyan toner density Used for increasing or decreasing magenta toner de
262. ot remove the roller shaft unless you have to replace it To replace the individual pick rollers rotate the shaft by hand so that the flat parts of the D shaped rollers are facing up Grasping the center of the D shaped roller with one hand press down on the roller clip on the flat portion of the roller with the other hand and pull it off of the shaft If you need to remove the entire shaft insert a small flat blade screwdriver into both of the plastic clips as shown in callout 2 Figure 6 70 to remove the roller a SS n Figure 6 70 Paper pick rollers removal and replacement Paper pick roller replacement tip When reinstalling the roller shaft make sure that the flat parts of the D shaped rollers are facing down C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 205 Star wheel assembly To remove the star wheel assembly 1 ao FF C N Remove the ITB drawer Open the drum drawer and remove the drum cartridge Disconnect the spring as shown in callout 1 Remove the linkage screw on the left callout 2 Carefully pull the assembly forward to remove it from the shaft Star wheel assembly replacement tip Insert the linkage over the shaft first a f J n j T mu E 2 Y i 1 la r E as IL si NEN f f mm L l 2 i li a 1 m fe ae L Figure 6 71 Star wheel assembly removal and replacement 206 Removal and replace
263. other printer If the DC controller is replaced by itself these values are copied from the formatter to the DC controller If a new formatter is replaced or if an NVRAM initialization is performed see NVRAM initialization on page 307 these values are loaded onto the formatter from the DC controller Registration offset As the ITB ages the Color Plane Registration might need to be checked See the instructions below for printing a registration page Registration offset has also occurred when a printer has been damaged and the scanner itself was offset To print a registration page 1 Scroll through the Service Menu until PEZHT EEGIZTERHTIOM FOGE appears 2 Select which paper tray to pull paper from only when setting left side margins will the tray actually matter 3 Press SELECT to print the registration page In the center of the page are horizontal Scan and vertical Process sets of bars for cyan magenta and yellow Each bar is made up of a series of lines with black being used as the base for setting the correct registration values for the three other colors Along the top and left sides of the page are lines with numbers which are used for top and left side margins The tray from which paper was pulled is listed on the bottom of the page To set registration numbers Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 297 Hint Figure 7 20 Note 298 Troubleshooting On each of the color bars in the process section are bolded numbers t
264. out interpreting and printing the usage page see page 291 e Event Log page This page displays the printer s event log For more information about interpreting and printing the event log see page 292 e Device Identification page This page displays the name asset number network address model number and serial number for this printer To set the name and asset number see the description of the Device Identification page below e Device page set The device pages of the embedded Web server allow you to configure the printer from your PC The device pages can be password protected Always consult with your network administrator before changing the printer s configuration e Configure Printer page Configure all printer settings from this page e Alerts page Input a list of recipients for electronic notification of various printer events e E Mail page Configure the incoming and outgoing mail servers e Security page Set a password for the embedded Web server Passwords and features configuration should only be determined by the network administrator If a password is set users will require a password for entry into the device sections of the embedded Web server e Other Links page Add or customize links to other websites These links are displayed on the navigational bar throughout the embedded Web server pages There are two permanent links Ask a question where the user can get help with the printer and Order Supplies
265. ove the formatter pan assembly 2 Disconnect the four connectors three in front and one in top rear of printer from the power supply Free the cable harness from the cable stay Remove the four or seven screws depending on the version of printer you are working on from the power supply shown in Figure 6 31 5 Slide the power supply forward slightly to clear the rear retaining tab and tilt the top of the assembly out Lift the power supply up and out 4 y 7 ia gt AG Y La a ES Ax aM uii Power supply removal and replacement Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 173 High voltage power supply To remove the high voltage power supply HVPS Note Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the printer Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available the newer version is equivalent to the HP Color LaserJet 4550 unless otherwise noted To identify which printer version you are servicing see page 140 1 Remove the formatter pan assembly 2 Remove the power supply Note Some printers have a cover over the high voltage power supply 3 Remove the rear door 4 Remove the fusing assembly 5 Disconnect the four cables from their connectors callout 1 Figure 6 32 or callout 1 Figure 6 33 depending on the version of printer being serviced Free the cable harness from the cable stays Remove the four brass screws shown in callout 2 Figure 6 32 from the HVPS Carefully pull the HVP
266. owerSave feature to be turned on or off 282 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Note C7085 90921 Hard disk dependent menus Quick Copy Jobs menu This menu provides a list of the quick copy jobs stored on the printer hard disk The user can print or delete these jobs from the control panel If there are no quick copy jobs stored on the printer s hard disk this menu is not displayed on the control panel Table 7 25 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Quick Copy Jobs menu Menu Item Values JOBNAME Description The name of the quick copy job defined by the sender COPIES 1 1 to 999 DELETE The number of additional copies the user wants to print Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 283 Private Stored Jobs menu This menu provides a list of the private and stored jobs on the printer s hard disk The user can print or delete these jobs from the control panel Note If there are no private or stored jobs on the printer s hard disk this menu is not displayed on the control panel Table 7 26 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Private Stored Jobs menu Menu Item Values Description JOBNAME The name of the job defined by the sender stored on the printer s hard disk To print the job the user must enter the Personal Identification Number PIN that was assigned to the job in the driver 1 to 999 The number of copies the DELETE user wants to print 1 999 Prints the requested number of copies of the job DELETE Delet
267. parts from the 4500 series C7085 90921 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 353 Figure 8 17 Duplex unit Table 8 17 Duplex unit Description Parts for 4500 series xxG and below Parts for 4500 series xxH and above Parts for 4550 series 1 Duplex unit 1 C4083 67901 C4083 67901 C4083 67901 2 Duplexing feeder assembly 1 RG5 4055 000CN RG5 4055 000CN RG5 4055 000CN CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 354 Parts and diagrams C7085 90921 Alphabetical parts list CAUTION Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 329 The 4550 series has some different service parts from the 4500 series Table 8 18 Alphabetical parts list Description Parts for 4500 Parts for 4500 Parts for HP Reference series xxG and series xxH and Color LaserJet below above 4550 dubius AE SOD sheet paper feeder cazen feen feon 538 RET OTE NON 537 8 Bearing carousel XGS 0967 O0OCN_ XG9 0967 0000N XGS 035 000CN Bushing ITB left RB2 1158 000CN RB2 5185 000CN RB2 5185 000CN 8 10 RS5 1293 000CN RS5 1293 000CN RS5 1293 000CN Cable fusing connector RG5 3886 000CN RG5
268. per with low temperature dyes or thermography Preprinted forms or letterhead must use inks that can tolerate temperatures of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second Do not use any media that produces hazardous emissions or that melts offsets or discolors when exposed to 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second Do not use paper that has already been printed on or fed through a photocopier or printer Do not use paper with a watermark if you are printing solid patterns Do not duplex on glossy paper Doing so will result in jams and print quality problems Do not use transparencies that are not specified for use with HP Color LaserJet printers C7085 90921 CAUTION Note C7085 90921 Printing on special media Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media e For optimum results use conventional 75 g m 20 Ib xerographic paper e Verify that the paper is of good quality and free of cuts nicks tears spots loose particles dust wrinkles curls or bent edges Transparencies When printing on transparencies use the following guidelines e Do not send transparencies from Tray 2 to the rear output bin The toner will be warm and may cause the transparencies to stick together e Send transparencies to the top output bin e Handle transparencies using the edges Oils from your fingers can remain on the transparency and can cause print quality problems e Use only overhead transparencies recommended for use in this printer T
269. placement C7085 90921 16 Remove the carousel drive assembly see Carousel drive assembly on page 179 TN B AA ECO rugas F qum cacas a mj a IT a Li a E i a a Figure 6 64 Cartridge carousel replacement continuous toner level sensor assembly 2 of 6 17 Remove the laser shutter cover by pushing down on the silver tab in the middle and then rotating the shutter toward the rear of the printer See Figure 6 19 18 Remove the carousel brake see Figure 6 65 Figure 6 65 Cartridge carousel replacement carousel brake 3 of 6 19 Remove the small fan housing assembly see Left side fan on page 197 20 Remove the face down delivery assembly see Face down assembly on page 199 21 Remove the interlock delivery rod see Figure 6 66 callout 1 C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 201 Figure 6 66 Cartridge carousel replacement face down delivery rod 4 of 6 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Remove the door switch assembly see Top cover switch assembly on page 161 Remove the carousel grounding plate see Figure 6 66 callout 2 and the carousel position plate from the carousel mouting plate see Figure 6 66 callout 3 on the printer s right side Disconnect the cables going to PS 11 and the Continuous Toner Level Sensor CTLS assembly and remove the CTLS see Figure 6 39 Using a flat bladed screwdriver remove the clip securing the grounding cam and lift off t
270. plex unit Inspect the rear of the duplex unit and the duplex tray 13 3 Jam in duplex reverse unit Inspect the rear of the duplex unit and the duplex tray 13 2 Jam in fusing area Check the fuser assembly output assembly and duplex unit 13 1 Jam in fusing area Check the fuser assembly output assembly and duplex unit alternates with LEBER Check the middle front drawer Check and pull out the fuser 13 1 Jam Check in rear of drawer Check the rear of the middle front drawer Reseat the transfer roller 13 0 Jam in input feed area Check the input trays and duplex unit 13 12 Paper did not clear the input sensor in time Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 239 Table 7 5 HP Color LaserJet 4550 jam locations and associated error messages 13 10 Jam in duplex reverse unit Inspect the rear of the duplex unit and the duplex tray 13 6 Jam in fusing area Check the fuser assembly output assembly and duplex unit 13 25 Paper in the paper path is too long Check the Tray 1 area Check the entire paper path 13 24 Paper in the paper path is too short Check the Tray 1 area Check the entire paper path 13 23 Irregular jam in the paper 10 13 5 Jam in fusing area Check path Check the Tray 1 area the fuser assembly output Check the entire paper path assembly ae es Be density sensor can cause this error Clean the sensor 13 13 Jam in duplex paper feed 12 13 5 Jam Check in rear of drawer Check the rear
271. printer Use of non HP products can cause problems that require service that is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 143 Covers drawers and top and front assemblies Top cover To remove the top cover 1 Open the drum drawer top drawer until it clears the top cover and then remove the imaging drum protecting it from light CAUTION _ Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 2 Push the release button on the left side of the printer and open the top cover 3 Open the rear door s of the printer 4 Remove the air filter 5 Remove the two screws from the top cover as shown in Figure 6 2 6 Lift up on the rear corners of the top cover to release the plastic retaining tabs from the side cover 7 Rotate the back of the cover toward the left side of the printer then lift to remove it Top cover replacement tip e When replacing the top cover be sure to properly seat the two plastic retaining tabs on the front of the cover e Be sure to firmly seat the top cover E TT a Ea A A 11 a aiia nr 1231707 R Hat Minna Figure 6 2 Top cover removal and replacement rear view of printer 144 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Left side cover To remove the left side cover 1 Open the drum drawer top drawer and remove the imaging drum protecting it from light 2 Remove the top cover CAUTI
272. pt output along with the color values assigned to the object The HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer will recognize the PANTONE name and substitute the optimum color values for the printer based on color tables developed to provide the best possible match for each specific PANTONE e color within the printer s color gamut No special actions are necessary in the application program or the driver to enable this feature You have the option of turning off Automatic PANTONE calibration if you want to use application generated color values rather than HP generated color values To turn off Automatic PANTONE calibration e In Windows go to Properties Advanced and then Printer Features e Ona Macintosh go to the CMYK Inks page of the driver interface 248 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Note WWW Note C7085 90921 These applications are known to generate PostScript files with graphic objects preserving the PANTONE name Adobe Illustrator 7 and 8 Adobe PageMaker 6 5 CorelDRAW 7 8 and 9 Deneba Canvas 5 see note Macromedia Freehand 7 and 8 Micrografx Designer QuarkXpress 3 and 4 Subsequent versions of Deneba Canvas no longer generate compatible PANTONEO names Microsoft Publisher 2000 adds support for PANTONE colors but does not preserve the PANTONE name necessary for this feature to work The Automatic PANTONE calibration feature only applies to vector graphics not picture raster data such as scanned images and
273. pyl alcohol applied with a lint free static free wipe Try this only if the print defect is unacceptable and the only other alternative is replacing the imaging drum e Defects caused by exposure to light might clear up over time If severe replace the imaging drum Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 265 Repetitive defect ruler First occurrence of print defect Color developer 30 mm 1 2 in Black developer roller 37 mm 1 5 in Charge roller 40 mm 1 6 in ITB cleaning roller 40 mm 1 6 in Transfer roller 53 mm 2 1 in Fuser 131 mm 5 2 in Imaging drum 152 mm 6 in Figure 7 8 Repetitive defect ruler 266 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Table 7 9 Defect spacing chart Consumable Roller Distance Charge roller Imaging drum Black developer Color developer Fuser ITB ICL roller Transfer roller A o E CN i15 E T N LO V Figure 7 9 Imaging drum exposed to light proportions not to scale C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 267 Interface troubleshooting Note CAUTION Figure 7 10 Communications checks Communication problems are normally the customer s responsibility Time spent attempting to resolve these problems might not be covered by the product s Hewlett Packard warranty Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems If the printer is not connected to an MS DOS ba
274. quality If toner gets on your clothes wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Table 4 1 Cleaning the printer Component Cleaning Method Outside covers Use an HP Toner Cleaning Cloth part number 5090 3379 or a water dampened cloth Do not use solvents or ammonia based cleaners Inside general With a dry lint free cloth wipe any dust spilled toner and paper particles from the paper path area the registration roller and the toner cartridge cavity Paper pickup feed Use a water dampened lint free cloth and separation rollers Separation pad Use a dry lint free cloth Registration roller Use a dry lint free cloth Transfer roller Use a dry lint free cloth DO NOT TOUCH the transfer roller with your fingers Fuser Use a water dampened lint free cloth Cleaning spilled toner Defective toner cartridges can develop leaks Also after a paper jam has occurred some toner might remain on the rollers and guides inside the printer The pages that print immediately after the jam can pick up this toner CAUTION When cleaning the printer do not touch the transfer roller with the damp cloth or with your fingers Vacuum specifications Do not vacuum the printer or any spilled toner using a conventional vacuum Toner particles used in this product might be too fine for effective vacuuming and could result in damage to conventional vacuums A
275. quence to set network security o o oo ooo o 75 C7085 90921 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 47 Unpack the printer Figure 3 1 Package contents Package contents The following items are included with the printer 1 O N O OF A CQ Printer guides getting started guide HP Color LaserJet 4500 and 4550 and quick reference guide HP Color LaserJet 4500 only Software CD ROMs including printer drivers and software network administrator utilities online user guide and the HP JetDirect Print Server Installation Guide Power cord Control panel overlay for non English language users Parallel cable only included with the HP Color LaserJet 4500 and 4550 base model printer Imaging drum Four toner cartridges cyan C magenta M yellow Y and black K Tray 3 500 sheet paper feeder included only with the HP Color LaserJet 4500DN 4550DN and 4550HDN printers Duplex unit included only with the HP Color LaserJet 4500DN 4550DN and 4550HDN printers 48 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Unpacking the printer Note Save all of the packing materials in case you need to repack and transport the printer at a later date WARNING The base and N model printers weigh approximately 57 kg 125 lb The DN model weighs 77 kg 169 lb with Tray 3 and the duplex unit installed HP recommends having two or more people lift or move any of t
276. r To remove the ITB drawer middle drawer cover 1 Open the ITB drawer middle drawer until it stops 2 Remove the two screws in the top of the ITB drawer middle drawer cover as shown in Figure 6 9 3 Lift up on the cover slightly Tilt the top toward you and then down to clear the two plastic retaining tabs located in the lower middle of the cover and remove the cover ITB drawer middle drawer cover replacement tip Secure the two plastic retaining tabs at the bottom of the cover prior to reassembling the ITB drawer middle drawer cover ITB drawer middle drawer cover removal and replacement Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 151 Figure 6 10 ITB drawer middle drawer To remove the ITB drawer middle drawer 1 Pull the ITB drawer middle drawer completely out until it stops 2 Remove the intermediate transfer belt ITB 3 Lift the drawer clearing the first set of guide wheels from the guide rail Figure 6 10 Pull the guide rails until the next set of guide wheels stop and then lift to clear the second set of guide wheels from the guide rails m a oe e SS SS ITB drawer middle drawer removal and replacement 152 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Figure 6 11 C7085 90921 Control panel To remove the control panel Remove the top cover Open the ITB drawer middle drawer Remove the black self tapping screw as shown in Figure 6 11 Pull the bottom of the control panel
277. r The paper output from the fusing unit is then detected by the delivery unit paper sensor PS7 The pressure release sensor PS6 detects when the fusing roller pressure is off The printer uses a deflector to switch between the face up bin and face down bin When the face up bin is open the paper is delivered to the face up bin When the face up bin is closed paper will be delivered to the face down bin see Figure 5 31 If the face down bin becomes full it is detected by the face down bin paper full sensor PS9 PS9 Face down delivery roller d Deflector w Fixing unit Face up tray 3 a LK iz Fixing delivery i A Lower fixing roller PS6 roller Fusing and delivery unit Chapter 5 Theory of operation 127 Table 5 6 Fusing and delivery unit components Reference Description Fusing motor Fusing unit pressure release sensor Delivery unit paper sensor Face down bin full sensor Duplex unit paper path Theory The duplex unit enables printing on both sides of a page With two sided printing known as duplexing the back side of the page is printed first Then the page is sent through the duplex unit where it is flipped over and sent back through the printer for printing on the front Power supply There are two power supplies for the duplexing unit power supplied by the printer and power supplied by the internal power supply
278. r to send the print image data The formatter PCB also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for two ElO cards and additional memory DIMMs Never replace both the formatter PCB and the DC controller PCB at the same time Doing so will result in a complete loss of data During the removal and replacement of the formatter data is stored in the DC controller If the DC controller is also replaced before completing a power on sequence all data is lost Control panel The formatter PCB sends and receives printer status and command data via a control panel PCB If you replace the formatter PCB updates will be sent to the DC controller PCB and vice versa Power supplies C7085 90921 Power supply overview There are three power supplies used to power various sections of the printer There is an AC DC power supply and a high voltage power supply See Chapter 6 for instructions on accessing the power supplies AC DC power supply The low voltage power supply circuit supplies 24 VDC and 5 VDC required for the printer and 3 3 VDC and 5 VDC required for the video controller It also supplies 24 VDC for the paper pick up motor scanner motor and the high voltage power supply PCB as well as 5 VDC for the sensors and the ICs on the DC controller PCB The front door switch or the rear door switch is deactivated by opening the drum drawer ITB drawer toner access cover or delivery door These switches are in a series an
279. r 6 Removal and replacement 203 Toner catch tray and paper transport assembly To remove the paper transport assembly 1 Remove the fusing assembly 2 Remove the toner catch tray by pushing down on the clip in the middle and sliding it straight out as shown in callout 1 Figure 6 69 Remove the screw from the rear of the assembly callout 2 Slide the paper transport assembly toward your left until it stops Tilt the assembly up to clear the drive shaft coupler on your right and carefully work the assembly out of the printer Paper transport assembly replacement tip Verify that all tabs are under the metal slots two on the right one on the left and that the drive shaft coupler engages properly Figure 6 69 Paper transport assembly removal and replacement 204 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Paper pick rollers To remove the paper pick rollers Remove Tray 2 Determine which version of the printer you are working with and follow the instructions provided below for the appropriate version of the printer For 4500 series printer serial numbers xxG or lower The paper pick roller shaft is held in place with two white plastic clips Pull the paper pick roller shaft down until it releases from the two plastic clips shown in callout 1 Figure 6 70 For 4500 series printer serial numbers xxH or higher and 4550 series printrs Note The paper pick roller shaft is held in place with two black plastic clips Do n
280. r LaserJet 4500 DN C4094A HP Color LaserJet 4550 C7085A HP Color LaserJet 4550N C7086A HP Color LaserJet 4550DN C7087A HP Color LaserJet 4550HDN C7088A Two versions of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers are available Before servicing the printer or ordering parts you will need to identify which printer version you are servicing For more information see page 140 The HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printer unless otherwise specified is equivalent to the later version of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printer 18 Printer description C7085 90921 CAUTION Figure 1 4 C7085 90921 Power and regulatory information The identification labels on the rear of the printer also contain power rating and regulatory information as shown in Figure 1 4 Converting the voltage on the printer can damage the printer Do not use any voltage other than the operating voltage Any attempt to convert operating voltages will void the product warranty for example attempting to change a 110V printer to a 220V printer POWER RATING 220 240V pm A Apparaten skall C anslutas till b T jordat natuttag Y Tested To Compty With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE This product conforms with CDRH radiation performance standard 21 CFR chapter 1 sub chapter J Complies with Canadian EMC cl ass B requirements MANUFACTURED August 97 HEWLETT PACKARD 11311 CHINDEN BL
281. r cable stays 2 Remove the two screws from the top cover switch assembly callout 2 Figure 6 18 on page 162 3 Slide the switch assembly to the left side of the printer and then lift it up and out For printer HP Color LaserJet 4500 serial numbers xxH or higher and HP Color LaserJet 4550 printers 1 Open the drum drawer top drawer until it stops and remove the imaging drum protecting it from light Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 2 Free the cables from the five cable stays callout 3 Figure 6 18 on page 162 3 Remove the two screws that secure the switch assembly and lower cable guide to the printer frame callout 1 Figure 6 19 on page 162 4 Pullthe rear door switch arm toward the front of the printer while lifting the switch assembly up and out slightly taking care not to damage the cable guide 5 Release the five plastic retaining clips securing the switch assembly to the lower cable guide to remove the switch assembly Replacement tip When replacing the top cover switch assembly make sure the cable is lying flat in the cable guide Secure the two tabs on the right side of the switch assembly cable guide before snapping the three tabs in place on the left side of the assembly Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 161 m T i a i j j i es Pj a gt M 7 Figure 6 18 Top cover switch assembly removal and replacement Se ala ID P
282. r is reset to 0 e Transfer kit percentage of life remaining gauge is reset to 100 percent e Fuser kit percentage of life remaining gauge is reset to 100 percent e Printer serial number C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 307 Diagrams Figure 7 22 P This section contains wiring diagrams and photos of all internal printer components PS10 PS3102 a P Psg A gt TA AP MIS a PS6 PS3103 s d PS3104 Sa PS3105 PS3001 g Sensor locations Table 7 32 Sensor function and locations S1 ITB unit life sensor S7 Delivery paper sensor S8 Cassette paper sensor Carousel home position sensor Toner cartridge press sensor Toner level sensor 308 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Table 7 32 Sensor function and locations continued Name Function Face up sensor Reversing unit stationary paper sensor Duplex pick up paper sensor Side registration home position sensor Continuous toner level sensor Figure 7 23 Printer solenoids and clutches Table 7 33 Solenoid and clutch functions and locations Multipurpose tray pick up solenoid Paper pick up solenoid C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 309 Figure 7 24 Printer motors and fans Table 7 34 Printer motors and fans Name Code Description e rc maior a aro meto arouse ve un jw ona motor um dv ni as recam motor e mam me eetwicner Figure 7 25 Miscellaneous sensors and clutches 310 Trouble
283. r or a workstation and enables you to place the printer closer to your network users The printer control panel will have an additional menu ElO Menu if the printer is configured with ElO cards See the chapter on using the printer control panel in the online user guide Installation of cards and network configuration should be performed by a network administrator The HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printer supports the optional 5 GB hard disk drive included with the HP Color LaserJet 4550HDN printer The HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printer does not support an optional hard disk drive HP JetDirect print servers HP JetDirect print servers network cards can be installed in one of the printer ElO slots These cards support multiple network protocols and operating systems HP JetDirect print servers facilitate network management by allowing you to connect a printer directly to your network at any location HP JetDirect print servers also support the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP which provides network managers with remote printer management and troubleshooting through HP Web JetAdmin software Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 67 LocalTalk I O The LocalTalk interface enables you to print directly from a stand alone Apple Macintosh computer or from a Macintosh computer on a Local Talk network For specific information about configuring your computer and printer to print through a Local Talk interface refer to the p
284. r path section of the printer In the 4550 series only CANCEL JOB will abort the test Rotates the carousel and the developers In the 4550 series only CANCEL JOB will abort the test Turns on the drum drive motor that drives the drum and ITB In the 4550 series only CANCEL JOB will abort the test Displays the state for each of the paper path sensors and switches In the 4550 series only this test will continue running until the CANCEL JOB key is pressed Displays the state for each of the door and drawer switches In the 4550 series only this test will continue running until the CANCEL JOB key is pressed Paper path test 1 Press the ITem key until you see EHGIHE DIRGZS PAPER PATH TEST 2 Eigse the key to activate the test While the test is running you will see EHGIHE DIHGS ELA H displayed in the front panel The test takes approximately 15 seconds to run Components exercised by the paper path test include the fusing motor M1 paper path pick up motor M2 and associated gears and assemblies The paper pick up roller for tray 2 can be activated by manually activating the paper pick solenoid SL2 This test will not pick up paper and move it through the paper path To test this function simply run a configuration page For multiple pages select continuous configuration page in the control panel 302 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Note C7085 90921 The paper path test allows
285. r returns to No action required the RE HL state upon completion of this page PRINTING COLOR GUIDE Description Action The color guide page is being printed The printer returns to No action required the HEHE state upon completion of this page PROCESSING JOB Description Action The printer is processing the current job No action required READY Description Action The printer is online and ready to receive data and no status or device attendance messages are pending REINSTALL TRANSFER BELT Description This message occurs if you do not have the intermediate transfer belt installed in the printer or if the home position marks on the ITB are not detected by sensor PS5 Note home positioning marks on the ITB Both the ITB and the imaging drum are driven by the drum motor M4 The intermediate transfer belt must be rotating before PS5 is able to detect the No action required Action Check SW1 Figure 7 31 for correct operation and make sure the cables are connected Verify that the ITB is installed in the printer em If the ITB is installed and seated properly verify that PS5 is not damaged PS5 is located on the ITB assembly see Figure 7 25 If the sensor appears damaged replace the entire ITB assembly Clean PS5 see Figure 7 25 for its location Verify all wiring within the ITB drawer Note the connection on the ITB assembly located on the front lower left hand corner of the as
286. rademark for color PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions TrueType is a U S trademark of Apple Computer Inc UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Windows MS Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Conventions Hint WWW Note CAUTION WARNING This is a combined Service Manual for both the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printer and the HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printer The HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printer shares most characteristics of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printer except where stated This manual uses the following conventions COLOR is used to emphasize items that are important to the material under discussion Bold is used for emphasis particularly in situations where italic type would be confusing Italic type is used to indicate related documents or emphasis Commands you use on a computer keyboard or on the printer control panel are shown in Keycap Two examples are Select and Value COURIER type indicates text that you type on a computer keyboard exactly as shown Hints are used to suggest an action that might simplify the process World Wide Web references give Internet addresses for additional information and information updates Notes contain important information set off fr
287. re 7 31 indicates the drawer is open When the drawer is closed a plastic protrusion on the lower left corner of the drawer pivots an arm allowing SW1 to toggle to the open position CLOSE UPPER REAR DRAWER Description Switch SW5 refer to Figure 7 29 monitors the closing of the printer s upper rear door this door allows you to access the fusing assembly When the fusing door is closed a tab on the rear door pushes a door switch actuator that runs along the left side of the printer and closes SW5 218 Troubleshooting Action Close the ITB drawer If the message persists remove the printer s left side cover and inspect the mechanical linkage that closes SW1 Refer to the wiring diagram to verify the wiring the two wire connector should be firmly seated to SW1 and the wiring harness should be firmly seated to connector J1003 of the DC controller PCB If the message persists use an ohmmeter to verify functionality of SW1 Action 1 Close the upper rear drawer N If the message persists remove the printer s left side cover and inspect the mechanical linkage of SW5 and the lever continued on next page C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error messages continued 3 Refer to the wiring diagram and verify all connections J103 of the DC controller PCB and to SW5 Verify they are firmly seated Verify that both the drum and ITB drawers are firmly closed closing these drawe
288. rear door Open the ITB drawer and carefully inspect for any media Hemove any jammed media Make sure that the transfer roller is securely in place 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY alternates with PRESS GO TO CONTINUE Description Action More data has been received from the computer 1 To continue printing press Go Only the than fits in the printer s internal memory P 9 p Go y amount of data that fits in the printer s internal memory is printed To cancel the job press Cancel Job Add more memory to resolve the problem 22 ElO X BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with PRESS GO TO CONTINUE Description Action The ElO buffer for the ElO card in slot X has l 1 The current data in the print buffer will be lost overflowed during a busy state 2 Press Go to resume printing and then resend the job 22 PARALLEL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with PRESS GO TO CONTINUE Description Action Indicates the parallel butter has overflowed 1 The current data in the print buffer will be lost 2 Press Go to resume printing and then resend the job C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 227 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages continued 40 ElO X DATA ERROR alternates with PRESS GO TO CONTINUE 4500 Or 40 ElO BAD TRANSMISSION 4550 Description A connection with the card in the specified slot has been broken Note Action 1 Check that all cables are connected
289. rence guide and getting started guide C4084 99021 HP Color LaserJet 4500 DN documentation bundle quick reference guide and getting started guide C4094 99020 HP LaserJet 4550 Series Getting Started Guide C7085 90901 HP Color LaserJet 4550 4500 Series Quick Reference Service Guide 9963 7921 HP LaserJet 4550 4500 Series Service Manual C7085 90921 HP Color LaserJet 4550 4500 Series Printer Service and Support CD ROM C7085 60102 HP Color LaserJet 4550 Series Printer Online User Guide C7085 60101 Chapter 2 Service approach 43 Warranty statement Hewlett Packard warranty statement HP Color LaserJet 4500 1 year limited warranty 4500 N 4500 DN Printer and 4550 4550N 4550DN 4550HDN Printer 1 10 HP warrants HP hardware accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or like new HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions for the period specified above due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such de
290. rent job might not print correctly Some downloaded fonts might have been deleted Action Try printing simplified pages If this does not resolve the problem add printer memory MEMORY SETTINGS CHANGED Description The I O buffering settings were changed by the printer because there is not enough memory available to use the previous settings Action No action required However adding printer memory might prevent this from occurring MEMORY SHORTAGE JOB CLEARED Description The available memory was not enough to continue printing The remainder of the job was canceled Action No action required However adding printer memory might prevent this from occurring MEMORY SHORTAGE PAGE SIMPLIFIED Description The printer s adaptive data compression had to resort to lossy compression to fit raster graphics in the available memory This has caused a data loss in the raster output NO JOB TO CANCEL Description Cancel Job was pressed but there is no active job or buffered data to cancel The printer automatically returns to the REHE state Action 1 Reduce the complexity of the page to improve the print quality 2 Adding memory will not correct this problem Action No action required Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 221 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error messages continued OFFLINE Description Action The printer is offline and there are no error messages Press Go to return the pr
291. ress the SELECT key Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 299 Diagnostics mode CAUTION Note This section provides an overview of the diagnostic tools incorporated into the HP Color LaserJet 4500 4500N 4500DN printer and the HP Color LaserJet 4550 4550N 4550DN 4550HDN printer Take caution when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury Only trained service personnel should access the diagnostics mode with the skins removed There are two diagnostic sections built into the firmware one for the formatter and the other for the engine Each section contains different tests that allow the service technician to verify printer functionality While in diagnostics mode there are no error messages associated with these tests Therefore determination of the problem will rely on the technician s skill To exit diagnostics mode turn off the printer In the 4550 series you can abort a test run by pressing the CANCEL JOB key and holding it down until the display shows the menu again In some cases it will take several seconds To cancel the NVRAM test while it is running press the CANCEL JOB key and hold it down until the display show the menu again NVRAM is put back in its original form and an error is logged in the Fault log When the Attention LED is on then there ahs been an error in the test Press the MENU key to get to the Fault log menu the Irem key to see the different log messages and the VAL UE key to scroll th
292. rinter description C7085 90921 Space requirements The printer must have the following amounts of space above and around it 330 mm 405 mm 13 inches 550 mm 22 inches 16 inches 755 mm 30 inches 660 mm 26 inches lt 2 2 inches 121 mm 4 75 inches i 497 mm 19 6 inches Figure 1 5 Space requirements 1 Top view 2 Side view C7085 90921 Chapter 1 Printer description 21 Note Electrical specifications Table 1 3 lists the electrical specifications required to run the printer safely Table 1 3 Electrical specifications Item 110 volt models 220 volt models Power requirements 100 127 V 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 220 240 V 10 50 60 Hz 4 2 Hz Power consumption typical During printing During standby During PowerSave Off 470 W average 80 W average 4500 32 W 4550 0 W 480 W average 90 W average 4500 32W 4550 0 W Minimum recommended circuit capacity for typical product 4500 16 0A at 120 V 4550 10 2 A at 120 V 4500 7 1 A at 220 V 4550 5 1 Aat 220 V When the printer is in standby off mode it continues to consume a minimal amount of energy This information is preliminary and might not be current Please see hitp Awww hp com support 114550 for current information Environmental specifications Keep the printer within the environmental conditions shown in Table 1 4 for op
293. rinter s getting started guide and the HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide CPU The HP Color LaserJet 4500 formatter PCB incorporates a 133 MHz RISC processor The HP Color LaserJet 4550 formatter PCB incorporates a 200 MHz RISC processor Fast InfraRed Receiver optional The HP Fast InfraRed Receiver enables cableless printing from any IrDA compliant portable device such as a laptop computer to the HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer when the optional FIR accessory is installed The printing connection is maintained by positioning the sending FIR port within operating range Note that the connection can be blocked by objects such as a hand paper direct sunlight or any bright light shining into either the sending or receiving FIR port System requirements In order to print with the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver you will need e the receiver connected to this printer e IrDA compliant portable or other IR capable host supporting IRLPT or JetSend Communications Technology over IR e Microsoft Windows 9x Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Mac 8 5 with a LaserWriter 8 6 or higher driver Note Older non IrDA compliant portable computers might not be compatible with the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver If you experience problems when attempting to print with the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver contact the manufacturer of or dealer for your portable computer to verify compatibility with the IrDA standard For more information see th
294. rm ee daa e 271 Pining a menu MWA s cesarob o E qe ANE Roo oe RC 8d ER Oe Xe s 271 Information MENU sesa ia maade get mre de we we Se we ee eee eee ee 273 Paper Handling Menu 2 cc teen eee teens 274 Contigurati n Men i uoti dris cg oie deg Reh qup pom deta unde Rege we ded ed Gow ode dre ane Soe ew 276 Printing Menu Pr 278 fea eaea e aa E UA 280 EIO MEMU serea araea a a a et e ed aaan ees ee tet 280 Calibration Men seoir eadi ets ie grand Bigg ee bo a N A 281 Resets Melendi aana 282 C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 209 Troubleshooting tools 0 ee nr 285 Embedded Web SeLVel 3 54 2 3 iets heed or tees ha di hee a 285 Printer configuration page 2 ce eee eee ees 287 EVO MP DP CE 292 Hard disk file directory page llli III 292 A RA 293 Accessing the service mode o ooocooo eee hrs 293 See Ko ranas id dt acy een See 296 Transfer maintenance COUNt 2 0 0 0 cee eee ee eens 296 Fuser maintenance COUNT 4 4 e0 A e UE MCap OR DR ee aca Cv wea e dl s A 296 Color Bade COUN suere didt as wakes ear ad de d e oa delete rq od as io d earn See as 296 Total page COUN iuc A Y dC ERR Re ee ee ac ats pira det eU Rene 297 Clear evert IOQ zuo ant eae OR VR vi Rn Saeed ta co a Rocks iie Uu we 297 Paper tray size functional test nananana aaea re 297 DIAGNOSICS Mode ERR 300 Entering GiagnOsilGs MOJO xd acu eee dus ate EI hose hes ee Bats 300 Formatter diagnostics n n out a
295. rollers are rolling Place the wipe up against each roller in turn keeping it in place for five to 10 seconds 264 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Repetitive defects troubleshooting CAUTION AaBbC amp AaBbCc _ AaBoC AaBbCc AaBbC C7085 90921 Repetitive defects are defects that occur on the page Most repetitive defects are caused by problems with one of the following Table 7 8 e Developer roller e Fuser e Charge roller e Imaging drum e Cleaning roller e Transfer belt e Transfer roller See page 266 for the repetitive defect ruler and Table 7 9 for the defect spacing chart Do not expose the imaging drum to light and be careful not to scratch or get fingerprints on the drum surface during cleaning Do not blow on the imaging drum Imaging drum defects Causes Damage such as scratches or dents on the imaging drum These usually appear as black or white marks on the page e Paper dust adhering to the imaging drum These usually appear as white marks in the dark printed areas of the page e Exposure of portions of the imaging drum to light This causes light sections in the printed output The life of the imaging drum is shortened by exposure to light Actions e Print at least four configuration pages to determine if the defect repeats in the same horizontal orientation e Inspect the imaging drum for scratches dents or other damage Replace if needed e Ifthe problem is dust remove the dust with isopro
296. rom the printer driver Matching PANTONE colors The PANTONEe Matching System colors are specified as CMYK colors as supported in many graphics software applications This color matching system is useful for matching printer output to a specific color for example a logo See the documentation for your software application for instructions on using PANTONE colors For more information about using PANTONE colors see the Readme file for the PANTONE color matching system included on the printing system CD ROM Note Color settings halftone settings and print media affect the appearance of PANTONE colors To optimize PANTONEQG certified colors use the default PostScript 3 emulation driver settings and HP LaserJet paper Automatic PANTONE calibration Automatic PANTONE calibration generates high quality PANTONEQ colors from the PANTONE color name automatically providing the best possible color calibration in the HP Color LaserJet 4550 printers An example of a PANTONE name is PANTONE 286C VC When printing PANTONE colors Automatic PANTONE calibration is the default setting for HP Color LaserJet 4550 printers This feature automatically converts PANTONEQ colors to optimal color values for the HP Color LaserJet 4550 using the PANTONE color name in the data stream sent to the printer Most application programs that support the use of PANTONE colors for graphic objects will include the PANTONE name in the PostScri
297. rs also closes SW4 see Figure 7 31 Note Closing the rear door the drum drawer and the ITB drawers closes SW4 and SW5 When either of these switches is open the 24 V supply is disabled This safety feature protects the operator from any high voltages CLOSE TOP COVER Description Action SW2 refer to Figure 7 29 indicates whether or not the 4 printer s toner access cover is closed When the toner access cover is closed a lever is pushed down This in turn If the message persists remove the printer s top rotates a pivot forward opening the top cover switch SW2 assembly cover and verify all mechanical linkages associated with SW2 see Figure 7 29 3 Verify that the connector on J1003 of the DC controller PCB is firmly seated Close the top cover m CLOSE UPPER FRONT DRAWER Description Action The drawer that holds the imaging drum the drum drawer is open Switch SW3 refer to Figure 7 31 indicates that the drawer is open When the drawer is closed a plastic protrusion on the lower left corner of the drawer pivots an If the message persists remove the printer s left side arm that allows SW3 to toggle to the open position cover and inspect the mechanical linkage that closes SWS 3 Refer to the wiring diagram and verify the wiring The two wire connector should be firmly seated to SW3 and the wiring harness should be firmly seated to connector J1003 of the DC controller PCB 4 Ifthe message persis
298. rs for the supplies To print the supplies status page 1 2 3 On the printer control panel press MENU until THFOENATION MEME appears Press ITEM until PRIHT SUPPLIES STATUIS FRE appears Press SELECT to print the supplies status page After the process is completed the printer will return to the EZB state Interpreting the supplies status page The following sample illustrates a supplies status page HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printers Wah tisano Supply Status Page 1 Figure 7 14 Supplies status page Print cartridge information 1 2 3 4 Black Toner Gauge Cyan Toner Gauge Magenta Toner Gauge Yellow Toner Gauge Other supplies information 5 6 7 Imaging drum kit Transfer kit Fuser kit Printer information 8 Printer usage totals 290 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Usage page The usage page lists a page count for each size of media that has passed through the printer This page count includes the number of pages that were printed on one side the number that were printed on two sides duplexed and totals of the two printing methods for each media size It also lists the average percentage of page coverage for each toner color To print the usage page 1 On the printer control panel press MENU until IHFORMATICON MEHL appears 2 Press ITEM until PRIHT LAGE FOGE appears 3 Press SELECT to print the usage page After the process is completed the printer will return to the READY state
299. s Menutem Values Descipion I O TIMEOUT 5 to 300 SECONDS Amount of time the printer default 15 waits to receive data before switching to another port I O BUFFER Allocates memory to I O ports I O BUFFER SIZE nnnnnnK Amount of memory default 100K allocated to the I O ports PARALLEL HIGH Allows faster parallel SPEED communications supported by newer computers PARALLEL ON Turns bidirectional parallel ADV FUNCTIONS OFF communication on and off Denotes default setting Only appears if 1 O BUFFER is ON Table 7 20 HP Color LaserJet 4550 I O Menu settings Menu Item Values Description PARALLEL HIGH Allows faster parallel SPEED communications supported by newer computers EIO Menu If an Enhanced Input Output EIO card for example an HP JetDirect Print Server has been installed in the printer an additional menu is available This additional menu provides a way to configure the EIO accessory and to adjust network interface settings For information about HP JetDirect EIO menus see the HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide This guide is included with the HP Color LaserJet 4500N and 4500DN printers and the 4550N 4550DN and 4550HDN printers and is also available through HP Direct See Appendix D in the online user guide for ordering information 280 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Calibration Menu This printer features automatic internal calibration to produce optimum color for m
300. s Row four is incremented after every end of page Rows one to four are counted through the engine Rows five and six are driver requests The tray count is incremented based on the tray that is selected by the firmware not the tray that is selected by the user Media size count is incremented based on the media size that is selected by the user Media type count is incremented based on 1 the media type that is selected by the user when the media is pulled from tray 1 and 2 the media type configured on the tray when media is pulled from tray 2 or tray 3 Fuse mode count is incremented twice for duplexed sheets once when the front side is fused and once when the back side is fused 14 Calibration density settings On the bottom row of text there are four separate blocks of numbers The first block is for cyan second for magenta third for yellow and the last is for black Make sure the numbers are not near zero if so no calibration was done Note Do not print the configuration page until the printer is ready or calibration will not occur C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 289 Supplies status page The supplies status page shows the remaining life for the following printer consumables and kits toner cartridges all colors drum kit transfer kit fuser kit It also lists useful printer information including the total number of pages printed in monochrome and in color the printer serial number and the part numbe
301. s or 3 6 250 color months for color pages pages Transfer kit TROMSEER EIT iT 100 000 50 months for R96 5009 000CN pee hae black and black and white see Table 8 1 white only only pages or pages or 12 5 months for 25 000 color color pages pages Fuser kit ESER KIT OT 100 000 50 months for R96 5007 0O00CN E pe ETT black and black and white 110V white only only pages or R96 5008 000CN pages or 25 months for 220V 50 000 color color pages see Table 8 1 pages Approximate lives are based on 2 000 pages per month The approximate average A4 Letter size page count is based on 5 coverage of individual toner colors Page counts are only estimations usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary Hewlett Packard recommends the use of HP products in this printer Use of non HP products can cause problems the require service not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 83 Locating consumables Figure 4 3 illustrates the location of each consumable item QUA UG Location of consumables Figure 4 3 Toner cartridges 1 Imaging drum cartridge 2 3 Intermediate transfer belt 4 Transfer roller 5 Arr filters 6 Fuser 7 Paperfeed and separation rollers C7085 90921 84 Printer maintenance Replacing consumable items C7085
302. s a problem with the network configuration Some sharing devices on networks might generate a blank page as a separator e Check with the network administrator The printer might be feeding two or more pages at once because the paper is difficult to separate The sealing tape has been left in the toner cartridge The toner cartridge is empty or defective The laser scanner door does not open properly e Remove and reseat the toner cartridge Check the laser scanner shutter door for proper operation The toner cartridge guide is damaged improperly positioned or missing There is no transfer roller voltage Perform the Half Self Test Functional Check to check all other electrophotographic processes Replace the transfer roller if necessary The high voltage connectors are mounted on the high voltage power supply HVPS PCA and protrude into the toner cartridge cavity Checkthe springs for functionality Clean if dirty replace if defective or missing The HVPS PCA is defective The DC controller PCA is defective There is no developing bias Clean the HVPS contacts With no developing bias charge toner is not attracted to the drum There is no drum ground path e Check the drum ground The laser scanner cable assembly is defective The page length and margins are not set correctly for the paper size Verify that the ribbon connector at J1307 of the HVPS is properly seated If the HVPS has been removed recen
303. s for example Printing process inkjet press or laser technology for example Overhead lighting Personal differences in perception of color Software applications Printer drivers PC operating system Monitors Video cards and drivers For most users the best method for matching colors on your screen to your printer is to print SRGB colors The HP Color LaserJet 4550 uses HP ColorSmart Il which uses sRGB and automatically optimizes color output Keep in mind the above factors when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 247 Four color printing CMYK Cyan magenta yellow and black CMYK are the inks used by a printing press The process is often called four color printing CMYK data files are typically used by and originate from graphic arts printing and publishing environments The HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printer is optimized to print RGB colors for a good match to the screen but will also accept CMYK colors through the PostScript printer driver By default the HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printer interorets CMYK data according to the Standard Web Offset Press SWOP standard This standard defines how a particular set of CMYK inks should behave The printer performs a SWOP color map and internal half tones to emulate a SWOP CMYK press Emulations for Dainippon Press DIC and Euro standard CMYK inks used in the Far East and Europe are also available and can be selected f
304. s the size and type of media currently configured for each input tray Also lists the current Tray 1 mode A4 letter override setting and default size setting Density settings Color LaserJet 4500 series only Lists the current density settings Printing Menu Color LaserJet 4500 series only Lists the current settings of the printing menu items Color blocks The color blocks verify color printing ability of the printer The color blocks in the middle of the page are primary colors and the color blocks surrounding the page are secondary colors Each color is shown in 100 75 50 and 25 percent fill Printer usage information 4500 series only 4550 series usage information is on the Usage Page Shows the number of pages printed for the following items Row 1 Paper size 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Custom Envelope Legal Executive B5 Letter A4 Row 2 Fuse modes 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Normal Heavy OHT Gloss Envelope Row 3 Source tray 000000 000000 000000 000000 Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Duplex Row 4 Language 000000 000000 000000 PCL pages PS pages XL pages Row 5 Media types 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Plain Pre printed Letterhead Transparency Prepunched Labels Row 6 Media types 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Bond Recycled Color Card Gloss Heavy 288 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Row 1 Paper size Note For rows one to three the page count is incremented after every ten page
305. sa lueteltuja k ytt j n teht v ksi tarkoitettuja yll pitotoimia jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoisty kaluja VARO Mik li kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina nakymattomalle lasersateilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa Al katso s teeseen VARNING Om laserprinterns skyddsh lje ppnas d apparaten r i funktion uts ttas anv ndaren f r osynlig laserstr lning Betrakta ej str len Tiedot laitteessa k ytett v n laserdiodin s teilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 770 795 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser 38 Printer description C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Service approach Chapter contents DEM ICE ADDI OAC Nc 4c be a ae ae aa oe Pe RG ow we aces oe Os ea gle ee eA 40 Parts and SUDplIOS Tr 41 no PA 41 Ordering consumables oooo eee eee eens 41 Exchange POUM morra oe a ox aded ee a6 ee de d C d ao deed a S 42 COMSUMADISS M ie pe Ge Ko Sew mba GG E a ee ee aia 42 World Wide Web 1 6 Rss 42 HP Service Parts Information Compact Disc 0 0 ccc ee eee 42 HP Support Assistant Compact Disc 0 0 0 cc eens 42 Ordering related documentation and software 0 0 0 ccc eee 43 Warranty statement 44 Hewlett Packard warranty statement 0 0 00 0 ccc eee ee ees 44 Onsite service agreements 45 Chapter 2 Service approach 39 Service approach Printer repair normally begins by using the printer s internal diagnostics and the three step process be
306. sed host proceed to Table 7 10 Communications check Table 7 10 Communications check Action Is your computer configured These parameters are required to communicate with the printer to the parameters described Verify that the configuration of the computer s communications in the configuration port matches these parameters instructions Note If these parameters are not set properly an error might display on the control panel ElO troubleshooting If the printer contains an optional HP JetDirect print server and you cannot communicate with the printer over the network verify the operation of the print server Print an HP JetDirect configuration page If the message I O CARD READY does not appear on the configuration page see the troubleshooting section of the HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide If the host system and printer still are not communicating replace the formatter PCB and the ElO card and reconfigure the printer If the problem persists a protocol analyzer might be needed to find the source of the problem HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical switch box products without proper surge protection These devices generate high transient voltages that cause permanent damage to the formatter PCB This circumstance is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty HP Color LaserJet 4550 serier primers GASES HP ElO configuration page 268 Troublesh
307. see the HP Color LaserJet 4500 User Guide or go to http Awww hp com cposupport prodhome hpcolorlas7857 html HP Color LaserJet 4550 For the most current regulatory statements regarding the HP Color LaserJet 4550 series please see the HP Color LaserJet 4550 User Guide or go to http www hp com support 1j4550 36 Printer description C7085 90921 Safety information Note C7085 90921 Laser safety statement The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since 1 August 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States The printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation Material Safety Data Sheet The Toner Cartridge Drum Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS can be obtained by visiting the website at http www ljsupplies com planetpartners datasheets html International customers should see support information in this guide for appropriate phone numbers and information Toner safety Hewlett Packard encourages responsible disposal of HP LaserJet printer consu
308. sembly When the drawer is closed the connector mates with a receptacle connector on the drawer Verify the connector and all wiring are in good condition Make sure there is no paper in the connector at the base of the drawer 6 Verify that the drum motor M4 is rotating both the imaging drum and the ITB Place the printer in diagnostic mode and run the drum test to verify drive spindle movement for both the imaging drum and ITB 7 Ifthe imaging drum is not rotating verify the imaging drum connector is firmly seated into the connector J204 of the developing PCB Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 223 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error messages continued REMOVE PAPER TOP OUTPUT BIN Description The top output bin holds 250 sheets of paper Sensor PS9 see Figure 7 21 along with its sensor flag detects the height of the output paper stack Perform the action items if this message appears with no paper in the output bin Action 1 Verify that the PS9 sensor flag and arm move freely and its movement is not blocked see Figure 7 21 2 Verify PS9 is free of dust and debris top assembly cover must be removed to access sensor Verify all connectors are firmly seated Refer to the wiring diagram PS9 a three wire sensor plugs into a through wall connector on the printer s chassis and then into a 14 pin wire harness which plugs into J206 on the developing PCB see Figure 7 21 All signals from the developing P
309. sensitive drum 112 status page printing 290 toner cartridges 83 142 Index 373 replacing air filters 91 consumables 83 85 fuser 92 fuser kit 92 gears 193 imaging drum 88 ITB 90 paper rollers 94 parts 139 toner cartridges 86 transfer kits 89 reservoir waste toner 109 Resets Menu 282 resetting printer 97 retaining ring screws 141 reversed paper sensor PS3101 122 129 reversing motor M3102 129 reversing operations duplex unit 129 RFI Radio Frequency Interference shield removing 156 RGB Standard SRGB 246 right rear cover removing 148 right rear fan diagram 316 right side assemblies removing 168 right side cover removing 146 right side fan removing 195 RISC processor 68 RJ 45 ports 66 rollers cleaning methods 78 cleaning roller 114 feed 122 fusing delivery 127 last paper detection 125 pick up 124 primary charge 105 primary transfer 107 registration 123 removing 205 207 replacing 89 94 secondary transfer 107 115 transfer 114 ruler repetitive defects 266 S safety information 37 scanner assembly removing 157 operations 120 protective cover 139 scatter background 254 Screen Match 246 screwdrivers 140 screws types of 141 SDRAM DIMMs adding 98 supported 16 sealing tape removing 52 secondary transfer process 107 secondary transfer roller operations 115 paper path 122 secondary transfer roller clutch CL4 operations 114 115 removing 192 security page 286 securi
310. ser and imaging drum PRINT Prints a demonstration page for the printer LASERJET DEMO ACCESSORIES LIST Prints a list of optional accessories that have been installed on the printer COLOR GUIDE Prints a one page guide with hints on using color effectively Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 273 Paper Handling Menu The Paper Handling Menu allows you to configure input trays by size and type This menu can also be used to set the default media size and type Note The default mode for Tray 1 is TREY i PFEODESFIRKZT In this mode if media is loaded in Tray 1 and no other tray is requested the printer will pul media from Tray 1 regardless of the size and type of meca Oal in Lus tray To configure Tray 1 by size or type it must be configured as TRE Table 7 13 HP Color LaserJet 4500 Paper Handling Menu TRAY 1 MODE FIRST CASSETTE TRAY 1 SIZE LETTER A4 appears only if Tray 1 mode is set to LEGAL TRAY 1 MODE CASSETTE EXEC TRAY 1 TYPE appears only if Tray 1 mode is set to PREPRINTD TRAY 1 MODE CASSETTE LTRHEAD TRNSPRNCY GLOSS PREPUNCHD LABELS BOND RECYCLED COLOR HEAVY CARDSTOCK TRAY 2 TYPE same choices as TRAY 1 TYPE except LABELS and CARDSTOCK TRAY 3 TYPE same choices as TRAY 1 TYPE except LABELS and CARDSTOCK A4 LETTER NO OVERRIDE YES DEFAULT SIZE same choices as TRAY 1 SIZE Denotes default setting A 4 is the default for printers sold in Asia 274 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 C7085 9
311. setting 299 sensor PS4 124 312 settings 274 special media handling 32 supported media 29 Tray 2 assembly diagrams 352 capacity 29 cassette feed solenoid SL2 123 188 feeding operations 123 locating 25 376 Index margins setting 299 paper size switches 123 replacing paper rollers 94 sensors 123 settings 274 supported media 29 Tray 3 assembly diagrams 353 capacity 30 connector diagrams 320 feeding operations 126 locating 25 margins setting 299 ordering 326 paper size switches 126 replacing paper rollers 96 settings 274 supported media 30 wiring diagram 321 trays input capacity 29 locating 25 margins setting 299 settings 274 supported media 29 troubleshooting checklist 212 color 243 communications 268 configuration page printing 287 control panel 271 diagnostics mode 300 event log printing 292 flowchart 213 image defects 253 image formation system 243 paper path 237 power 216 quality 253 supplies status page printing 290 transparencies 263 usage page printing 291 trus head screws 141 turning off printer 139 U UEL universal exit language 269 unit life sensor ITB PS1 114 universal exit language UEL 269 UNIX networks 72 unpacking 48 49 unplugging power cord 139 upgrading firmware 98 upper drawer assembly 350 usage page printing 291 user guides ordering 43 V vacuuming 78 values registration 297 variation color 244 vector graphics 249 ventilation 20 versions drum
312. shooting C7085 90921 Table 7 35 Miscellaneous sensors and clutches Name Deserpton OOS CL1 Registration clutch on outside drawer wall Cleaning Roller Figure 7 26 Intermediate transfer belt sensors Table 7 36 Intermediate transfer belt sensors Name Description 000000000000 Intermediate transfer belt end of life lever Intermediate transfer belt home position sensor PS5 C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 311 Figure 7 27 Miscellaneous sensors with tray 1 front cover removed Table 7 37 PS3 and PS4 description Name Description 000000000000 PSS Tray 1 last page sensor PS4 Tray 1 paper sensor R 1 UD a ad ITI Wh we Tm Figure 7 28 PS6 and PS7 sensor location Table 7 38 PS6 and PS7 description Name Description Fusing assembly pressure sensor Paper exit sensor access through the opening 312 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 SW801 SW802 SW803 Figure 7 29 Miscellaneous switches Table 7 39 Switch description Name Description SW801 SW802 Paper tray size switches power supply and high voltage SW803 power supplies removed Figure 7 30 Miscellaneous switches and sensors Table 7 40 SW2 SW5 and PS13 description Name Description SW2 Top cover toner door switch Top cover rear door 24V interrupt switch PS13 Waste toner full sensor SW5 C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 31
313. sistant 42 HP Toner Cleaning Cloth 78 HP UX 72 hubs rollers 94 humidity site requirements 20 22 storing consumables 23 I O Menu 280 I O switching 58 IBM OS 2 LAN servers 72 ICC color profiles 249 identification page device 286 Illustrator Adobe 249 image formation system operations 104 troubleshooting 243 images aligning on page 114 defects troubleshooting 253 definition 80 drum life 80 imaging drum connector diagram 315 defects 265 installing 57 kits status report 290 laser exposure 106 120 life span 80 locating 84 primary charge 105 protecting 139 replacing 88 shipping 54 InDesign Adobe 250 Information Menu 273 InfraRed Receiver Fast FIR 68 initializing NVRAM 307 inkjet transparencies avoiding 31 inks specifications 33 input trays capacity 29 locating 25 margins setting 299 settings 274 supported media 29 installing imaging drum 57 memory 98 software 59 toner cartridges older versions 51 interfaces ElO 67 parallel 58 settings 280 standard 17 troubleshooting 268 Index 369 internal assemblies diagrams 337 removing 200 Internet Explorer Microsoft 285 IP based networks 285 IPX SPX 71 IrDA compliant 68 isolating problems 40 ITB cleaning roller clutch CL3 114 189 clutch assembly removing 190 drawer cover removing 151 home position detection sensor PS5 114 223 lift cams 114 locating 25 84 maintenance count 296 operations 113 paper path 122 replacing 90 secondary transf
314. sure it is in the slot surrounded by a white line with the text ROM ONLY IN THIS SLOT 62 X PRINTER ERROR Description Indicates that a problem exists with the internal memory X Description 0 Internal memory 1 3 DIMM slots 1 through 3 Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Reseat and then replace the DIMM 3 Replace the formatter board 62 M BAD MPTR Description The firmware ran out of memory trying to build the static entity directory Action 1 Check printer settings to determine which values have been changed 2 Clear the message by pressing Go 68 NVRAM ERROR CHECK SETTINGS Description One or more settings saved in the non volatile storage device are invalid Some settings might have been reset to factory defaults 68 NVRAM FULL CHECK SETTINGS Description Indicates that a non volatile storage device is full Some settings might have been reset to factory defaults Action 1 Check printer settings to determine which values have been changed 2 Clear the message by pressing Go Action 1 Check printer settings to determine which values have been changed 2 Clear the message by pressing Go 79 SERVICE XXXX PRINTER ERROR Description A hardware error has occurred X Description 01XX IO ASIC register error 02XX video ASIC register error 03XX IDE ASIC register error Action 1 hReseat the formatter R
315. t e Check that the transparencies meet the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide e Ifthe transparencies have spots or smudges reprint them being careful not to touch the surface of the media Skin oils can contaminate transparencies causing spots and smudges e Small random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages might be caused by transparencies sticking together in the face up bin Try printing the job in smaller batches e Send transparencies only to the face down output bin Transparencies created on the printer might look blurry but they can still be used successfully on reflective type portable transparency projectors Dull or dark transparencies e Ifthe transparency colors are dull or dark ensure that the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer part number C2934A for Letter and C2936A for A4 e The selected colors are undesirable when printed Select different colors in your software application or printer driver e Spots and smudges appear in the background areas of transparencies when they are projected Oil from your hands can cause spots or smudges on transparencies Reprint the transparencies being careful not to touch the surface of the transparencies e Youare using a reflective overhead projector Use a standard overhead projector Incorrect image on transparencies This might occur even though the correct media is loaded in the correct tray Toner m
316. t Log to display information on current error and correct it B After correcting all messages and errors go to Step 3 Event Log Have you evaluated the Event Log A For paper jams encountered during attempts to print Event Log see Paper path troubleshooting B Print and evaluate the Event Log C After evaluating the Event Log go to Step 4 C7085 90921 Figure 7 2 C7085 90921 Troubleshooting flowchart continued Information Pages Will it print a Configuration A Show Event Log to display information on the current error and correct if B Print Configuration Page and verifiy information C After verifying Configuration Page go to Step 5 Image Quality Does the print quality meet customer requirements A Compare Configuration Pages to samples B Perform corrective actions C After meeting print quality requirements go to Step 6 Troubleshooting flowchart 2 of 2 Interface Can the customer print successfully YES from the host system A Run a print job from the host system B Perform corrective actions Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 215 Troubleshooting power on Power on check 1 Verify that the printer is plugged into an active electrical outlet of the correct voltage 2 Verify that the power on button is pushed in 3 Verify that the duplex unit short cord is plugged in to the printer 4 Make sure the fans
317. t identified with the blue arrow CAUTION Avoid exposing the imaging drum to direct light Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 3 Slide the imaging drum down into place and close the drawer CAUTION If you need to ship the printer remove the toner cartridges and imaging drum before shipping 88 Printer maintenance C7085 90921 Replacing the transfer kit Replace the transfer kit when the printer control panel displays The transfer kit consists of an intermediate transfer belt ITB a transfer roller two air filters and a hand wipe 1 Open the ITB drawer Remove the used transfer belt by pulling up on the green handles located on the sides Locate the transfer roller inside the printer To unlock the used transfer roller gently push back and up ina rotating motion on the blue triangles located on the lower corners of the flap that is in front of the roller 4 Remove the used transfer roller by lifting it up and then out C7085 90921 Chapter 4 Printer mainte
318. t pipe arrangement along with a window in the drum assembly look for a waste fill 2 Check the sensor replace it if it s defective condition Verify that sensors and light pipes are not blocked Replace the drum kit Numerical printer error messages Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages Refer to the jam troubleshooting section for the complete details about locating jams see page 237 XX Description Action 4500 4550 0 Jam in input feed area Jam in fusing area Jam in fusing area 2 Note the jam message Jam in duplex reversing unit 3 Note the location of the media Jam in duplex feed unit Jam in duplex paper feed area or ITB drawer Jam in duplex paper feed area or ITB drawer Jam in paper feed area or ITB drawer Door open jam Irregular jam in paper path Paper in the paper path is too short Paper in the paper path is too long see page 237 for complete details 12 Paper did not clear input sensor in time 1 Note the location of the leading edge of the first jammed piece of media alternates with CHECK ALL REAR DOORS Description Action Media is jammed in the rear paper path or rear 1 Open the rear duplex door if installed and duplexing area remove any jammed media Open the upper rear door and remove any jammed media alternates with CHECK MIDDLE FRONT DOORS Description Action Media is jammed in the transfer belt area or media is 1 not being picked up properly l Open the ITB
319. t the home position Side registration motor Side registration guide Duplex feed roller ee AN Print paper A Duplex feed Side registration home Duplex feed Duplex pick up paper roller position sensor PS3105 roller sensor PS3104 Side registration adjustment When the duplex paper pick up sensor PS3103 detects paper the paper is fed along the feed rollers Once the duplex paper pick up sensor PS3103 detects the paper the paper is stopped and the paper is freed from the feed rollers According to the paper size data received from the DC controller the duplex driver runs the side registration motor M3103 the prescribed number of pulses moving the side registration guide and aligning the paper position This completes the side registration in the paper process Print paper Duplex feed roller Duplex pick up pressure sub roller sensor lever Toon pen idi d Lug dm AJ EN re Reversing Side unit registration Duplex guide Duplex pick up sensor feed roller Duplex feed roller pressure 130 Theory of operation C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Duplex unit pick up operation After the side registration adjustment is completed the duplex driver sends the refed paper presence status to the printer Once the status is reviewed by the printer it sends the duplex unit pick up command to the duplex driver The duplex driver activates the duplex feed motor M3101 and feeds the paper When the paper is
320. tat wm asd Da e eet we A A een hd V Ud 300 Engine dlagHoslleS sou ated de mie a Ad AA ec eara V tert ad 302 NMRAMint alzado tot ts drap Sadi Ra ICT d RUE dre ene e qc og aU ea p i uas 307 Diagrams sce sc o vu ero sois cebat ed ta epu Lem nh A ise D E Dona i Ls de id ered 308 210 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Introduction C7085 90921 This troubleshooting chapter assumes the reader has a basic understanding of the color laser printing process Explanations of each mechanical assembly printer systems and the basic theory operation are found in Chapter 5 Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes without fully understanding the function of each mechanism This chapter contains the following sections Troubleshooting process includes a pre troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flowchart These tools contain information about common printer errors that can inhibit proper operation or create print quality problems These tools also include recommendations for solving the cause of the error Printer error troubleshooting explains each control panel display message and suggests recommendations for clearing the cause of each message When the printer message indicates a failure whose root cause is not obvious use the printer error troubleshooting section and the troubleshooting tools section found later in this chapter to solve the problem Paper path troubleshooting provides techniques to solve feed problems Explanations
321. te toner sensor Light emitter Light receiver Toner feed plate Detection window Photosensitive drum Waste toner Waste toner reservoir Figure 5 14 Waste toner As the waste toner reservoirs fill a waste toner sensor PS13 monitors the level of waste toner Light from a photo sensor emitter moves along a light guide to a window on the drum The light passes through one of the waste toner reservoirs as shown in Figure 5 14 to the receiving side of the waste toner sensor A stirrer rotates past the window to clean away waste toner to prevent false readings As the reservoir fills the length of time the window remains clear shortens The DC Controller monitors this time and when the threshold is reached the cz TE TOMER FULL message is displayed on the front panel At this point the printer stops printing and the drum cartridge must be replaced Under normal printing conditions the 2L LIFE OUT message will be seen first Only when printing full color pages with a high percentage of coverage or when a lot of waste toner is removed from the ITB will the iic TE TOMER FULL message be displayed before the PL LIFE OUT message Intermediate transfer belt The entire print image forms on the intermediate transfer belt ITB before being transferred to the media The image formation section of this chapter includes a description of this process and discusses operation of the motors and other items associated
322. technologies Object tagging allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used for different objects on a page text graphics and photos The printer analyzes objects the page contains and intelligently uses halftone and color settings that provide the best print quality for each object Object tagging combined with optimized default settings produces great color out of the box In the Windows environment you will find the HP ColorSmart Il Automatic and Manual settings on the Color tab in the printer driver Color management options Print in grayscale Selecting the Print in Grayscale option in the printer driver allows you to print your document in black and white This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output for color documents that will be photocopied or faxed Automatic color adjustment The Automatic color adjustment feature of HP ColorSmart II the default setting optimizes the color and halftones used for each element of a document Automatic also provides additional color options for application and operating systems that support color management systems For more information see your printer driver online Help Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing all color documents Manual color adjustment The Manual color adjustment feature of HP ColorSmart II allows you to adjust the color and halftone modes for text graphics and photographs To use the Manual co
323. ter Other causes include poor quality parallel cables poor connections or home grown applications On rare occasions the formatter is at fault which is usually indicated by a 79 Service Error Note See the diagram on page 229 for help with troubleshooting 49 errors 228 Troubleshooting Note Action Indicates that a firmware error occurred that caused 4 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Verify that all cables are connected Cancel all print jobs then resend Try to isolate any offending print job Delete the print job from the Windows spooler or from the print server If the formatter pan assembly or DC controller was removed make sure the ribbon cable between the DC controller and the interconnect PCB is connected The printer control panel will display 49 FFFF and the display will be dark if the ribbon cable is not connected To verify that the formatter is functioning properly run the formatter tests available in the diagnostics mode see page 300 If the formatter passes the formatter is not defective DO NOT replace the formatter C7085 90921 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages continued Troubleshooting 49 errors HP Color LaserJet 4500 Error 49 Troubleshooting Customer calls with an Error 49 Condition 1 Collect Complete Error code 49 XXXX 2 If one of the known 49 errors follow the appropriate steps to resolve the problem 3 Cancel the print job from the
324. ter is ready the control panel displays Install the other three toner cartridges by repeating steps 3 through 9 11 After installing the fourth toner cartridge close the top cover and press Go Wait while the printer runs an internal color calibration The calibration takes a few minutes When the printer is ready the control panel displays READ 56 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 Installing the imaging drum CAUTION Avoid exposing the imaging drum to direct light Exposure to light for more than 15 seconds can seriously damage the imaging drum 1 Pull open the drum drawer until it stops 2 Align the imaging drum over the drawer so that the arrow on top points to the rear of the printer and the blue end cap on the side slides into the slot identified with the blue arrow Slide the imaging drum down into place Push the front upper drawer shut Wait while the printer runs an internal color calibration The calibration takes a few minutes When the printer is ready the control panel displays RERE CAUTION If you need to ship the printer remove the toner cartridges and imaging drum before shipping C7085 90921 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 57 Figure 3 2 Note Using the parallel cable The printer can connect to the computer with a bidirectional parallel cable IEEE 1284C compliant see Figure 3 2 Connect the male C
325. the end of the toner cartridge If the tab breaks off pull on the tape CAUTION Do not shake the toner cartridge after you have removed the inside tape Doing so could cause toner to spill 7 Position the toner cartridge over the cartridge slot so that the blue arrow on the toner cartridge points to the blue arrow on the printer 52 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 8 Make sure that the tab on the other end of the toner cartridge aligns with the notch on the cartridge slot Note If the tab does not fit in the notch when you insert the toner cartridge the toner is the wrong color for that cartridge slot 9 Hold the toner cartridge so that the arrow on the right side of the cartridge the control panel side of the printer points straight down 10 Slide the toner cartridge down into the slot until the cartridge stops 11 Rotate the toner cartridge toward the back of the printer within the cartridge slot until the cartridge stops The cartridge shutter opens to reveal the developer sleeve C7085 90921 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 53 54 Installation and configuration 12 Lower the flap to partially cover the toner cartridge and close the top cover Note 13 14 15 You must close the top cover before installing the next toner cartridge On the
326. timum performance Table 1 4 Environmental specifications 22 Printer description Item Operating Temperature Recommended 20 to 26 C 68 to 79 F Allowed 15 to 30 C 59 to 86 F Humidity Recommended 20 to 50 RH Allowed 10 to 80 RH Altitude Allowed 0 to 3100 m 0 to 10 000 ft C7085 90921 Consumable storage requirements The life of consumables is greatly affected by their storage environment Use Table 1 5 to determine the shelf life of stored consumables Table 1 5 Consumable storage requirements Item Storage time Storage condition Normal maximum of 0 to 35 C 32 to 95 2 5 years F High 35 to 40 C 95 to 104 F Low 0 to 20 C 32 to 4 F 40 to 15 C 104 to 59 F within 3 minutes 20 to 25 C 4 to 77 F within 3 minutes 35 to 85 RH Temperature Severe maximum of 18 days Maximum temperature change rate Humidity Normal maximum of 2 5 years Severe maximum of High 85 to 95 RH 18 days Low 10 to 35 RH 460 to 760 mm Hg 18 1 to 29 9 in Hg Atmospheric pressure Average storage time 1 year Printer specifications Table 1 6 describes the dimensions of the printer Table 1 6 Printer dimensions HP Color LaserJet 4500 4500N 395 mm 15 6 inches HP Color LaserJet 4500 DN 578 mm 22 8 inches HP Color LaserJet 4550 4500N 395 mm 15 6 inches HP Color LaserJet 4550DN 4550HDN
327. tly verify that the ribbon connector from the DC controller PCA to the HVPS is properly seated at both ends Verify that the photoconductive drum is rotating properly Perform the drum diagnostic test to visually observe if the drum is rotating or using a felt tipped marker place an index mark on the edge of the drum outside the image area Turn on the printer wait for drum rotation to occur and then look to see if the drum has moved If the drum has not moved investigate the mechanical and electrical drum rotation circuitry and movement mechanisms The imaging drum shutter might not be retracting Replace the imaging drum 256 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 No image available C7085 90921 Character voids Use media that meets HP paper specifications The surface of the paper is too rough or too smooth for proper toner adhesion he wrong side of the paper is being used for printing e he transparencies are not designed for proper toner adhesion The transfer roller is defective e he laser scanner assembly is defective Colorless output black only Make sure clutch CL2 is connected plugged into the paper PCA This defect can be caused by improper timing on the ITB clutch gears Make sure that the cams are in sync The two white gears on the left side of the printer see Figure 6 47 should have two timing marks pointing toward each other e Cams with a single line should be off one tooth clockw
328. to the ElO ports and that the ElO board is seated properly If possible print to another network printer to verify the network is working properly All data in the print buffer will be lost 41 3 UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE alternates with CHECK PAPER IN TRAY X 4500 Or 41 3 UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE alternates with LOAD TRAY X TYPE SIZE 4550 Description A tray is configured for a specific paper size but the sheet loaded is a different size This error often occurs when the printer is multifeeding 41 5 UNEXPECTED PAPER TYPE alternates with CHECK PAPER IN TRAY X Description A tray is configured for a specific media type but the 4 printer detects a different media type loaded The most common cause for this error is a jam at registration plate under the ITB where the customer does not remove the paper The engine tries to check the OHT sensor and receives an error message Action Load the requested size media in tray Action Verify that the correct media type is loaded in the input tray and the printer control panel is configured correctly Clean the detection windows of OHT sensors 1 and 2 see Figure 7 24 49 ERROR XXXX CYCLE POWER Description the processor on the formatter to abort operation This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands corrupt data or invalid operations In some cases electrical noise in the cable can corrupt data during transmission to the prin
329. toShop 247 249 air filters locating 84 replacing 91 alerts page 286 alphabetical lists error messages 217 part numbers 355 altitude 22 ammonia based cleaners avoiding 78 applications PANTONE support 249 SRGB support 247 ASCII escape sequence 75 assemblies locating 25 remanufactured 42 removing 139 replacing 40 atmospheric pressure 23 automatic color adjustment 246 automatic PANTONE calibration 248 B B connector 58 backgrounds troubleshooting gray 258 scatter 254 balance adjusting color 250 gray 252 banding troubleshooting 254 base memory 16 base models 14 beam detect BD mirror 120 C7085 90921 bidirectional parallel cable connecting 59 pin configuration 60 specifications 58 troubleshooting 268 black lines troubleshooting 255 261 black pages troubleshooting 255 257 black toner cartridges density setting 252 installing 51 54 part numbers 327 replacement intervals 142 replacing 86 blade cleaning 109 blank pages troubleshooting 256 blurry images 257 BNC ports 65 board formatter 98 brush cleaning 85 C C connector 26 58 cabinet ordering 326 cables DIN 8 72 Ethernet 65 parallel 58 part numbers 325 ThinLan 65 calibration PANTONE 248 toner cartridges 54 Calibration Menu 281 caliper transparencies 31 cams diagrams 348 ITB 114 pick up 124 removing 208 secondary transfer roller 115 capacity circuit 22 input trays 29 output bins 17 cardstock printing 32 supporte
330. tor today and the convergence standard for High Definition Television Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room s lighting can affect the appearance of colors on your screen The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop CorelDRAW M Microsoft Office and many other applications use sRGB to communicate color Most importantly as the default color space in Microsoft Operating Systems sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between applications and devices using a common definition that ensures typical users will experience greatly improved color matching SRGB combined with HP ColorSmart Il improves the user s ability to match colors between the printer the computer monitor and other input devices scanner digital camera automatically e Vivid enhances the saturation of the printed colors to produce a vivid color appearance For more information see your printer driver online Help Matching colors C7085 90921 The process of matching printer output color to your monitor is quite complex because printers and computer monitors use different methods of producing color Monitors display colors by light pixels using an RGB red green blue color process but printers print colors using a CMYK cyan magenta yellow and black process Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor These factors include Print media Printer colorants inks or toner
331. ts use an ohmmeter to verify functionality of SW3 Open the drawer and firmly push the drawer closed using one hand in the middle of the drawer m 5 Verify FMS in the front of the Imaging drum drawer is functioning properly The fan con nects via J77 to J1022 on the DC Controller Note Closing the drawer also closes SW4 the drum drawer switch When SW4 is open the 24 V supply is disabled This safety feature protects the operator from high voltages when the drum or ITB drawer is open COLD RESET 4500 Or RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS 4550 Description Action The cold reset power up sequence has been entered Most printer variables will reset to their factory default values CONTINUOUS PAGE PRESS CANCEL JOB 4500 Description Action The printer configuration page is being printed continuously Press Cancel Job to terminate continuous configuration page printing and return the printer to the EFE state Note The 4550 has a paper path test that can be run from the Infomraiton menu DATA RECEIVED Description Action The printer has received and processed data and is waiting Press Cancel Job and resend the last page of the job for a form feed making sure a form feed is sent with it or press Go to feed a new sheet of media through the printer Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 219 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer error messages continued DENSITY SENSOR OUT OF RANGE alternates with CLEAN DENSITY SENS
332. ty network 73 74 selecting media 28 self tapping screws 141 374 Index sensors diagrams 308 311 314 paper jam 122 237 PS1 ITB unit life 114 PS10 carousel position 118 119 PS11 toner cartridge contact separation 118 119 PS12 toner level 118 119 PS13 waste toner 113 313 PS14 toner density 85 111 PS2 registration paper 122 123 131 PS3 last paper 124 125 312 PS3001 paper feeder paper detection 126 PS301 overhead transparency 125 PS3101 reversed paper 122 129 PS3103 duplex pick up 122 130 PS3104 duplex pick up paper 122 129 PS3105 side registration home position 130 PS4 multipurpose tray 124 312 PS5 home position detection 114 223 PS6 fusing unit pressure release 127 312 PS7 delivery paper 122 127 312 PS8 cassette paper 123 PS9 face down bin paper full 127 224 testing 303 304 separation pad cleaning 78 operations 124 separation process 108 separation rollers cleaning 78 locating 84 serial numbers locating 18 140 setting 296 server embedded Web 285 service approach 40 service mode 293 settings color 244 246 color balance 250 Configuration Menu 276 halftone 245 interface 280 locking 73 margins 298 network security 74 paper trays 274 PowerSave 63 print jobs 278 printer drivers 69 registration values 297 restoring defaults 282 shafts removing cam 208 roller 205 sharkskin troubleshooting 260 sharpness settings 245 sheet metal parts handling 139 shippin
333. u also need to set this value to zero Setting transfer maintenance count 1 Press the Item key until transfer maintenance count appears 2 Press the VALUE key to set the number 3 Press SELECT to save 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the other numbers if required Fuser maintenance count The fuser maintenance count functions the same way as other HP LaserJet printers This count is the actual life of the fusing unit and is used to indicate its end of life If the fuser is replaced before the end of life message appears the fuser count must be reset to zero An actual end of life condition will have a reset to clear the end of life message and set the fuser count to zero Setting fuser maintenance count 1 Press the ITem key until FUSER MAINTENANCE COUNT appears 2 Press the VALUE key to set the number 3 Press SELECT to save 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the other numbers if required Color page count Color page count is used to track the number of pages printed with any color other than black Although this count is not critical there might be customers who use it to track the number of color documents printed If the number needs to be reentered select a number which is as close as possible to the original An earlier configuration page is a great source if one can be found Setting color page count 1 Press the rev key until COL z PEGE COUNT appears 296 Troubleshooting C7085 90921 Note
334. u can lock all of the menus and you can even lock the CANCEL Jos key When the printer control panel is locked unauthorized users who try to change settings at the control panel receive the following message Levels of security Table 3 1 Printer security levels Lock setting Control panel items locked 0 None No items are locked 1 Minimum Configuration Menu Calibration Menu I O Menu Resets Menu 2 Moderate Configuration Menu Resets Menu I O Menu Paper Handling Menu Calibration Menu 3 Maximum Configuration Menu Paper Handling Menu I O Menu Information Menu Calibration Menu Printing Menu Resets Menu CANCEL JOB key Use HP JetAdmin software HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh or an ASCII escape sequence to perform this procedure HP software which comes on the software CD ROM is easier to use than an ASCII escape sequence For instructions about locking the control panel by using either HP JetAdmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh go to the online Help for that software 74 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 Note C7085 90921 Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set network security If you decide to use the ASCII escape sequence you must use an MS DOS or Windows ASCII editor to create the commands The commands must also be sent to the printer by using a DOS COPY command or an ASCII file download utility The PUL Technical Reference Manual is located on CD ROM part nu
335. uires 40 MB of memory 64 MB of memory is recommended for optimal duplex printing If the 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 is installed the duplex unit must be positioned between the printer and Tray 3 PowerSave setting High content of recyclable components and materials e 80 internal fonts Chapter 1 Printer description 15 Table 1 1 Printer features continued Feature CPU Memory standard Memory optional 16 Printer description Description The Color LaserJet 4500 series formatter PCB incorportates a 133 MHz RISC processor The Color LaserJet 4550 series formatter PCB incorporates a 233 MHz RISC processor HP Color LaserJet 4500 series 32 MB RAM Base 64 MB RAM HP Color LaserJet 4500 N 4500 DN Memory Enhancement Technology MEt which automatically compresses data to use RAM more efficiently HP Color LaserJet 4550 series 64 MB RAM Base 128 MB RAM HP Color LaserJet 4550DN and HDN Memory Enhancement Technology MEt which automatically compresses data to use RAM more efficiently HP Color LaserJet 4500 series Install 4 8 16 32 or 64 MB DIMMs into the three DIMM slots to a possible total 208 MB Synchronous SDRAM modules do not need to be configured in pairs in corresponding left and right slots If you install more than 208 MB of RAM it will not be used by the printer HP Color LaserJet 4550 series Install 64 or 128 MB DIMMS into the two DIMM slots to a possible total of 192 MB I
336. umerical parts list Ptume oesrpion ar trons RG5 5135 000CN JjFace down delivery assembly RG5 5142 000CN Drum drawer assembly 6 RG5 5142 000CN Drum drawer assembly 1 RG5 5149 000CN Sensor PS14 density 2 RG5 5150 000CN Cover top 1 RG5 5151 000CN Cover left side 9 RG5 5152 000CN Cover drum drawer 8 RG5 5154 000CN Fuser 110V 11 RG5 5155 000CN Fuser 220V 11 RG5 5163 000CN Carousel brake assembly 12 RG5 5165 000CN High voltage power supply 4 RG5 5170 000CN Door switch assembly 14B RG5 5173 000CN ITB assembly 6 RG5 5175 000CN JjLaser scanner assembly 9 RG5 5180 000CN Developing PCB 1 RG5 5180 000CN Developing PCB 5 RG5 5186 000CN Cable main 4 RG5 5187 000CN Cable developer 2 RG5 5195 000CN Cable control panel 4 6 6 RG5 5209 000CN Carousel drive assembly RG5 5230 000CN Drum drawer assembly RG5 5230 000CN Drum drawer assembly 1 RG5 5230 000CN Kit imaging drum drawer Not shown RG5 5232 000CN Cover drum drawer 8 RG5 5247 000CN Continuous toner level sensor 15 RG5 5249 000CN Carousel assembly 11 RG5 5254 000CN DC controller PCB 2 RG5 5254 000CN DC controller PCB 3 RG5 5444 000CN Cable level sensor 16 RH2 5334 000CN Cable laser flat 11 RH2 5335 000CN Cable video interface 1 RH3 2219 000CN Power supply 110V 3 RH3 2220 000CN Power supply 220V
337. until KESET MEHL appears 14 Press Item until MEL FLESER EIT SELECT IF DONE appears Then press SELECT 15 Press Go to return the printer to READ C7085 90921 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 97 DIMM configuration You can add additional Random Access Memory RAM to this printer by installing Dual Inline Memory Modules DIMMs The HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer uses 100 pin non parity synchronous DRAM memory modules The HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer uses 168 pin synchronous DRAM memory modules The SDRAM modules do not need to be configured in pairs in corresponding left and right slots Note Extended Data Output EDO DIMMs are not supported Adding memory HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer You can install 4 8 16 32 or 64 MB DIMMs into the printer s three DIMM slots The DIMM slots can be used to add memory fonts or firmware upgrades HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer You can install 64 or 128 MB DIMMs into the printer s two DIMM slots The DIMM slots may be used to add memory only You can add fonts or firmware upgrades to the printer s two 100 pin slots Note The HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer will recognize RAM only up to 208 MB The HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer will recognize RAM only up to 192 MB Add
338. ur Macintosh computer LocalTalk configuration To connect the printer to a Macintosh computer on a Local Talk network use the HP Local Talk Cable Kit You will need a kit for each printer and an additional kit for each Macintosh computer on your network UNIX networks HP JetAdmin software provides a TCP IP based solution for configuring and managing HP JetDirect print servers on HP UX Solaris and SunOS systems 72 Installation and configuration C7085 90921 Setting network security on the printer This printer features control panel locking which allows network administrators to prevent users from changing certain printer control panel settings When a menu is locked unauthorized users trying to change settings in the printer control panel will receive the following message You can use HP JetAdmin software the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh or an ASCII escape sequence to perform this procedure For instructions on locking the printer control panel using either the HP JetAdmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh see the online Help for these utilities C7085 90921 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 73 Locking the control panel You can prevent users from changing printer control panel settings by establishing a password and locking the printer control panel The control panel offers multiple levels of security You can lock certain control panel menus allowing users to change the rest of the menus or yo
339. ures 6 57 and 6 58 and remove the fan shield Disconnect the fan cable J209 from the developing PCB Unweave the fan cable from the cable stays a Bb W N Release the plastic tabs at the top and bottom of the fan housing and then slide the fan out Large right side fan replacement tip Ensure that the fan cable is facing out and located in the lower corner Figure 6 57 Large right side fan removal and replacement 1 of 2 C7085 90921 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 195 A j 1 q 4 pa 1 ss p 3 EM 00 imm T A nd s i Figure 6 58 Large right side fan removal and replacement 2 of 2 196 Removal and replacement C7085 90921 Left side fan To remove the left side fan 1 a Bb W N o Remove the top cover Remove the left side cover Remove the rear door Disconnect the cable shown in callout 1 Figure 6 59 Remove the three screws from the left rear fan shield shown in Figures 6 59 and 6 60 callout 2 and remove the fan shield Disconnect the cable shown in callout 1 Figure 6 61 Remove the screw from the black plastic cover and remove the fan casing shown in callout 2 Figure 6 61 Free the fan cable from the cable stay Press out on the three plastic tabs and slide the fan out Left side fan replacement tip Verify the label is facing out when replacing the left side fan r A a M5 L es gt de h 3 ui lt i L D E gt s ta D s D f z
340. urpose tray pick up roller a ai Paper lifting plate PS301 PS4 Tray 1 manual feed Table 5 3 Motors solenoids clutches and sensors Reference Description M2 Pick up motor SL1 Multi purpose tray pick up solenoid CL1 Registration clutch PS2 Registration paper sensor PS3 Last paper sensor PS4 Multi purpose tray paper sensor PS301 OHT sensor 124 Theory of operation C7085 90921 Last paper detected The printer detects the last page of the print job before writing the next image This prevents toner particles from smearing on the photosensitive drum and ITB To detect the last paper the last paper sensor PS3 monitors the rotation of the last paper detection roller on the multi purpose tray If there are two or more sheets in the multi purpose tray the last paper detection roller does not rotate when one sheet is picked up Once the last paper is picked up the last paper detection roller rotates PS3 monitors this rotation and a warning message is sent to the control panel Multi purpose pick up roller Last paper sensor PS3 The last paper detection The last paper detection roller turns roller does not turn lt Normal paper pick up gt Last paper pick up Figure 5 28 Laser paper detected Overhead transparency detection Overhead transparencies OHT are detected by the OHT sensor PS301 located at the front of the
341. user maintenance count transfer maintenance count color page count and total page count 4 2 3 4 Remove the formatter from the printer by removing the six screws Remove the ElO cards if any from the ElO slots Disconnect the L shaped I O card from the formatter by lifting up on the narrow end of the PCB While lifting the two black plastic tabs located over the ElO connectors on the formatter PCB slide the formatter PCB out of the cradle Lift the narrow end of the L shaped I O card so the connectors have clearance 10 11 12 13 Install the new formatter PCB by sliding it into the cradle Reconnect the L shaped I O card to the formatter PCB Pull all DIMMs from the old formatter PCB and install them on the new formatter PCB making sure the firmware DIMM is installed in the ROM ONLY DIMM slot of the HP Color LaserJet 4500 printer or Slot 3 J7 of the HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer Install the ElO cards if any Install the formatter back into the printer Power up the printer in NVRAM initialization mode as follows Step 1 Hold down both the CanceL Jos and SELECT keys until all the LED lights are on then release the keys Step 2 Press CANCEL JOB Step 3 Press SELECT Once initialization is complete turn off the printer then turn it back on in service mode see Service mode on page 293 for more information Enter the printer s serial number fuser maintenance count transfer maintena
342. vacuum specifically designed for cleaning toner can be used if it is capable of filtering fine particles 5 microns in diameter 78 Printer maintenance C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Toner catch tray and transport assembly Thoroughly clean the toner catch tray and clean or replace the paper transport assembly These assemblies are easily accessed once the fusing assembly has been removed see Toner catch tray and paper transport assembly on page 204 To remove the toner catch tray pull downward on the tab and slide the tray out of the rear of the printer To remove the transport assembly remove the one screw shown in Figure 6 69 on page 204 and then slide the assembly to the left Once the assembly is free of the spline gear drive you can easily maneuver the assembly out of the rear of the printer Thoroughly vacuum the assembly and the cavity where the transport assembly rests When re installing the transport assembly there are two tabs on the right side of the assembly that must be aligned to the printer s frame the white drive gear splines on the assembly must be aligned with the driving gear mechanism on the printer Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 79 Approximate replacement intervals for consumable items Imaging drum life Images versus pages The life of the imaging drum about 25 000 pages is stated in terms of A 4 Letter size images The number of images printed for each sheet of paper varies depending on the mix of c
343. venting the fan from rotating freely 3 Verify that the fan s connector is firmly seated into connector J208 of the developing PCB 4 Ifthe error persists replace fan 57 3 FAN ERROR alternates with CLOSE UPPER FRONT DRAWER Description Action ds ian fan A e d Do ed of the 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer TEE eM refer to Figure 7 32 The drum Due to the difficulty of observation listen to drawer is referred to as the upper front drawer for hear if the fan is rotating end users Fan rotation stops when the drawer is l opened A fan error message appears when fan 2 Verify FM3 connector 27 callout 3 in motion is NOT detected by the DC controller s Continued on next page Figure 7 32 is not damaged or broken Continued on next page Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 235 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages continued micro processor if the drawer is closed and the printer is not in PowerSave mode 3 Verify the fan connector is firmly seated into connector J1022 of the DC controller PCB 4 Ifthe error persists replace the fan 62 NO SYSTEM Description Indicates there is a printer firmware problem Either there is no firmware DIMM installed or the DIMM has failed If the formatter was just replaced make sure all DIMMs have been moved from the old formatter to the new one Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Reseat the firmware DIMM making
344. washing off clothing 37 waste cleaning 109 113 toner cartridges access cover 25 contact separation sensor PS11 118 119 installing older versions 51 level detection 120 life span 83 locating 84 motor M5 118 134 part numbers 327 Index 375 replacement intervals 142 replacing 86 safety data sheet 37 shipping 54 status report printing 290 transfer operations 107 Toner Cleaning Cloth HP 78 toner density sensor PS14 cleaning 85 operations 111 toner level sensor PS12 118 119 tools required 140 top cover release button 25 removing 144 switch assembly removing 161 top drawer assembly removing 163 top drawer cover removing 149 top output bin capacity 17 locating 25 top of page signal 114 total page count 297 tracking color page count 296 fuser maintenance 296 page count 297 transfer maintenance 296 trailing edge detecting 129 transfer kits life span 83 ordering 325 replacement intervals 142 replacing 89 status report printing 290 transfer maintenance count 296 transfer operations 107 transfer plates waste toner 109 transfer roller cleaning 78 locating 84 operations 114 removing 207 replacing 89 transparencies defects troubleshooting 263 detection sensor PS301 125 HP supported 30 ordering 326 print speed 17 printing 31 supported sizes 29 transport assembly removing 204 Tray 1 assembly diagrams 351 capacity 29 feeding operations 124 locating 25 margins
345. wiring diagram verify that connectors J102 and J106 of the feed PCB are firmly seated If the error still persists replace the fusing motor and the feed PCB in sequence If the shaft rotates both forward and reverse and the 50 7 fuser error appears the cause of the error is related to the motion feedback circuitry Remove the fusing assembly and verify the sensor flag see Figure 7 27 is in good condition and functional Verify the connector at sensor PS6 see Figure 7 27 is firmly seated Clean the sensor of dust and debris If the error persists replace sensor PS6 Action 1 2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Verify connectors J1102 on the laser driver PCB and J1008 on the DC controller are seated properly Verify connectors J551 on the beam detect PCB and J1006 on the DC controller are seated properly Replace the laser scanner unit C7085 90921 C7085 90921 Table 7 3 Numerical printer error messages continued 52 SCANNER ERROR 4500 Or 52 PRINTER ERROR 4550 Description Indicates that a scanner error has occurred 4 2 53 XY ZZ PRINTER ERROR Description Indicates a memory error If a DIMM caused the error the DIMM will not be recognized configured X z MemoryType Y Device Location 0 Onboard 1 DIMM slot 1 2 DIMM slot 2 3 DIMM slot 3 ZZ Error Number 0 Unsupported memory 1 Unrecognized memory 3 Failed RAM test 54 1 PRINTER ERR
346. with the ITB Figure 5 15 shows the components associated with the ITB Photo sensitive Intermediate PS5 transfer belt ITB cleaning roller PS1 Secondary transfer roller o Contact cam Contact separation m cam Figure 5 15 Transfer unit function ITB contact lever C7085 90921 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 113 Figure 5 16 When the printer receives a print command the ITB is lifted into position against the drum This is accomplished when the ITB lift cam is rotated and the cams press against the lift levers located on each side of the ITB Drive force for the ITB lift cam is provided by M1 and applied to the cam when CL2 is activated Once CL2 is activated to lift the ITB both CL4 and CL3 are activated to position the transfer roller and cleaning roller against the transfer belt The transfer roller is used to stabilize the belt s side to side movement during its initial contact with the drum while the cleaning roller prepares the belt for the image Just before the black image reaches the transfer roller both CL4 and CL3 are deactivated again to remove the transfer roller and cleaning roller from the transfer belt This procedure only occurs when the ITB is lifted into position against the drum The print process continues as described in the image formation section Once the full image is on the ITB both CL4 and CL3 are activated and the transfer roller a
347. y 2 locate the paper roller and the cover next to the roller Squeeze the cover release lever and open the cover bb c N Remove the old paper roller from Tray 2 by squeezing together the blue tabs and then sliding the roller off its spindle Note The feed roller has a D shaped hub and the separation roller has a round shaped hub C7085 90921 5 Install a new paper roller on Tray 2 Slide the new roller onto the spindle until the roller clicks into place 6 Close the cover Inside the tray cavity on the printer locate the paper roller in the top of the tray cavity 8 Squeeze the blue tabs on the roller and remove the old paper roller from the tray cavity C7085 90921 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 95 gt 96 Printer maintenance 10 11 12 Install a new paper roller on the tray cavity Slide the new roller onto the spindle until the roller clicks into place Replace Tray 2 If you have the optional 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 repeat steps 3 through 9 to replace the two paper rollers for Tray 3 Remove the paper roller in the tray cavity for Tray 3 in the opposite direction from the paper roller in the other tray cavity C7085 90921 13 Turn the printer on When the printer control panel displays HERD reset the printer for the new fuser kit and push Menu on the control panel
348. y 60 to 176 g m 16 to 47 Ib bond media when the media is less than or equal to 148 mm 5 8 inches wide If the media is more than or equal to 148 mm 5 8 inches wide the printer can handle only 60 to 135 g m 16 to 36 Ib bond Use transparencies that are 0 13 mm 5 mil thick J Paper that has absorbed moisture causes paper feed problems When the printer is used in a humid area damp paper might be the cause of recurring paper feed and print quality problems L Damaged paper paper with ragged edges or paper whose edges stick together cause jams L Using paper that has already been through a laser printer or a copier can cause jams J Print quality can degrade if media with a high resistivity is being used specifically when duplexing C7085 90921 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 241 Jam recovery This printer provides a jam recovery feature that allows you to set the printer to automatically attempt to recover from jams All pages affected by the jam will be reprinted if the jam recovery feature is enabled The options are Printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages Printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages Note During the recovery process the printer might reprint several good pages that were printed before the jam occurred Be sure to remove any duplicated pages To enable jam recovery Press MENU until CCHE PGUERTIOM MEHL appears Press ITEM until JRA RECCOUEEY appears Press VALUE until amp appears
349. y removal and replacement 1 of 2 2 0 ee 190 Figure 6 53 ITB clutch assembly removal and replacement 2 of 2 2 0 cc eee 190 viii Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 6 54 Transfer roller cam clutch removal and replacement 0 0000 cece eee 6 55 Left side gears removal and replacement 1 of 2 2 0 cc eee 6 56 Left side gears removal and replacement 2 Of 2 2 eee 6 57 Large right side fan removal and replacement 1 of 2 0 0 cc ee 6 58 Large right side fan removal and replacement 2 of 2 2 0 ee 6 59 Left side fan removal and replacement 1 of 3 eee 6 60 Left side fan removal and replacement 2 of 3 1 ee eee 6 61 Left side fan removal and replacement 3 of 3 0 eee 6 62 Rear paper path assembly removal and replacement 20 0 0 eee eee 6 63 Cartridge carousel replacement formatter pan assembly 1 of 6 6 64 Cartridge carousel replacement continuous toner level sensor assembly 2 of 6

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Wooden Camera 157100  manual DELTA3    Samsung SCX-1480 User Manual  Multibrackets M Public  OPERATOR`S MANUAL  RFIDタグ応用ソリューションのご紹介  thermostat_carel_pj32c00000  取扱説明書 - YAMABISHI  C-1000 Owner`s Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file